Category Archives: Conspiracies

Triumph Of The Beta Male

This is social engineering to the core. They just want to destroy the strong family units so that they can control people better. And what could be better way than feminize men and make them weak gays. Then when men are weak and families are broken and disabled they can take the absolute control of us. If you want to know more about this, all of it is designed and on the list of Elite/Illuminati or whatever you want to call them.

Here are couple of links for more info about social engineering:

And here is a good video about how gay-agenda is infecting Hollywood etc. :

An here is the small post from this agenda:

Gross no thanks; so unattractive. This image is being sold to males, and maybe started as a metro-sexual image thing.

These types as a BF or husband (lol) mean it’s ME that’s checking the oil and water on their (THEIR) car, me that relights the pilot light in a storm, mows the lawn, fixes things around the house as they appear, me who’s sanding and staining the coffee table, me that carried all the heavy stuff when moving, me that schedules car service, tradies, vet visits, me that notices the white ants in the timber, me that can use a gun, a router, a chainsaw, drive a truck, dig and prune the garden, climb the roof to check the roof leak, etc!!

I can do all those things myself (and I never wait for someone else to do something for me) – but I wouldn’t consider a man my ‘equal’ unless he can do them too.

‘Beta males’ would leave me no time to do anything because I’d be babysitting them. I need time to cook, clean, sew, and keep healthy so I can be Alpha Goddess to your Alpha Godlike persona!

Girly men are 100% Friend-zoned!

Males – get your Alpha on! – Impress us ladies with all that masculinity that we only have bits of from our little testostorone levels. We are different, and we like that you are too.

As a man, your goals are to grow big and strong and super-smart to protect your wife, children, mother, and grandmother.

#alphamalesftw #dontbelievethehype

This is not a joke. This is an actual major Hollywood magazine. This is what they have been politically, electronically and chemically nurturing men to be.

Women prefer alpha males. All of nature prefers the alpha. What more fucking proof do we need that The Beast, Hollywood and Mainstream Media/Pop Culture are trying to condition us against nature, make us backward, and thus dysfunctional? When men like this become the norm, who is going to fight for what is Right? These guys? Maybe by remote control or keyboard, and only insofar as they cannot get in trouble that way.

Can you see it?

Source

Florida shooting hoax and crisis actor David Hogg

Hi! It is time to wake-up guys. These all school shootings have been so suspicious and the merging of so called crisis actors, that it is just time to wake-up, I have nothing else  to say about this. This last Florida shooting was so obvious scam/hoax to try to take the guns out of US people that it is almost ridiculous.

Here is Laurence Moutford’s post about the situation:

DMRP:Whats that you say?

Its ridiculously obvious?

Well.. Welcome to what we’ve been trying to say for ages.

This is the tip of the iceberg guys.

To admit this was faked is to admit a conspiracy that faked it, and if thats the case? How far does this conspiracy extend? When did it start? What is it in aid of? Are the other similarly faked events? How many? Who is involved? How far are they willing to go to achieve their goals?

I’ll answer that last one. They are willing to go so far as to literally show you crisis actors being terrible and sloppy around an event meant to convince you of a certain concept. But this concept is not that school shootings happen, if That were the goal they Would and Have done it better. No. This event was meticulously planned to convince you of the exact opposite; That stuff is manipulated and faked.

And it has been for god knows how long. The reason they want to convince you that stuff is faked, is because people stuck in the upper echelons of this system DESPERATELY want out. They want out because they are afraid of the real monsters and they know that raising awareness about this is literally their only chance of escaping this ancient evil system.
But they can’t come right out and say it, they have to get us to start asking them questions en masse.

So. My advice to you all. Ask these three questions to every single high or low celebrity you can where it is public;

Do you know about REM Cloning?
Do you know about Vril and their Drones?
Do you know about Donald Marshall.

Ask those three questions in this way, all they will have to say is yes. But they will only answer yes once they know there is no other option, that it is unavoidable. That to say no would be in fact worse for them .

Really Think about it. Would anyone trying to manipulate the public allow such a sloppy and obvious attempt get so much attention? The answer is No, and the truth is we have been ruled by certain groups for a very, very long time and this world we live in now is the natural result of that system going on for centuries.

This system has existed for so long and is so evil people are desperate to escape it, even some of the people that you think are the most powerful and evil, they only act that way because they were born into that world and forced to be otherwise they’d have been killed a long time ago. There would be no way for anyone to come out and say all this is happening, they would be killed. All they can do is hint as loudly as they can that something is up..

And because people refused to notice this because the manipulation over the years worked so well..

They literally had to do something like this, just to make people see whats up.

Why do you think the world is suddenly becoming so insane with control? Its so loud and abrasive which isn’t what you do to actually enact your plan, its what you do if you want it to fail and they Do want it to fail.

I would say about 98% of people in the so called illuminati want out of it, they want actual freedom just like the rest of us. They are so scared.

See what this mass shooting shit is really about. Its not the act of an evil group trying to forward evil plans, its mostly what are ultimately insane victims desperately trying to hint to people louder and louder that something is up and you NEED to notice it or you and me and all our race and our children will be doomed.

We are so close to winning guys. We’ve always been so close to winning since 2013, this is the closest we have ever come, we just need more people and we Will get more people from events like these. The world is being woken up from its deep slumber, its our job to make sure it happens.

Be the one that tells others about Cloning, Vril and Donald.

Soon this world will seem so insane people will be far more willing to listen. And this is only being intensified.

The list of people becoming aware of this grows by the day, I watch it happen.

Don’t give up.
We Will find our future and we will make it good.
Have hope guys, please, just have hope.

Source

Here is awesome summary about this whole scam/hoax:

Wake-up, share and stay safe.

The Flat Earth Distraction

I don’t have a opinion about this myself, but here’s something to think about generally:

The Flat Earth Distraction

This post is not about whether the earth is flat, round or something else, but about the rabid dogmatism, intolerance and religiosity that has apparently taken hold with the more staunch adherents to this new perspective and to put it in a clearer context.

Flat earth or whatever theory that somehow brings unnecessary contention and division is an indicator of something we’re seeing throughout the information field, and such lower level forcing of assertions have been a source of infection in many arenas for generations – some obvious and some not so obvious, but the symptoms are the same.

Because something is perhaps true or not true does not make any of us an unquestionable source of anything. We’re here to each wake up individually, and no form of forced persuasion, threats or bludgeoning will change our minds.

That’s the beauty of the human spirit and our eternal consciousness.

How Do We Fall Into These Traps?

The following might help explain a lot of things to a lot of people. The overarching question of how segments of humanity can fall for lies and deceit of any type is an intriguing one. More importantly, how can agendas be carried out by so many lemming like sycophants of the clearly illuminist empire to the obvious degradation of humankind?

The answer may surprise you.

I’m not trying to imply this latest flat earth investigation is wrong, as it’s important information that needs processing and a wonderful world of discovery. The point is so many play into mechanisms they may not be fully aware of.

Behold the Predator – “They Gave Us Their Mind”

They, those outside our playing field, work through the mind. What we think are rational processes are not always what they seem. Minds can be tricked, and very easily, contrary to what your self-reinforcing mind might tell you. That’s why it’s important to not play in their arena; they’re smarter than us on a certain level, a level we don’t belong in and should shirk.

And it all has to do with the mind.

This quotation from Don Juan Matus alludes to this aspect of which we all should be well aware:

“We have a predator that came from the depths of the cosmos and took over the rule of our lives. Human beings are its prisoners. The predator is our lord and master.

It has rendered us docile, helpless. If we want to protest, it suppresses our protest. If we want to act independently, it demands that we don’t do so… Indeed we are held prisoner!

They took us over because we are food to them, and they squeeze us mercilessly because we are their sustenance.

Sorcerers believe the predators have given us our systems of beliefs, our ideas of good and evil: our social mores. They are the ones who set up our dreams of success or failure. They have given us covetousness, greed, and cowardice.

In order to keep us obedient and meek and weak, the predators engaged a stupendous maneuver—stupendous, of course, from the point of view of a fighting strategist; a horrendous maneuver from the point of view of those who suffer it. They gave us their mind.

The predators’ mind is baroque, contradictory, morose, filled with fear of being discovered any minute now.

Sorcerers of ancient Mexico reasoned that man must have been a complete being at one point, with stupendous insights, feats of awareness that are mythological legends nowadays. And then, everything seems to disappear, and we have now a sedated man.

What I am saying is that what we have against us is not a simple predator. It is very smart, and organized. It follows a methodical system to render us useless.

Man, the magical being that he is destined to be, is no longer magical. He’s an average piece of meat…”
–don Juan Matus in Castaneda’s “Active Side of Infinity”

How Do We Differentiate?

This is the human dilemma. We’re born into these physical body-minds with an immediate challenge. We are not greeted from the outset as being spiritual or super sentient and innately awakened beings as we should. Instead we are neglected, abandoned and ultimately abused. And so begins the treadmill of denial, fighting to gain acceptance, and a life of involuntary co-dependence and servitude.

Quite the heavy concept for most to wrap their minds around but this is our reality.

Finding out the fundamental truths that are so contrary to what we’ve been taught is a rough road. It’s never, or rarely, met by others with compassion and understanding, but rather ridicule and belittlement. Hence so many are shying away from reality.

No matter. It will meet them halfway anyway. Eventually.

Symptoms of the Archontic Mindset

Whether you subscribe to the Juan Matus or Gnostic understanding of our reality or not, the fundamental teachings remain – from the Dao Te Ching through Zen Buddhism and the like and even eclectic western philosophy as well as psychology reflect this same underlying nature of reality, that the mind is more often the tool of illusory ego fabrication and lower dimensional reinforcement of extremely hindering psychic mechanisms than a helpful friend.

The right brain, left brain picture tells the tale in another fashion.

Once aware of profound spiritual forces active in our universe with which we interact, things take on other dimensions and require deeper levels of awareness to truly get the big picture. It’s up to each of us to discover these experientially, not just intellectually, which hails to the crux of the matter we’re addressing here.

If you apply this archontic understanding to our mental nature and often untoward inclination to justify everything via non-conscious, pre-programmed reason, a lot makes sense.

Enter the Flat Earth Contra-versy – Example of a Digital Inquisition?

This has to be addressed. Not just because I have been attacked personally for not conforming to what certain individuals in this movement seem to require in order for anyone to be considered a valid source of information, but to help people understand the symptoms and origins of this type of rigid insistence that causes such uncalled for conflict and division.
Who needs a government psyop when we can individually yield to the archontic mindset? After all, who is our real enemy? Let that bake your noodle.

To attack alternative websites for not wanting to take on some belief system, real or unreal, is so counter-intuitive to the awakening process it is staggering. So many very intelligent and well “informed” people going combative for a particular mindset that seems to be a catch-all solution is actually disturbing to me. I admit, I am fascinated by the flat earth information and know we’ve been lied to on every front and love learning new information and challenging realizations.

But don’t give me ultimatums.

Aren’t I and others allowed to wonder and process? What’s with the idiotic insistence and condition setting? Who do these proponents think they are?

Do others with very strong beliefs and personally experienced based systems insist everyone get on board and publish their stuff or you’re a shill worried about your income or you can go to hell? Yes – mainstream religions working within the divide and conquer construct. Are those not “on board” with some proposed new understanding being lumped into the same false paradigm?

That’s simple evidence of what I am trying to discreetly expound on here – without ultimatums and name calling but with distinct disdain. I mean, c’mon.

You who are unwittingly pushing this warfare are your own psyop from the sounds of it.

Snap out of it. Even the logic doesn’t make sense, never mind the exclusive spirit of the overall thrust.

Fundamentalism Revives and Hardening of the Arteries

What it boils down to in my understanding is a falling for this archontic “yahwey or the highway” mentality. It divides, puts others down, creates discord, disharmony and confused aggravation.

That’s how it works.

When one researches the Flat Earth thoroughly, as I have, and imbibe the information as well as the reaction to it, one very profound realization arises.

And this could very well be the crux of our problem.

The iconic-archontic savior concept. While I do know there is a wonderful creative force we’re all part of, this so clearly plays into the mind control matrix paradigm. And this is what we need to remain aware of as well as transcend.

Flat earth fundamentalists manifest, confirm, reinforce and greatly magnify the God-Creator factor and contend that this one realization of the flat earth truth will single-handedly bring down the matrix. Interestingly enough, I’m not against the theory in it’s most esoteric form and love solutions of all sorts. Creation and our particular place in a magnificent creative universe and our wonderfully particular place makes a lot of sense in many ways.

But this can also be seen through the lens of the holographic universe understanding of our situation without all this godhead stuff that’s being implicated. There are many interpretations that shouldn’t be excluded. Point being, the easily adopted creator concept could be a set up for the unwary to be cleverly hijacked by the archontic influences of hierarchy, patriarchy and domination.

Take it for what you will, but let’s stay open and conscious here.

Warning Bells

Serious warning bells went off when I found this factor over and over from the very staunch and more belligerent proponents of this issue that are now giving this false choice, in or out type options with all the incumbent ultimatums. What gives? Is there no room for debate, time to digest and present the information for people to decide for themselves? Not a very winsome approach if you ask me.

What’s with this “weighing in” precipitation process? Where the hell does that come from?

Flat, round or pear shaped as one confused physicist said, we all exist here together with very real challenges. That the flat earth realisation will solve any and every problem is tantamount to following a religious belief for salvation, salvationism being the ultimate control tool of the archontic mindset.

If you make it a religion you’ve lost your argument, real or not real. And the attachment to it is nothing less than the archontic/illusory mind once again seeking to take control.

Separate truth from this fundamentalist thrust and you might get some traction. This confrontational tack is way wrong and contrary to any and all consciously awakened methodologies that have brought us this far.

Conclusion

Despite these unnecessary yet revealing skirmishes, the march to loving truth goes on. When forces attempt to disrupt this powerful yet somewhat sensitive process it bothers me.

Overall, I have to admit it disturbs me how people cannot grasp the importance of actively participating in the awakening, but skirmishes like this don’t help one bit.

There are so many easily available vectors to just walk into, worlds of empowering and enlightening information and encouragement. Why not let people discover naturally and synchronistically what is theirs for the taking? Haven’t we had enough stuff shoved down our throats?

Seek and Find

“You Are the Awakening”. It’s nowhere else. It’s in you, it’s in me. We cannot change the external world unless we ourselves are changed.

Let it happen. Discern the pressure lobbies, whatever truth they may bear. We’re here to freely learn.

Lose you mind. Find your heart. And don’t forget to dump the infected rubbish after gleaning the truth.

The Flat Earth Theory

The Flat Earth fad is a theory designed to distract, divide and discredit those who understand modern society has been enslaved by the Judeo Masonic (Satanic). It creates cognitive dissonance, and make us question all our assumptions, especially those which are True.

“This flat earth stuff is to mess with your mind.”

According to some, the earth is in fact a flat disc and not a globe. This meme took off after Obama equated climate change deniers to members of the “Flat Earth Society.” Within 12 months, YouTube was flooded with a mass of videos.

The assumptions of this Meme are:

1. The Earth is a Flat Disc.

2. Our globe-shaped world orbiting the sun is a myth.

3. The sun and moon are spherical, but much smaller than mainstream science states, and they rotate around a plane of the Earth, because they appear to do so.

4. Arctic Circle in the centre and Antarctica is a continent forming an ice rim of 150-foot-tall wall of ice, NASA and the military guard this wall to stop you climbing over it and falling off the end of the Earth.

5. Gravity is an illusion. When driving, it is not gravity that pins you to the road, but the rapid upward motion of a disc-shaped planet.

6. Space exploration and the moon landings are all faked.

7. The Sun is not 93 million miles away but is much smaller and only 4,000 miles above the Earth.

8. Horizon is always at eye level. (See also- Ten Absurd Claims of Flat Earth Conspiracy Theorists)

They fail to address:

1. What lies underneath the Earth and how the disc sits or what holds it up. [The earth sits on the back of giant tortoise- Makow]

2. Cannot explain orbiting satellites or GPS. They rationalize that Satellites are a hoax and GPS only exists due to a network of radio transmitters.

3. How does the Sun circle the Earth for night and day? They say the Sun travels via zero space and instantaneously appears on the other side of the disc. When facts and science contradict, they make up nonsensical explanations. First, gravity does not exist and then it does exist to bend the sun’s rays. This is when they are explaining why you can’t view the other end of the Earth. To debunk a globe model; they have yet to produce is a photo of edge of the flat earth.

Eric Dubay launched the International Flat Earth Research Society (IFERS) claiming all others were “controlled opposition”. Dubay stands out for a documentary claiming Adolf was a peaceful, honourable individual unfairly tarnished by the Zionist media.

Flat Earthism is like a new religion with its dogmas and many schisms. Three websites vying for flat earth supremacy differ from the trivial (who had the idea first) to the argumentative (Are the Jews to blame for suppressing flat-Earth truths?). Everybody is trying the define it; there is no unified theory.

Flat earther, Daniel Shenton states, “There is no unified flat Earth model but the most commonly accepted one is that it’s more or less a disc, with a ring of something to hold in the water. The height and substance of that, no one is absolutely sure, but most people think it’s mountains with snow and ice.”

PSY OP

This is a “PsyOp” which requires large funding from intelligence agencies and governments and corporations. It has become a tool of reverse psychology e.g. if you are broad minded enough to know 911 was a false flag; and now just accept Flat Earth theories. When you engage with this Psyop, a paid shill replies from their “Flat Earth Manual” like some cyborg, there is a mass of paid bloggers on CIA pay roll to push this.

(They think the earth is the center of universe.)

The meme is the ideal project for mind-control that could be devised by Tavistock institute & CIA. It is amazing how many clever, well-meaning and spiritually oriented individuals have been suckered in by this transparent pseudo-scientific sham.

The psy op is designed to create cognitive dissonance. You’ve been lied to your whole life to believe in the Globe model.

What is the underlying agenda? Lumping Christians and Truthers in a divide and rule strategy; some will fall for this trick while others won’t be easily deceived by this nonsense. This flat earth stuff is to mess with your mind.

Flat Earthers exchange one set of lies for another. My advice is to eschew cognitive dissonance and reside in truth.

About 1 year ago youtubers started getting flooded with flat earth video recommendations even though they had previously never watched a flat earth video in their life. Cass Sunstein, left, chief Obama administration propagandist describes this technique in his book “Nudge.” The technique is to target groups whose opinion they want to shape and gently nudge in the certain directions with several techniques. These include infiltrators and internet forums or comments sections of articles as well as using connections with websites such as youtube to give people recommendations based on their data to push them where they need to go.

Up until now on youtube, this has been most notably used for pushing the reptillian story as well as other bizarre new age angles to make people discredit themselves when talking about truth as well getting lost in labyrinths of insanity. It has also been used for other topics such as global warming, zionism, and alternative health (which Sunstein specifically mentions in his book). It is important that the nudging is gentle and incremental.

I have come across many people who just one year ago were speaking serious truths. Now all they want to talk about is the flat earth, something of no consequence compared to the murder of almost all of humanity.

These people have been NEUTRALIZED

Makow comment: I think they have made their point. A lot of so-called “Truthers” are mentally unstable. Pilots would have flown over the edge and under the disc long ago.

David Livingstone: “I think it’s pretty obvious what it’s designed to do: the absorb the “truth” community in complete nonsense. But such utter nonsense that it will completely discredit anyone nearly associated with it. Talk about 9/11 now, or the Illuminati, or Bilderberg and you can be denounced as a “flat earther”.

And this is a paragraph from my book Black Terror White Soldiers.

“The notion that the people of Columbus’ time believed the earth was flat was a myth invented during the 19th century by two Skull and Bones members to discredit Christianity, as part of what is known as the “Conflict Thesis”:

More anti-Christian propaganda was created in the seventeenth century when historians invented what is known as the “Flat Earth Myth,” which claimed that Medieval Christian Europe believed the earth was actually flat, a notion that was supposedly contested by Columbus. The myth was created as part of a campaign by Protestants against Catholic teaching. Historian Jeffrey Burton Russell claims “with extraordinary few exceptions no educated person in the history of Western Civilization from the third century B.C. onward believed that the earth was flat,” and he regards that the myth gained currency in the nineteenth century due to inaccurate histories such as John William Draper’s History of the Conflict Between Religion and Science (1874) and Andrew Dickson White’s History of the Warfare of Science with Theology in Christendom (1896). Dicksen was member of the notorious Skull and Bones at Yale and co-founder of Cornell University. Draper and White were the most influential exponents of the Conflict Thesis, the proposition that there is an intrinsic intellectual conflict between religion and science and that the relationship between religion and science inevitably leads to public hostility. Draper’s book received worldwide recognition and was translated into several languages, but was banned by the Catholic Church.

Video

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

The CIA’s Presidents

Some presidents backed up CIA pretty good and some of them tried to tell the Truth and got bullet to the head…

The CIA’s Presidents

Any unmasking of the shadow forces that pull the strings that often determine events requires a time frame context. Historical study can go back to antiquity for classic examples of surreptitious intrigue, but in an age of distorted and diachronic mind control, the creation of the CIA by President Truman was our modern day and literal water shed monument. Coming out of the Office of Strategic Services, the brainchild of Wild Bill Donovan developed into the playpen of Allen Dulles.

The OSS origins on their face are clandestine by nature. Spooks and spies might be a trendy name for a board game, but when the pieces on the squares are pushed in direction of liquidation and oblivion, the uninitiated are truly the uneducated, for not grasping their significance. Being one of those pieces requires the responsibility of every citizen to wake up out of their lethargy.

Research material is so extensive that penning another account on the hidden secrets behind the throne may just confuse the public even more. One needs to take off the blinders and face the consequences of the big picture. Presidents have seldom been autonomous leaders. Those who demonstrated independence, integrity and courage were either marginalized and banished from positions of influence or killed.

The CIA is not just a standalone organization. The “Agency” is more of a euphemism than a society of black bag hit squads. The underlying ethos that underpins the operations and missions of the “Intelligence Community” has a distinct purpose. Never let an administration, much less a President, gain the actual power to rule the country or the global empire.

Until people accept and admit that the “SYSTEM’ is the ultimate crime syndicate, no one can liberate their minds or their circumstances.

Few remember the black and white culture that existed in the United States forty years ago. John Chuckman writes in the Foreign Policy Journal, The CIA and America’s Presidents.

“The 1975 Church Senate Committee looking into earlier illegality came into being because a number of sources were suggesting the CIA had been engaged in assassination and other dark practices, matters which at that time quite upset the general public and some decent politicians.”

Two things are totally different all these years later. Only a grub living under a rock would be shocked by reports that the government continues a policy of “dark practices”. But they would be genuinely surprised if someone could find and prove there is a single descent politician.

Examine the record. George H. W. Bush, was a CIA director, his successor William Jefferson Clinton was a CIA asset during his years avoiding his Rhode Scholar classes, George W. Bush another Skull and Bones diabolist followed in the family’s footsteps and who could forget the current POTUS, Barack Hussein Obama II the son of a CIA recruit and a 3D printed prototype of a mystery man with a false identity. The manufactured indoctrination of these anointed commanders in chief is the true definition of “The Good Shepherd” movie account.

The Great Man theory of history has been relegated to the most efficient synthesis organization that is based upon the official version of elitism “Political Correctness”.

Presidents must surrender their contrary visions, objections and actions against the established order. However, that power embodied by the supra elites, requires a silhouette caricature of subversion as their instrument of coercion, while bearing the focal image of blame.

No balanced observance of sincere national interest would dispute that the function of gathering information and analysis of its significance is out of bounds in a civilized society. The bounds, extent and intrusive methods are fair game for debate; however, the need to know is valid.

Deciding who should have access to that information is a core concern. When Hillary Clinton is allowed to violate even the most rudimentary security practices, one has to wonder why she is so special to get away with her treason.

In the book, Compromised: Clinton, Bush and the CIA by Terry Reed, critic John Cummings looks at the definitive book on the Mena connection that bonds the Clinton’s and the Bush’s with their CIA overseers. A short video that interviews a Former C I A Agent Chip Tatum On George H W Bush Bill Clinton’s Cocaine Smuggling Connect, provides first hand testimony.

The point of going over a decades old record that was a bomb shell at the time, but never gaining the critical political mass support within the government is that nothing has really changed in all these passing years.

Looking at this experience from the vantage of a conspiracy perspective misses the very essence of how power is imposed on the planet. The question is not does the CIA control American Presidents, but the proper perspective is to embrace has the psychopathic globalist implement their sociopathic system of command and control on humanity, using organizations like the CIA to foster the sinister strategy of enslavement that every President promotes.

Taylor Caldwell’s master work in her book, Captains and the Kings, is not just the story of an American Dynasty; it is a template of the way the world actually operates.

The forbidden reality that is suppressed is that any President may order men and women to their deaths for trivial jingoistic reasons, but none of these fearless leaders can tame the hidden cabals that keep the Nefarious Warrior Organism growing and destroying humanity. The NWO is served by intelligence organizations, even when they jockey with their foreign counterparts for a perceived advantage.

The CIA conducts their cloak-and-dagger wars in plain sight. If U.S. Dollars cannot buy loyalty, a hellfire strike from a drone will kill you. Such a foreign interventionism is not a beneficial policy protecting our country.

Managing the poppy field in Afghanistan to keep the opium trade profitable is far more important to the boys from Yale, than defending our own borders from the mujahideen terrorists, who were trained and taught many tricks of the trade under the tutelage of Agency contract mercenaries.

Eating one’s own is not taboo when the political powers on high deem a sacrifice is needed. Former Director David Petraeus is no General George S. Patton, but he was thrown under the bus quicker than in a New York minute.

The irony that the former NY Senator, Hillary Clinton can get another pass to her much more grave violations of security and law, only goes to prove that being the CIA top spy does not provide enough protection, when the ‘Arkancide” mafia family is threatened.

Now you know the substantial value of all those J. Edgar Hoover secret files when it comes down to the blackmail game.

Avid history buffs always ask the question. Who are behind and actually controls the puppets that are selected to win elections? This is no connivance experiment to out the most unlikable villain that a Hollywood CIA script writer can pen. No, the film industry has always been an integral part of a dream machine to spoof the public with subtle reminders of who is really in control.

The flick, ‘Spectre’ Is The Worst 007 Movie In 30 Years, reveals an important lesson.

“Pretty much everything Spectre has to offer amounts to something that a previous Bond movie did better. And that’s the trap of doing a Bond movie in the “generational nostalgia” sandbox. You end up replaying the best parts of other films and reminding audiences that prior 007 adventures did it better. The notion of 007 doing generational nostalgia is interesting and timely, but the end result is merely an example of it rather than a dissection or deconstruction.”

The message about replaying the best parts from other operations should not go unnoticed. How else can an immortal demonic enterprise continue their dissection and deconstruction of civilization?

There is no hero coming, who will mix shaken elixirs that will stir the public to go cold turkey and jump on the wagon of political sobriety. The CIA is meant to distract the television addicts to become and remain junkies of false reality propaganda. The “so called” threats of the last sixty plus years were necessary to divert the public away from the consolidation of power under NWO governance that is totally visible for everyone to see.

Another Bay of Pigs looms. This time it will be nuclear, and there in no JFK in the oval office. Nor will it take place in Cuba. Obama awaits the development of condos on the shores of Guantanamo Bay. CIA agents reserved their slot and are on the waiting list.

The synergistic and comingling of mutual interests drives the interdependency among different factions within the family structure of government mob enterprise. Ideological deviations are mostly for populace amusement.

When the professional assassin bureau engages in plausible deniability, they are really contracting out the assignment to an expendable fall guy. Can anyone shout out Oswald?

The figure head position of the most powerful person in the free world is less mighty than the corpse of E. Howard Hunt. Those magic bullets always hit the wrong victims.

>> Video

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

The world’s real puppetmasters

It’s a monstrous agenda behind our reality, which everyone must solve out by themselves. I have been done it since 2001.

>> Video

The Illuminati are portrayed by conspiracy theorists and Christian and Muslim Fundamentalists as the puppetmasters of the world. The world’s real puppetmasters are self-evident: they are the 80 individuals who own more wealth than half the world’s population. The 80 are the Archons of free-market capitalism, and are propped up by the vast capitalist infrastructure that exists solely to serve their private, selfish interests. They are mired in privilege, cronyism and nepotism. The governments and nation states of the world are fully in their service and never under any circumstances do they take any action against them.

This is the most unequal period in human history. By next year, 1% of the world’s population will own more wealth than the other 99%. Winnie Byanyima, executive director of Oxfam International, asked, “Do we really want to live in a world where the 1% own more than the rest of us combined? The scale of global inequality is quite simply staggering and despite the issues shooting up the global agenda, the gap between the richest and the rest is widening fast.”

The wealth of the richest 80 doubled in cash terms between 2009 and 2014. Increasingly, wealth is inherited and used to finance lobbyists who are paid to further their wealthy clients’ own interests, and not those of the people … of private wealth, not the Commonwealth. All elected politicians are puppets of the Old World Order of dynastic wealth and power.

The true Bible of the Power Elite is Ayn Rand’s toxic Atlas Shrugged, her sickenening hymn to selfishness. Nearly all conspiracy theorists are fanatical Randroids, and they are absolutely right that we are their Nemesis. Our mission is to bring to a permanent end the anti-democratic and anti-meritocratic rule of the privileged, dynastic elites that run the world and create a false consciousness in the sheeple that blindly support them.

Conspiracy theories are used by the Elite to promote the agenda of unrestrained free-market capitalist globalism. Conspiracy theories are all about calling into question the inherent legitimacy of governments and nation states, so that they can be replaced by capitalist markets, wholly controlled by the rich Elite … by the 80.

The 80 are unelected and unaccountable to the people, and that’s exactly what Elitism – supported by legions of right-wing anarcho-capitalist libertarians and anti-Jacobin conspiracy theorists – is all about. The right wingers of the world are all about promoting private interest over the public interest, self-service over public service, selfishness over altruism, irrationalism over Reason, greed over need, narcissism over respect for others. Right wingers are on the psychopathic spectrum. They invariably love themselves and rail against anyone or any group that seeks to stand up to them and stop the hawk predators from feeding on the innocent, harmless doves.

“If it were necessary to give the briefest possible definition of imperialism, we should have to say that imperialism is the monopoly stage of capitalism.”
– Lenin

Capitalist Globalism – making the whole world dance to the Old World Order’s economic rule in perpetuity – is the supreme expression of imperialism. Capitalist Globalism is the One World Government that the rich Elite are implementing to ensure that they rule every corner of the globe.

“Capitalism is the astounding belief that the most wickedest of men will do the most wickedest of things for the greatest good of everyone.”
– John Maynard Keynes

“Under capitalism, man exploits man. Under communism, it’s just the opposite.”
– John Kenneth Galbraith

“Capitalism is an organized system to guarantee that greed becomes the primary force of our economic system and allows the few at the top to get very wealthy and has the rest of us riding around thinking we can be that way, too – if we just work hard enough, sell enough Tupperware and Amway products, we can get a pink Cadillac.”
– Michael Moore

“Capitalism is against the things that we say we believe in – democracy, freedom of choice, fairness. It’s not about any of those things now. It’s about protecting the wealthy and legalizing greed.”
– Michael Moore

“The decadent international but individualistic capitalism in the hands of which we found ourselves after the war is not a success. It is not intelligent. It is not beautiful. It is not just. It is not virtuous. And it doesn’t deliver the goods.”
– John Maynard Keynes

“The great nations have always acted like gangsters, and the small nations like prostitutes.”
– Stanley Kubrick

The biggest “nation” of all … the One World system of Global Capitalism, which rules everything … is the ultimate gangster, and all the rest of us are the prostitutes, begging for money from the Elite while they fuck us up the ass.

Just as Judaism, Christianity and Islam have always been terrorist religions – terrorising people with the threat of the wrath of “God” and eternal pain and suffering in hell – so free-market capitalism has never been anything other than gangsterism, where those with capital point a gun at the head of those without. It’s time to stop being the slaves of the Elite. It’s time for the people to rule.

“For all men being originally equal, no one by birth could have a right to set up his own family in perpetual preference to all others for ever, and though himself might deserve some decent degree of honour of his contemporaries, yet his descendants might be far too unworthy to inherit them. One of the strongest natural proofs of the folly of the hereditary right in kings, is, that nature disapproves it, otherwise she would not so frequently turn it into ridicule by giving mankind an ass for a lion.”
– Thomas Paine

“The aristocracy are not the farmers who work the land, and raise the produce, but are the mere consumers of the rent; and when compared with the active world are the drones, a seraglio of males, who neither collect the honey nor form the hive, but exist only for lazy enjoyment.”
– Thomas Paine

“Every age and generation must be as free to act for itself, in all cases, as the ages and generation which preceded it. The vanity and presumptions of governing beyond the grave is the most ridiculous and insolent of all tyrannies.”
– Thomas Paine

Inheritance is the precise mechanism by which the dead tyrannically rule over the living. When you’re dead, you’re dead. Your wealth does not live on to be inherited by nepotistic scroungers who did nothing to earn it. Inheritance is welfare for rich folk, and no decent person would ever accept it. Inheritance is how the rich control the poor and keep them in their “place”. It’s how the dead rule from beyond the grave. The dead have no legal rights and no stake in the world of the living. Post mortem transfers of wealth, power and influence must be made illegal via Pro Life legislation, i.e. legislation designed to ensure that corpses cannot dictate the future of the human race via selectively handing on decisive financial advantage to the chosen few (the “Chosen People”).

The mission of the rich elites is to set up their families to rule over the rest of us in perpetuity. They call for zero percent inheritance tax, and inheritance is of course the means by which they transmit overwhelming advantage across the generations, how they rig the system, and how they establish the all-powerful cartel from which all the rest of us are excluded if we are fools and cowards enough to go along with it. What is the antidote to dynastic rule, and what is it that the rich elites hate and fear more than anything else? … it’s one hundred percent inheritance tax. Anyone who opposes this tax – the tax that ensures that no dynasty can rule the world via inherited wealth (parasitical wealth, unearned by the deadbeats and dead heads who pathetically grab it because they are incapable of standing on their own two feet and earning their own money by their own sweat and effort) – opposes human progress and freedom. Anyone who resists total inheritance tax supports anti-meritocracy and the dynastic rule of rich elites. We note that all the cretinous conspiracy theorists rage against inheritance tax, and call it “communism” – exactly as required by their rich puppetmasters. Here’s the simple truth of the world:

1) Thesis: Free-market Capitalism … unequal opportunities and unequal outcomes.

2) Antithesis: Communism … equal opportunities and equal outcomes.

3) Synthesis: Meritocracy … equal opportunities and unequal outcomes.

Meritocracy is about the smartest, most talented people … from any background, no matter how humble or disadvantaged … getting to the top so that the rest of us can benefit from their expertise, intelligence and merit. It’s not a question of a rising tide of money raising all boats, but of a rising tide of intelligence and talent.

The proper function of the State is to optimise itself through optimising each and every one of its citizens. It has to maximise the potential of everyone, from any background. The optimal State is the one governed by its smartest and most meritorious citizens – Plato’s Philosopher Kings, who are not allowed to accumulate any private wealth and must be devoted entirely to the public good, the opposite of today’s rulers of the world.

Every person must be allowed to go as far as their talents take them, and that means they must not be up against a rigged system of privilege, cronyism and nepotism, designed to favour the children of the Elite and to obstruct the progress of everyone else.

Free-market capitalism exists to free the capitalists and enslave everyone else. Aren’t you sick of being a slave? Then do something about it. Get off your fucking ass.

No Taxation Without Representation

The American rebels against British imperial tyranny rightly demanded representation in Parliament. Nowadays, you routinely find American “patriots” demanding the end of government, and its replacement by the market. So, here’s a question for all the “patriots” … given that the markets are run by and for global banks, global corporations, and the global super rich, in what way are the markets accountable to the people? Can we vote the “market” or its controllers out of office? Can we fire any of the big market makers and players? Are we represented on the boards of any of the big market makers and players? Do the ordinary people have any say at all over the market? And, if they don’t, isn’t that tyranny? The market is tyranny without a face, or the face of the rich carefully hidden behind a faceless abstraction so that we can’t see the tyrant stamping on our face

The Divine Conspiracy

What is the Armageddon Conspiracy? It’s the Plot to Kill “God” … the Abrahamic Torture God, the Abrahamic Terrorist God … The Devil God who orders fathers to murder their own children as a test of slavish, blind obedience.

Illuminati Coded Fiction

“The Armageddon Conspiracy” by Mike Hockney – the ancient Solomonic plot to kill the Abrahamic God, brought into the twenty-first century.

“The Millionaires’ Death Club” by Mike Hockney – no one is safe from the world’s smartest, most glamorous, most stylish elite who will go to any lengths, even murder, to have their “fun”.

“Prohibition A” by Mike Hockney – Dante’s nine circles of hell are transported to Manhattan for the ultimate game of life and death.

“The Last Bling King” by Mike Hockney – the plot of the elite to own the whole world in perpetuity, and the ingenious counterplot to overthrow them.

You are the change in the world. If you don’t change, the world won’t change.

It’s time to undergo your appointed metamorphosis … from grub to hero, from worm to God.
Change is the basis of everything, and the thing most in need of change isn’t the world but always yourself. When you change, you will see the world with brand new eyes, you will see that all things are possible, and you will see a thousand new beginnings.
Step up your game, motherfuckers. Bring your “A” game or don’t bother showing up. Who wants the second best, the second rate, the half-hearted, the mediocre?
The Movement wants only the achievers, the talented, those who can make things happen rather than just talking about it or moaning about it.

The Most Forsaken Place in the Universe

In Dante’s vision of hell, a vestibule stands between the gates of hell and the river Acheron (the river of woe) where Charon the Boatman ferries the damned across the fast-moving river of pitch-black water to the First Circle of Hell, Hell proper.

As they pass through the vestibule, the souls of the damned encounter a strange sight – the Lost Souls. While the damned don’t linger in the vestibule for long – they’re just passing through – the group of Lost Souls is trapped there … forever! These are the souls rejected by both heaven and hell. Heaven shut its gates to them, and hell doesn’t want them, so they have nowhere to go. They have no home. They are lost in No Man’s Land.

What did they do to suffer this fate? These were the souls that refused to support one side or the other in life – they were the neutrals, the uncommitted, those who lived for themselves, those who joined no cause except their own. They did not choose either good or evil but lived their lives without making any conscious moral choices whatsoever. They were cynical and skeptical, always calculating their personal advantage.

In Christian mythology, when Lucifer’s angels rebelled against God, and Michael the Archangel led the loyal angels against them, many angels remained neutral, standing on the sidelines, waiting to see who would win. When God cast down the rebel angels into hell, he made sure he cast down these neutrals too, but they were no more wanted by Satan than by God, so they remained permanently on the near side of hell’s river, banned from ever crossing, and equally banned from ever leaving.

Such is the destiny of those who refuse to choose a cause, who refuse to commit, refuse to follow a banner. They are called the Ignavi, and they are the most pathetic and ignoble of all creatures. They are the Last Men, the opposite of the Supermen. They are the feeble, laughable creatures that remain when heaven and hell have received all of the souls they are willing to take.

The Ignavi are the selfish, the self-obsessed, always looking for their own benefit, and never willing to choose a side, never willing to fight, to risk themselves, to make any sacrifices. Their calculation is always the same: let others fight it out and then see how the land lies at the end when the smoke clears. See what opportunities there are to gain profit for themselves … you know, like free-market capitalists. They are the cowardly “neutrals” who refuse to side with any cause until it’s obvious who’s winning (i.e. they have no ideological commitment and would support whoever won, thus maximizing their self-interest). Most of humanity belong to the Ignavi, not to the Damned or the Saved. Neither God nor the Devil has anything but contempt for them.

The fate of the Ignavi is a terrible one. They are condemned to run naked forever behind a blank banner (the flag of all those with no cause except themselves), fluttering one way and then another (i.e. never settling into a definite position reflecting a definite cause), and which they can never catch (just as they could never catch a cause in life).

As they chase the flag, they are ceaselessly stung by hornets and wasps. With each sting, blood and putrid matter leak from them, feeding the writhing mass of worms and maggots that they are forced to run across. In life, they refused to be stung by any cause, and now they are stung without end. The worms write bloody, insulting messages in the soil in an unknown script.

The Ignavi’s cries of woe are unremitting. The air is continually rent with their shrieks, shouts, screams, and lamentations. Their torment has no end.

“This miserable state [Dante is informed by his guide Virgil] is endured by the dreary souls of those who lived without blame and without praise. They are mixed with the cowardly choir of angels who were not rebellious, nor were loyal to God, but were for themselves. Heaven drove them forth to keep its splendour from being sullied; and the depths of hell receives them not, for the wicked would thus have some glory over them…The world allows no report of them to exist. Mercy and justice disdain them. Do not speak of them, but look and pass on.”

“I looked and saw a whirling banner that went by so quickly that it seemed it would never pause; and behind it came so long a train of people that I should never have believed death had undone so many … These wretches, who were never truly alive, were naked and viciously stung by wasps and hornets that made their faces stream with blood, which, mixed with their tears, dripped to their feet, and disgusting maggots collected in the pus.” – Dante

Well, will Heaven and Hell alike deny you entry? What is your sacred cause? What moral decisions have you taken? How have you ever served anyone or anything other than yourself? Are you fated to reside in the Ante-Inferno for all time? This barren, hopeless place is within the perimeter of hell, yet not truly part of it. It’s Neverland.

Being pious, Dante tells us, is more than a matter of simply not sinning. Unlike the non-committal souls, you must actively practise virtue and side with the righteous. You have to be on the right side, not the wrong one, and not in the neutral, agnostic middle. You must make a leap. You must choose and commit.

The Great Refusal

“I hate journalists. There is nothing in them but tittering jeering emptiness. They have all made what Dante calls the Great Refusal. The shallowest people on the ridge of the earth.” – W.B. Yeats

Are you one of the great refusers, one of the cynical, sneering trolls – the utterly empty, blank, pointless people who have nothing constructive to offer the world?

The Falsehood

“That which has always been accepted by everyone, everywhere, is almost certain to be false.” – Paul Valery

The Blank Banner

Are you a follower of the blank banner of the Ignavi, the most pathetic flag there can possibly be? The blank banner is for all empty, non-committal souls. It’s for those who backed no clear side, supported no clear leader, and simply ran back and forth with no direction, other than their own comfort and advantage. There is nothing worse and more dismal than to be a follower of this banner.
If you have chosen no sacred cause in life, if you haven’t chosen sides, the blank banner is YOUR banner.

Since they were neither good nor evil, the Ignavi have no place in the afterlife. They might as well never have existed. They were pointless people who made no impression. Is that you too?

Ante-hell, the vestibule of hell, is also called “Nowhere”. It’s the eternal home of the Ignavi, the most pathetic souls of all, the souls that ought never to have existed, those that made no choices in life, “who lived a life but lived it with no blame and no praise”. It includes those agnostics too self-absorbed to make choices, those who were neither hot nor cold on important matters. They neither believed nor disbelieved, neither knew nor didn’t know, neither blasphemed nor opposed the blasphemers, neither stood for free speech nor against it.

Now, they run about the hills of Ante-Hell forever, having no hope of dying to end their misery, doing nothing but chasing banners (causes) they will never catch.

You are not saved because you have done nothing wrong. You must do something right. You must choose. You must leap one way or another. You must commit.

The worst places in hell are reserved for those who, in times of great moral crisis, maintained their neutrality, who sat on the face and refused to take part. Are you one of those who will dwell permanently on the edge of hell?

Life isn’t a spectator sport. You must be involved.

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

Cell Phone Stingrays

Have you ever heard of these jamming and spying devices? It’s time to wake-up to cell phone conspiracy:

>> Video

Cell Phone Stingrays

The release of a secret U.S. government catalog of cell phone surveillance devices has revealed the names and abilities of dozens of surveillance tools previously unknown to the public. The catalog shines a light on well-known devices like the Stingray and DRT box, as well as new names like Cellbrite, Yellowstone, Blackfin, Maximus, Stargrazer, and Cyberhawk.

The Intercept reports:

“Within the catalogue, the NSA is listed as the vendor of one device, while another was developed for use by the CIA, and another was developed for a special forces requirement. Nearly a third of the entries focus on equipment that seems to have never been described in public before.”

Anti Media has reported extensively on the Stingray, the brand name of a popular cell-site simulator manufactured by the Harris Corporation. The Electronic Frontier Foundation describes Stingrays as “a brand name of an IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) Catcher targeted and sold to law enforcement. A Stingray works by masquerading as a cell phone tower – to which your mobile phone sends signals to every 7 to 15 seconds whether you are on a call or not – and tricks your phone into connecting to it.”

As a result, whoever is in possession of the Stingray can figure out who, when, and to where you are calling, the precise location of every device within the range, and with some devices, even capture the content of your conversations.

Both the Harris Corp. and the Federal Bureau of Investigations (FBI) require police to sign non-disclosure agreements (NDA) related to the use of the devices. Through these NDAs local police departments have become subordinate to Harris, and even in court cases in front of a judge, are not allowed to speak on the details of their arrangements. Due to this secrecy, very little has been known about how exactly the Stingrays work.

The bit of publicly available information was disclosed through open records requests and lawsuits filed by journalists and researchers. This new catalog provides even more detail about how the devices operate.

We already knew that Stingrays drain the battery of a targeted device, as well as raise signal strength. We also knew that as long as your phone is on, it could be targeted. Some newer details include the fact that the Stingray I and II will not work if the user is “engaged in a call.” Also, the device can gather data from phones within a 200 meter radius. And the next generation Hailstorm device is even capable of cracking encryption on the newer 4G LTE networks.

A number of the devices in the catalog are Digital Receiver Technology (DRT) boxes, also known as dirt boxes, which can be installed in planes for aerial surveillance. DRT was recently purchased by Boeing. We first learned of dirt boxes in late 2014, when the Wall Street Journal revealed a cell phone monitoring program operated by the U.S. Marshals Service, using Cessna planes mounted with Stingrays. AntiMedia has also reported on surveillance planes equipped with thermal imaging technology.

Other devices include:

Cellbrite: “a portable, handheld, field proven forensic system for the quick extraction and analysis of 95% cell phones, smart phones and PDA devices,”capable of extracting “information such as phone book, pictures, video, text messages, and call logs.”

Kingfish: a Stingray-like device that is “portable enough to be carried around in a backpack.”

Stargrazer: “an Army system developed to deny, degrade and/or disrupt a targeted adversary’s command and control (C2) system,” which “can jam a handset and capture its metadata at the same time it pinpoints your target’s location. But watch out — the Stargazer may jam all the other phones in the area too — including your own.”

Cyberhawk: which is capable of gathering “phonebook, names, SMS, media files, text, deleted SMS, calendar items and notes” from 79 cell phones.

Jennifer Lynch, a senior staff attorney at the Electronic Frontier Foundation, told the Intercept that the use of these tools is part of the militarization of the police in the U.S.: “We’ve seen a trend in the years since 9/11 to bring sophisticated surveillance technologies that were originally designed for military use — like Stingrays or drones or biometrics — back home to the United States.”

The Office of the Director of National Intelligence, the FBI, NSA, and U.S. military declined to leave a comment with the Intercept regarding the catalog. Marc Raimondi, a Justice Department spokesperson, told theIntercept that the Department “uses technology in a manner that is consistent with the requirements and protections of the Constitution, including the Fourth Amendment, and applicable statutory authorities.”

The Intercept notes that Raimondi worked for Harris Corp. for six years prior to working for the DOJ.

Secrecy surrounding the use of these devices has been a contentious topic of debate for several years. Truth In Media recently reported that four members of the House Oversight Committee sent letters to 24 federal agencies including the Department of State and the Securities and Exchange Commission, demanding answers regarding policies for using the controversial surveillance technology.

House Oversight Committee Chairman Jason Chaf­fetz, ranking member Elijah Cummings, and Reps. Will Hurd (R-Texas) and Robin Kelly (D-Ill.), as members of the committee’s IT subcommittee, issued requests for information related to the potential use of stingrays.

Chaf­fetz also recently introduced the Stingray Privacy Act, which would expand newly established warrant requirements for the Department of Justice and Department of Homeland Security to all federal, state, and local agencies that use the cell-site simulators.

In September, the DHS joined the DOJ by announcing warrant requirements for the use of Stingray equipment, but those rule changes have come under fire for possible loopholes which may allow the continued use of surveillance equipment without a warrant.

“Because cell-site simulators can collect so much information from innocent people, a simple warrant for their use is not enough,” Jennifer Lynch told theIntercept. “Police officers should be required to limit their use of the device to a short and defined period of time. Officers also need to be clear in the probable cause affidavit supporting the warrant about the device’s capabilities.”

At this point, it’s painfully obvious that America is the home of the Police-Surveillance State. Awakened hearts and minds everywhere should continue to educate themselves and their communities about the dangers of these tools. We should also support initiatives to create technology that can defend against the prying eyes and ears of Big Brother. Privacy is a dying notion in a nation of fools determined to be safe rather than liberated.

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

Operation Mockingbird

So much of our news are just fabricated lies…

>> Video

Operation Mockingbird

The CIA currently maintains a network of several hundred foreign individuals around the world who provide intelligence for the CIA and at times attempt to influence opinion through the use of covert propaganda. These individuals provide the CIA with direct access to a large number of newspapers and periodicals, scores of press services and news agencies, radio and television stations, commercial book publishers, and other foreign media outlets.

Senator Frank Church argued that misinforming the world cost American taxpayers an estimated $265 million a year.

In 1948, Frank Wisner was appointed director of the Office of Special Projects (OSP). Soon afterwards OSP was renamed the Office of Policy Coordination (OPC). This became the espionage and counter-intelligence branch of the Central Intelligence Agency. Wisner was told to create an organization that concentrated on “propaganda, economic warfare; preventive direct action, including sabotage, anti-sabotage, demolition and evacuation measures; subversion against hostile states, including assistance to underground resistance groups, and support of indigenous anti-Communist elements in threatened countries of the free world.”

Later that year Wisner established Mockingbird, a program to influence the domestic and foreign media. Wisner recruited Philip Graham from The Washington Post to run the project within the industry. According to Deborah Davis in Katharine the Great; “By the early 1950s, Wisner ‘owned’ respected members of The New York Times, Newsweek, CBS and other communications vehicles.”

In 1951, Allen W. Dulles persuaded Cord Meyer to join the CIA. However, there is evidence that he was recruited several years earlier and had been spying on the liberal organizations he had been a member of in the later 1940s. According to Deborah Davis, Meyer became Mockingbird’s “principal operative.”

In 1977, Rolling Stone alleged that one of the most important journalists under the control of Operation Mockingbird was Joseph Alsop, whose articles appeared in over 300 different newspapers. Other journalists alleged by Rolling Stone Magazine to have been willing to promote the views of the CIA included Stewart Alsop (New York Herald Tribune), Ben Bradlee (Newsweek), James Reston (New York Times), Charles Douglas Jackson (Time Magazine), Walter Pincus (Washington Post), William C. Baggs (The Miami News), Herb Gold (The Miami News) and Charles Bartlett (Chattanooga Times). According to Nina Burleigh (A Very Private Woman), these journalists sometimes wrote articles that were commissioned by Frank Wisner. The CIA also provided them with classified information to help them with their work.

After 1953, the network was overseen by Allen W. Dulles, director of the Central Intelligence Agency. By this time Operation Mockingbird had a major influence over 25 newspapers and wire agencies. These organizations were run by people with well-known right-wing views such as William Paley (CBS), Henry Luce (Time and Life Magazine), Arthur Hays Sulzberger (New York Times), Alfred Friendly (managing editor of the Washington Post), Jerry O’Leary (Washington Star), Hal Hendrix (Miami News), Barry Bingham, Sr., (Louisville Courier-Journal), James Copley (Copley News Services) and Joseph Harrison (Christian Science Monitor).

The Office of Policy Coordination (OPC) was funded by siphoning of funds intended for the Marshall Plan. Some of this money was used to bribe journalists and publishers. Frank Wisner was constantly looking for ways to help convince the public of the dangers of communism. In 1954, Wisner arranged for the funding of the Hollywood production of Animal Farm, the animated allegory based on the book written by George Orwell.

According to Alex Constantine (Mockingbird: The Subversion Of The Free Press By The CIA), in the 1950s, “some 3,000 salaried and contract CIA employees were eventually engaged in propaganda efforts”. Wisner was also able to restrict newspapers from reporting about certain events.

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

Denver International Airport

Most gruesome airport in the World. Full of UN, NWO and Illuminati symbols…

>> Video

Denver International Airport


In 1995, the Denver International Airport opened its doors to the public. What the public saw in this enormous compound was breathtaking, confusing, and… weird.

Before I explore some of the Denver oddities, let me take a look at how the airport came to be, for the very construction of the building is shrouded in as much mystery as the end result.

Normally, when a project of this magnitude is undertaken, one contractor will oversee the construction from beginning to end. This is to ensure a continuity of the original vision, as well as eliminating needless argument over the way a work site is handled. A series of sub-contractors will be hired to carry out the plans set forth by the main overseer.

In the case of the Denver International Airport (DIA), a far more unorthodox approach was used. All of the work was done by sub contractors, who were hired to do a small, isolated task, and then they were let go at its completion. Indeed, these construction workers were dismissed from the premises the MOMENT they were done with their work. This was done in an effort to secure the fact that no single company or person ever saw the complete vision of what the DIA was to become.

At one point during the construction, five large structures were completed, and then determined to have been incorrectly positioned. Rather than demolishing them and starting over, or adjusting the structures, they were buried, and the construction was started anew on top of the old structures.

The end result was a massive compound, that when looked upon from an aerial view, sits precisely in the shape of a swastika. The aesthetic oddness does not end there.

Outside the Airport stands a 32 ft tall statue of a rearing blue Mustang. This horse has alternately been referred to as “Bluecifer,” “Satan’s Steed” and “Blue Devil Horse.” So striking and disturbing is this statue, that it has prompted petitions and organizations to sprout up, demanding its removal. The sculptor of the piece was an artist named Luis Jiménez. Strangely, he was killed while building the statue, when it fell on top of him, severing an artery. His sons completed the project.

Those who study the Conspiratorial aspects of our Government, have noted that the Mustang bears a striking resemblance to a horse associated with The Montauk Project Mysterious Murals and Monuments at the Denver Airport, a secret government program linked to mind control and other fantastic claims. The Montauk Project is connected with the Philadelphia Experiment, a case of time bending disaster carried out by the U.S. Military. Both the Montauk Project and the Philadelphia Experiment will be explored in further detail in upcoming
posts.

Within the great hall of the DIA is a capstone commemorating the construction and completion of the project. In the center of the stone is the Masonic symbol of a compass, along with a dedication by the “New World Airport Commission”. Several groups have investigated this organization, and found that it is unique to the DIA. No other airport has been connected with such a group. Of course, this has raised the blood pressure of more than a few theorists, who see the connection to the phrase “New World Order”. And of course, the rest of the building does nothing to lessen those worries.

There are mysterious writings on the floor throughout the DIA. One phrase carved into the floor is “DZIT DIT GAII”. This is Navajo for “The Mountain that is White”. There are several other areas on the floor that simply say “Mt. Blanca”. What could this be referencing? Well, one theory is that if the Masons were in charge of the planning of this building (which they clearly were involved given the inscription and symbol on the capstone), then it could be referring to Mt Blanc or White Mountain in France, which is where the Knights Templar signed their charter. Freemasons trace their lineage back to the Knights Templar, so the connection seems to fit. At Mt. Blanc, one Templar wrote, “They gathered to form a New Order”. Interesting?

Also inside the great hall are a couple of Gargoyles, whose presence in an Airport, or inside any building that isn’t a church or temple, is quite odd. Gargoyles that are not designed to divert water runoff, (their original purpose) are actually called chimeras, or grotesques. They are said to ward off evil spirits. From the looks of these two, it appears that their purpose is to ward off the evil spirits of lost luggage.

The most intriguing and arguably the most disturbing aspect of the Denver International Airport are its murals. These bizarre paintings seem relatively bright and cheerful at first glance, but upon closer inspection, are quite odd.

One of the murals is called “Children of the World Dream of Peace”. Oh, isn’t that nice? Well, it would be, if it weren’t for the fact that the mural depicts genocide, famine, military oppression, and death. Hovering over the “children of the world” is a grotesque alien-like, Nazi-esque, gas mask wearing uniformed figure, who is in the act of spearing the Dove of Peace with a giant sword. He is surrounded by women holding dead babies. There are dead children lying in coffins, and kids with swords wrapped in their nation’s flags. The mural is covered with images of war and death.

Another mural features children surrounding what appears to be a “new messiah”, offering it plants with some sort of magical or mystical quality. The whole thing strikes meas weird and morbid.

In fairness, I will include here that the artist of these murals, Leo Tanguma, says that the murals are about environmentalism and preservation of Earth. He says that as a Christian, he sees the murals as his sermons.

“The first part of the environmental mural is about the ways that humans destroy nature and themselves through destruction and genocide. The second part is about humanity coming together to rehabilitate nature and revive their own compassion.” Tanguma is quoted as saying.

With that said, the murals and the giant blue horse are not the only items of intrigue. There are many reported anomalies about the DIA. One is the frequent occurrence of cracked windshields of planes. Some have speculated that this is due to an abnormally high or low frequency pulse that is being emanated by the airport. According to Compilots.com, there were 13 windshields that cracked in February of 2007. The official reason is supposedly high winds, although there is no explanation as to why high winds have never caused such a series of cracks at other airports. It is still considered a mystery. In December of 2008, a plane with a mysterious crack in its fuselage actually burst into flame on the runway, injuring several passengers.

Also, there is the matter of the property surrounding the DIA. After the completion of the airport, the property on its outskirts suddenly became “hot property”, and was bought up by a who’s who of the wealthy and important. The Queen of England is reported to have purchased some property near by. Why? Well, this leads to the final theory that we will explore.

DIA Underground Tunnel1 Mysterious Murals and Monuments at the Denver AirportSome say, that there is an underground base beneath the DIA. Phil Schneider, a government whistle-blower, claimed that in the last year of DIA construction, a vast eight level deep underground base was constructed below the compound. He also said that there is an unusually high electro-magnetic frequency emanating from below the DIA. What does this have to do with the Queen of England?

Well, some speculate that the area below the airport is intended to be an enormous bunker, designed to shield the elite from some sort of an impending catastrophe. And “ark”, if you will. Then there are those who say it is a military base, where Top Secret experiments are being carried out, right under the noses of travelers.

Whether or not there is something sinister afoot at the Denver International Airport, there is no doubt that it is a bizarre and somewhat frightening place. Visitors of the airport often complain of feeling uneasy and distressed when inside the walls of this building, which one would think is the exact opposite reaction the builders would want for an airport.

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

Pearl Harbor The False Flag Attack

It was only done so, that US could attend to WW2…

>> Video

Pearl Harbor The False Flag Attack


On October 7, 1940, exactly fourteen months before the infamous attack on Pearl Harbor on December 7, 1941, Lieutenant Commander Arthur H. McCollum penned a memorandum, recommending that the United States government provoke the Japanese into attacking America, and thus, allowing America to enter WWII with the American people fully behind the decision. The memorandum is called theMcCollum memo, and there is little mention of it in history textbooks.

Over the years there were rumors that “FDR allowed the Pearl Harbor attack to happen” but these were cast aside as crackpot conspiracy theories, backed by zero evidence. But such dismissals didn’t work when Robert Stinnett published his book“Day Of Deceit: The Truth About FDR and Pearl Harbor”in 1999.Stinnett, a decorated WWII veteran and author, requested files about the attack, and the events preceding it, through the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). He discovered that FDR not only knew about the attack in advance, but that his administration did everything it could to cause a Japanese attack on America. One of the most important pieces of information that Stinnett came across was the McCollum memo, which outlined eight points that the FDR administration could do to instigate a dramatic response by the Japanese without the Congress, or the American people getting too suspicious, like cutting off economic ties with Japan, refusing it oil, establishing relations with Japan’s main enemy, China, and other provocations. Stinnett’s book is centered on the new historical evidence that he gathered, which is rigorously documented.

He gave an interview to Douglas Cirignano in 2002 about how he came to his conclusion that the FDR administration pushed America into a war that the majority of the American people were dead set against prior to the attack on December 7. The interview is archived at the Independent Institute, and it is called“Do Freedom of Information Act Files Prove FDR Had Foreknowledge of Pearl Harbor?”An excerpt:
Another claim at the heart of the Pearl Harbor surprise-attack lore is that Japan’s ships kept radio silence as they approached Hawaii. That’s absolutely untrue, also?

Stinnett:That is correct. And this was all withheld from Congress, so nobody knew about all this.
Until the Freedom of Information Act.

Stinnett:Yes.
Is this statement true?—If America was intercepting and decoding Japan’s military messages then Washington and FDR knew that Japan was going to attack Pearl Harbor.

Stinnett:Oh, absolutely.
You feel it’s as simple as that?

Stinnett:That is right. And that was their plan. It was their “overt act of war” plan that I talk about in my book that President Roosevelt adopted on October 7, 1940.
You write that in late November 1941 an order was sent out to all US military commanders that stated: “The United States desires that Japan commit the first overt act.” According to Secretary of War Stimson, the order came directly from President Roosevelt. Was FDR’s cabinet on record for supporting this policy of provoking Japan to commit the first overt act of war?

Stinnett:I don’t know that he revealed it to the cabinet. He may have revealed it to Harry Hopkins, his close confidant, but there’s no evidence that anybody in the cabinet knew about this.
I thought you wrote in your book that they did…That some of them were on record for…

Stinnett:Well, some did. Secretary of War Stimson knew, based on his diary, and also probably Frank Knox, the Secretary of Navy knew. But Frank Knox died before the investigation started. So all we have really is Stimson, his diary. And he reveals a lot in there, and I do cite it in my book…You must mean his war cabinet. Yes. Stimson’s diary reveals that nine people in the war cabinet—the military people—knew about the provocation policy.
Even though Roosevelt made contrary statements to the public, didn’t he and his advisors feel that America was eventually going to have to get into the war?

Stinnett:That is right. Well, his statement was, “I won’t send your boys to war unless we are attacked.” So then he engineered this attack—to get us into war really against Germany. But I think that was his only option. I express that in the book.
Who was Lieutenant Commander Arthur McCollum and what was his connection to the Pearl Harbor attack?

Stinnett:He worked for Naval intelligence in Washington. He also was the communications routing officer for President Roosevelt. So all these intercepts would go to Commander McCollum and then he would route them to the President. There’s no question about that. He also was the author of this plan to provoke Japan into attacking us at Pearl Harbor. And he was born and raised in Japan.

McCollum wrote this plan, this memorandum, in October 1940. It was addressed to two of Roosevelt’s closest advisors. In the memo McCollum is expressing that it’s inevitable that Japan and America are going to go to war, and that Nazi Germany’s going to become a threat to America’s security. McCollum is saying that America’s going to have to get into the war. But he also says that public opinion is against that. So, McCollum then suggests eight specific things that America should do to provoke Japan to become more hostile, to attack us, so that the public would be behind a war effort. And because he was born and raised in Japan, he understood the Japanese mentality and how the Japanese would react.

Stinnett:Yes. Exactly.
Has the existence of this memo from Commander McCollum ever been revealed to the public before your book came out?

Stinnett:No, no. I received that as pursuant to my FOIA request on January 1995 from the National Archives. I had no idea it existed.
FDR and his military advisors knew that if McCollum’s eight actions were implemented—things like keeping the Pacific fleet in Pearl Harbor, and crippling Japan’s economy with an embargo—there was no question in their minds that this would cause Japan—whose government was very militant—to attack the United States. Correct?

Stinnett:That is correct, and that is what Commander McCollum said. He said, “If you adopt these policies then Japan will commit an overt act of war.”
Is there any proof that FDR saw McCollum’s memorandum?

Stinnett:There’s no proof that he actually saw the memorandum, but he adopted all eight of the provocations—including where he signed executive orders…And other information in Navy files offers conclusive evidence that he did see it.
The memo is addressed to two of Roosevelt’s top advisors, and you include the document where one of them is agreeing with McCollum’s suggested course of action.

Stinnett:Yes, Dudley Knox, who was his very close associate.
The “splendid arrangement” was a phrase that FDR’s military leaders used to describe America’s situation in the Pacific. Can you explain what the “splendid arrangement” was?

Stinnett:The “splendid arrangement” was the system of twenty-two monitoring stations in the Pacific that were operated by the United States, Britain, and the Dutch. These extended along the west coast of the United States, up to Alaska, then down to Southeast Asia, and into the Central Pacific.
These radio monitoring stations allowed us to intercept and read all of Japan’s messages, right?

Stinnett:Absolutely. We had Japan wired for sound.
You claim that the “splendid arrangement” was so adept that ever since the 1920’s Washington always knew what Japan’s government was doing. So to assert that we didn’t know the Japanese were going to bomb Pearl Harbor would be illogical?

Stinnett:That is correct.

Why was Stinnett able to come up with an accurate and complete picture about the infamous Pearl Harbor attack when all others failed, particularly Congress?Historian H. Arthur Scott Trask explains the reasons in his review of the book called “The Conspiracies of Empire.”:
“How did Stinnett manage to uncover the truth when congressional investigations (in both 1945-1946 and 1995) failed to do so? The answer lies in Stinnett’s intelligence, integrity, and unflagging research effort (lasting 17 years), qualities that we know from experience are all too lacking in congressional investigations. But it also lies in a crucial Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) request filed by the author in 1983. In that year, Stinnett learned of the existence of the Pacific War communications intelligence files of the United States Navy (a top secret file containing over one million documents relating to U.S. communication intelligence before and during the war). The author’s request was at first denied, but in 1994 the navy decided to declassify the records, or at least most of them. As the Stinnett soon discovered, key intercepts and documents were kept back, some were missing from the records, and other documents had been altered to conceal vital information. However, enough information was released, perhaps inadvertently, to enable Stinnett to piece together the truth.”

Nobody in the mainstream media has interviewed Stinnett since the book’s publication. In the interview with Cirignano, Stinnett said that besides a few favorable reviews by the New York Times, The Wall Street Journal, and other newspapers, the media has been silent. The truth about the real origins of America’s entry into WWII is effectively censored, as is the truth about 9/11. “Neither ABC, CBS, NBC, CNN, or Fox News have carried a word,” Stinnett says.
What is the lesson that we can derive from the U.S. government’s duplicity in the Pearl Harbor attack? Do we excuse FDR because Hitler died, the Nazis were crushed, freedom was saved, and America was seen as the land of heroes? Some say yes. After all, what if Germany defeated the British, and was on the verge of beating the Soviet Army, what would America do then? Wait like a dead dog, and pray that the Nazis wouldn’t cooperate with fascist insiders in America to overthrew its constitutional government, or that Hitler wouldn’t invade by sea? Wasn’t it smarter to draw America into the European conflict, and use its great resources, and powerful military to destroy a global menace? Sure, 3,000 people had to die, but nothing can be done without a necessary sacrifice.

I don’t see the attack that way, but I do understand this point of view, and it is logical in a warped way. But, I ask; what did the American people gain by defeating the Nazis? Millions of suburban homes, and nationwide highways, that’s about it. Meanwhile, the U.S. government hired Nazi scientists, established repressive institutions like the CIA, and grew its military into an unstoppable anti-democratic machine – a “military-industrial-congressional-complex,” as Eisenhower described it at the end of his presidency.
What did America’s victory in WWII really achieve? The American people crushed a global menace in Europe, while helping to create a global menace in their own backyard. And that global menace has overthrown democratically elected countries, killed millions of people, assassinated world leaders (including its own in 1963), committed terrorist acts, and war crimes across the world; all things that a global menace like Nazi Germany would’ve done, except America’s shrewd, elite-owned government did these crimes with a little more grace, behind a democratic facade.
Trask tackled the immoral dimensions and innate hypocrisy in American foreign policy in his review of Stinnett’s book:

“Here we have yet another example of Americans making use of the doctrine that the end justifies the means. Americans are quick to deny the ethical legitimacy of this doctrine when it is presented to them as a naked proposition, yet there is no doctrine that they more readily turn to in order to justify morally questionable practices. Do not those who defend the nuclear holocaust of Hiroshima and Nagasaki argueas their first line of defensethat it was morally justified because it saved American lives? And can we not expect to hear in the near future from those who can no longer deny the truth, “Roosevelt’s duplicity was justified because it was necessary to stop Hitler.” The Christian’s response to this question was articulated by Paul two thousand years ago: “And why not say, ‘Let us do evil that good may come’? – as we are slanderously reported and as some affirm that we say. Their condemnation is just.” (Romans 3:8 NKJV).

We owe a debt of gratitude to Mr. Stinnett. Not only has he uncovered the truth behind Pearl Harbor, but in so doing he has exposed one of the greatest cover stories, or con jobs, of all time – American prewar naval intelligence and high command as keystone cop. After sixty years, America’s brave band of revisionist historians have been vindicated, while her servile crop of court historians have been pretty much disgraced.”
It is interesting that after seventy years the U.S. empire resorts to the same tricks to get its way in the global arena. Nine years ago, onOctober 7, 2001, America invaded Afghanistan after the September 11 attacks, another infamous example of government deception about another “surprise attack.” This time, though, American leaders didn’t just allow the attack to happen in America, they orchestrated it from scratch.
It is in some ways comforting to know that the age of government terror and official deception did not begin on September 11, 2001, because it probably means that we are near the end of an age, whereas December 7, 1941 was only the beginning.

Stinnett’s book is important because it is not just another work of history to be put away under the “old news” category, it draws lessons that are relevant for today’s world, when America is in the middle of another manufactured war. The book helps reveal the big lie that “American power secures the free world.” Once we know that this is not true, and that the American people and the whole world have been lied to by U.S. leaders about America’s true history in the last seventy years, then we are more likely to change the current course by the treasonous U.S. government that is pushing the world towards destruction, and global chaos.
When asked by Cirignano about why he thought the book was important for our times, Stinnettanswered:
Stinnett:It’s important because it reveals the lengths that some people in the American government will go to deceive the American public, and to keep this vital information—in our land of the First Amendment—from the people. And that’s against everything I believe in.

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

Shut Up Conspiracy Theorist

It’s time to clear the facts…

Shut Up Conspiracy Theorist

>> Video

We exist within extraordinary times. The proliferation of technology has ushered in an age of information and never before has humanity had the ability to gather information so easily, at least in the technologically advanced nations. Essentially, the knowledge of mankind lies at the fingertips of people in much of the world and curiously, a high percentage of people, especially in the west, instead utilize the tools available, not for self education or expansion of ones knowledge base, but as a means of distraction. I mean, really, why educate oneself when you can watch video clips of monkeys hurling feces at tourists? Why expand your knowledge base when you can upload to social networking sites, pictures of your kitty-cat or what you ate for lunch?

The internet is a linking of billions of minds; this technology has moved us forward and has brought the world closer. It has revolutionized the way we communicate, conduct business, gather information and connect with the world. It has also created a global platform for alternative media, which has been the bane of corporate, mainstream controlled, bought-and-paid-for media.

It seems as though whenever information is presented that conflicts with the official, consensus, mainstream version of events, it is immediately attacked and discounted as “conspiracy theory.” It’s amazing to me the way that words get thrown around and often times, their true meaning is lost to the ones using them. Etymology or the derivation of words, can teach us an awful lot. The word “conspiracy,” derives from the Latin word, conspirationem, which simply means: “agreement, union, unanimity.”

The modern dictionary definitions of the word conspiracy are:

1. The act of conspiring.
2. An evil, unlawful, or surreptitious plan formulated in secret by two or more persons; plot.
3. A combination of persons for a secret, unlawful or evil purpose.
4. Law: an agreement by two or more persons to commit a crime, fraud or other wrongful act.
5. Any concurrence in action; combination in bringing about a given result.

To simplify, the word “conspiracy” simply means: “to breathe together.” I’ve actually heard those among the I believe everything I’m told crowd, with such certainty; claim that there is no such thing as conspiracies. Obviously, when the etymology and definition is understood, that statement is seen for the ill-informed and absurd nonsense that it is. Two or more people plotting to rob a bank would be “conspiring” to do so.

The first use of the phrase “conspiracy theorist” apparently occurred in 1909; in an article published by the American Historical review.Later, in 1967, the CIA adopted the term in a psychological operation to discredit researchers and actual journalists whose findings deviated from the official claims, particularly, with those who were investigating the JFK assassination, and the ridiculous assertions and conclusions of the whitewash known as the Warren Commission Report.

In 1976, the New York Times acquired a CIA dispatch thorough the Freedom of Information Act, which outlined the CIA’s tactics to discredit those whose research and investigations conflicted with official propaganda. The document spells out the CIA’s tactics of psychological manipulation and disinformation. The dispatch outlines certain tactics:

Claim that it would be impossible that so many people would keep quiet about such a big conspiracy.
Claim that eyewitness testimony is unreliable [unless it is in line with the official version of events].
Accuse theorists of being wedded to and infatuated with their theories.
Accuse theorists of having financial interests in promoting conspiracy theories.

In part, the document reads:

To discuss the publicity problem with and friendly elite contacts (especially politicians and editors) , pointing out that the [official investigation] made as thorough an investigation as humanly possible, that the charges of the critics are without serious foundation, and that further speculative discussion only plays into the hands of the opposition. Point out also that parts of the conspiracy talk appear to be deliberately generated by propagandists. Urge them to use their influence to discourage unfounded and irresponsible speculation.
To employ propaganda assets to and refute the attacks of the critics. Book reviews and feature articles are particularly appropriate for this purpose. The unclassified attachments to this guidance should provide useful background material for passing to assets. Our ploy should point out, as applicable, that the critics are (I) wedded to theories adopted before the evidence was in, (II) politically interested, (III) financially interested, (IV) hasty and inaccurate in their research, or (V) infatuated with their own theories.

I’ve been on the receiving end of the label “conspiracy theorist” more times than I can count, and I would estimate that 99.9% of the time, the person using the term has not even bothered to look at any of my work or even engage in intelligent discussion regarding the particular topic at hand; they simply repeat the label as if by rote, and so few of them would ever bother to look at information that just may challenge what they think they know, or their TV educated mindset. They never seem to engage in any investigation of their own, apart from glancing at a “news” snippet or simply adopting the consensus view as their own. In fact, if I had a dollar for every time that label, or other such nonsense was thrown at me, without even considering what I was saying, I’d be writing this right now from my private yacht, off the coast of Maui!

Critical thinking has become all but extinct; it seems to have been bred out of most people, and the ones that question are at once considered “crazy conspiracy theorists,” often on knee jerk reaction with outright rejection of any information that contradicts their consensus mindset. Author Jack trout summed it up perfectly when he stated:

“The sane person constantly analyzes the world of reality and then changes what’s inside his or her head to fit the facts. That’s an awful lot of trouble for most people. Besides, how many people want to constantly change their opinions to fit the facts? It’s a whole lot easier to change the facts to fit your opinions. Unsane people make up their minds and they find the facts to ‘verify’ their opinions. Or even more commonly, they accept the opinion of the nearest ‘expert’ and then they don’t have to bother about the facts at all.”

After the attacks of September 11, 2001, the media, in a lockstep with the corporate apparatus that funds and controls it, engaged in massive smear campaigns against anyone who dared to question the official story. Now, I cannot pretend to know exactly what happened on that tragic day, but I can say emphatically, after investigating the event for years, that the official story is a steaming pile of crap from start to finish, filled with more holes than a Swiss cheese factory.

The laws of physics were somehow suspended on that day. Kerosene fuel burned over 1,000 degrees hotter than its maximum temperature and was somehow able to melt steel. Small, contained fires brought down a 47-story skyscraper that was not even hit by aircraft (building 7). The 200-ton, metal aircraft that allegedly hit the pentagon somehow disappeared upon impact and the public was told that it vaporized. The public was told that a passport of one of the hijackers somehow miraculously survived an explosion of fuel and metal, only to be found neatly amidst the rubble, intact! There are so many anomalies to the official story that it boggles the mind. Even more mind boggling, is the fact that when these events occur, droves of people buy into the official story and immediately adopt it into their beLIEf systems without question.

Here’s a great example of what I’m talking about:

At the time that the Obama administration announced that troops had killed Bin Laden (the CIA asset) I was working in the food service industry. Newspapers were sold there, and of course, when the govt. announced that they killed their former ally, the story was blasted all over mainstream media, on every front page and every news network. No evidence, photographic or otherwise was presented to the public, but of course, this didn’t matter. The “news” was broadcast on every TV network and printed in every major newspaper so it must be true.

I watched a man walk over to the newspaper rack, pick up a copy of the propaganda rag, and claim with glee: “we got em! We got the son of a bitch!” No investigation, no critical thought, hell, he didn’t even read the article! The front page headline was enough to convince him and this is exactly what I’m talking about.

I know osama’s dead because tv tells me so

I wonder if those who simply believe what they are told ever even consider where the information comes from. Do they ever ask who benefits by them believing the official story? Do they ever ask who owns the media, and whether or not those owners have a vested interest in the public believing what is presented to them? Alternative researchers are attacked all of the time, even if their information is credible and true; it wasn’t on CNN or Faux news so therefore, it must not be true or credible. Interestingly, alternative journalists, or “conspiracy nuts” have been very accurate as the passage of time and unfolding of events has shown.

media consolidationWhen one challenges the system or steps out of line, they are at once considered a threat. Swinging the sword of truth at mainstream lies does not exactly win you many friends. When the consensus trance is challenged, people are naturally resistant because their very identity is often built around what they’ve been conditioned to believe. Besides, so many seem to have real trouble entertaining the notion that they may have been wrong about something. The ego doesn’t like that idea very much! Those who question their reality, and what is presented as truth, and report their findings, are viewed as a threat, even if their information is true and valid; if it flies in the face of the mainstream consensus, it must be false, crazy, unfounded, “conspiracy theory.” No investigation required! A talking head in a five-thousand-dollar business suit, with a thousand-dollar haircut has slavishly repeated the official line, so who am I to question? Not thinking is just so much more hassle-free!

Fortunately, due to the efforts of some very brave researchers/presenters, film makers, real journalists, authors and the like, the tide is turning. People actually are beginning to shake off the spell that has been woven around their very consciousness and wake up to the fact that they have been sold lie upon lie and have willingly bought into them. Unfortunately though, there still does appear to be a rather high percentage of those whose minds are guided by the corporate apparatus, the mainstream media and the gatekeeper voice pieces that serve the spin machine.

Taking into consideration the actual meaning of the word conspiracy, and the etymology, the statement that “conspiracies don’t exist,” is simply absurd and nonsensical. Have you noticed that when the word conspiracy is used, it is so often followed by the word “theory?” That immediately discredits the information as per the CIA’s very succesful psy-op.

Was it not a “conspiracy” that hatched the plot to kill Caesar? Do corporate CEOs not “conspire” to figure out how to maximize profits? Don’t war profiteers “conspire” to sell unjustified wars to the masses to gain public approval? Whatever truly happened on 9/11, wouldn’t the perpetrators have had to “conspire” to pull that off? Crazy talk, crazy talk, tin-foil-hat-wearer, shut that person up! It’s making my cognitive dissonance hurt!

I sum it up like this:

“The greatest threat to the establishment today is the person who can think independently and maintains the ability to continuously scrutinize what they think they know. The challenger of conventional thought, the critical thinker, the man or woman of ideas is the enemy, the one who walks alone. She will not join, she will not conform; she will not waver. She has detached from the herd. The free thinker is perceived as the dangerous one. His ideas are a danger to the system, to his peers and to the rigid confines of ego- centered consciousness. He is a rebel in the truest sense. He/she is the sane amongst the unsane, the one whose guidance comes only from within. Think for yourself and watch the lie become dust beneath your feet!”

I’m not sure who came up with this phrase, but it’s perfect:

“I’ll call myself a conspiracy theorist if you call yourself a coincidence theorist.”

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

UFOs, Conspiracies, Government Black Ops

Now something about UFO’s, conspiracies and government black ops.

UFOs, Conspiracies, Government Black Ops – Full Documentary

UFOs, government black ops, and the ongoing conspiracy of secrecy that drains the world of treasure and sucks vital energy from the planet is explored with Dr. Sean David Morton. The distinction between technocrats and autocrats is illuminated, as the shadow government is explored. Spooky examinations at Area 51, hidden financial motivations behind 9/11, the Pleiadians and how Earth is a magnet school for the universe is discussed in an uncensored Buzzsaw, hosted by Sean Stone.GUEST BIO:
Dr. Sean David Morton attended Stanford University and received a Bachelor of Fine Arts and a Political Science degree, with minors in Organic Chemistry and Astronomy from the University of Southern California. He received his PhD. in clinical psychology, specializing in therapeutic counseling, from the International Institute of Alternative Medicine. He has also studied Astrology at the famed Exeter College at Oxford University.
Sean’s adventures at Area 51, his pioneering work in REMOTE VIEWING and his stunning predictions of the future brought him international recognition as the #1 guest on Coast to Coast AM where host ART BELL called him “America’s Prophet” and “My all time favorite guest!”
Sean is a multi-award winning independent filmmaker and has been a reporter/writer/producer/director for HARD COPY, SIGHTINGS, STRANGE UNIVERSE, UNSOLVED MYSTERIES, ANCIENT ALIENS, PARANORMAL BORDERLINE and has appeared on countless radio and TV shows.
He is the author of BLACK SERAPH and THE DARK PROPHET, spy thrillers about the inner workings of the Vatican and the Jesuits. His latest books, SANDS OF TIME Vol. I and II, the true memoir of a MAN IN BLACK, describes 40 years of the adventures of a top level director of the Shadow Government. He has authored over a dozen screenplays and is currently working on the funding for a film and media distribution company.

 

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

Mystery Solved: The WTC Was Nuked on 9/11

There are many theories about how WTC towers came down and I just want to add this one to the pile. I don’t have the absolute truth, but you have to keep your mind open because there was definitely something fishy going on:

Mystery Solved: The WTC Was Nuked on 9/11

By Don Fox, Ed Ward MD and Jeff Prager

The debate has raged for more than a decade about what caused the Twin Towers to “collapse” in approximately 10 seconds each — 9 seconds for the South Tower, 11 for the North. A large and growing percentage of the public has become skeptical of the conclusion of the government’s official NCSTAR 1 report, according to which, “NIST found no corroborating evidence for alternative hypotheses suggesting that WTC towers were brought down by controlled demolition using explosives planted prior to 9/11.”

Skepticism of NIST’s conclusions is well founded. There is eyewitness testimony as well as abundant video and audio evidence of explosions at the WTC on 9/11. There is also seismic data that demonstrates that high powered explosives were used to demolish the Twin Towers. The gross observable video evidence — if you are willing to believe your own eyes — shows that the Twin Towers were destroyed from the top down and the inside out.

We believe that only mini-nukes — which were probably neutron bombs — planted in the center columns of the buildings, detonated from top to bottom and configured to explode upward, can explain what is observed. If they were used to blow apart one ten-floor cube per second, for example, then, since the North Tower stood at 110 floors, that would have taken 11 seconds, while, since the top three cubes of the South Tower tilted over and were blown as one, in that case, it would have taken only 9, which coincides with NIST’s own times.

This is a controversial contention. Judy Wood, Ph.D., has proclaimed that a Tesla-inspired directed energy weapon (DEW) was responsible for the destruction of the WTC buildings and has vehemently denied nuclear bombs were used. Steve Jones, Ph.D., and his followers promote the theory that an incendiary (nanothermite) was the cause of the destruction of the WTC buildings, while they also deny that nukes were used. So these seemingly opposed camps agree on one thing: nukes were not used on 9/11!

The nanothermite hypothesis has been discredited on multiple occasions in articles by T. Mark Hightower and Jim Fetzer, including “Has nanothermite been oversold to the 9/11 community?”, “Is ’9/11 truth’ based upon a false theory?”, and “Nanothermite: If it doesn’t fit, you must acquit”. Since it is a principle (law) of materials science that an explosive can destroy a material only if it has a detonation velocity equal to or greater than the speed of sound in that material, where the speed of sound in concrete is 3,200 m/s and in steel 6,100 m/s, while the highest detonation velocity that has been attributed to nanothermite is 895 m/s, it should be obvious: You can’t get there from there!

The DEW hypothesis turns out to be difficult to test, since Judy Wood defines DEWs as sources of energy that are greater than conventional and can be directed, which even encompasses micro and mini nukes within its scope. As earlier articles have explained, including “9/11 Truth will out: The Vancouver Hearings II” and “Mini Neutron Bombs: A Major Piece of the 9/11 Puzzle”, there are multiple grounds for preferring the mini or micro nuke hypothesis over the DEW alternative, which emerge with particular clarity from a study of the dust samples collected by the US Geological Survey. It is ironic that, while the “thermite sniffers” also focus on dust samples, they seem to have missed what we have to learn from them.

Indeed, the nuclear component of the decimation of World Trade Center buildings 1, 2, 6 and 7 is the darkest and most closely guarded secret of 9/11. With so many folks claiming different theories it is difficult for average people to know what to believe. Fortunately, we have scientific proof of what happened at Ground Zero. The dust and water samples reveal the true story of what happened on 9/11. This article thus provides more of the scientific evidence–especially from the USGS dust samples–that settles the debate in favor of the demolition of the WTC buildings as having been a nuclear event.

DEBRIS EJECTED OVER 600 FEET

The explosives that demolished the Twin Towers were so powerful that North Tower debris was ejected up at a 45° angle and out over 600 feet into the Winter Garden. This feat alone puts an end to the notion that the buildings were “dustified” where they stood or that an incendiary like nanothermite was the responsible for the destruction of two 500,000 ton 110 story skyscrapers or that the buildings collapsed due to fire.

Debris ejected up at a 45° angle

debris ejected from North Tower

Which lands in the Winter Garden over 600 feet away

300 ton chunk of debris smashes into the Winter Garden

Engineers estimate that 1/3 of the buildings were completely vaporized. And as Judy Wood likes to point out no toilets were found in the rubble. 90% of the debris from the Twin Towers destruction landed outside the building’s footprints. What type of explosives could cause this sort of damage? The only thing known to man that can explain this is nuclear bombs.

PROOF OF FUSION:

The Department of Energy (DOE) collected water samples from the basement of Building 6 eleven days after 9/11 that showed tritium levels 55 times greater than background. How does this prove fusion?

Let’s start with defining tritium: Tritium is an isotope of hydrogen containing one proton and two neutrons. Tritium is radioactive with a half-life of 12.32 years. Also Known As: hydrogen-3, 3H (Helmenstine)

The Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission provides us some excellent background information on hydrogen:

Hydrogen is the most abundant element in the universe, comprising approximately 90% of the luminous universe by weight. Ordinary hydrogen (1H) accounts for greater than 99.985% of all naturally-occurring hydrogen, whereas deuterium (2H) comprises approximately 0.015%. By comparison, tritium (3H) represents only approximately 10-16 percent of hydrogen naturally occurring. Tritium is a rare but natural isotope of hydrogen (H), and is the only natural hydrogen isotope that is radioactive. The tritium atom is sometimes designated T to distinguish it from the common lighter isotope. Notwithstanding the difference in mass, tritium can be found in the same chemical forms as hydrogen. The most important forms, from the perspective of atmospheric behavior of tritium, are tritiated hydrogen gas (HT) and tritiated water (HTO). These tritiated forms behave chemically like hydrogen gas (H2) and water (H2O).

Natural Sources

Tritium is generated by both natural and artificial processes. Tritium is naturally produced primarily through the interaction of cosmic radiation protons and neutrons with gases (including nitrogen, oxygen and argon) in the upper atmosphere.

Anthropogenic Sources

In addition to its natural sources, tritium also has a number of anthropogenic sources which account for the dominant proportion of the global tritium inventory. Anthropogenic tritium sources include fallout from nuclear weapons testing, nuclear reactors, future fusion reactors, fuel reprocessing plants, heavy water production facilities and commercial production for medical diagnostics, radiopharmaceuticals, luminous paints, sign illumination, self-luminous aircraft, airport runway lights, luminous dials, gauges and wrist watches, and others.

Commercial uses of tritium account for only a small fraction of the tritium used worldwide. Instead, the primary use of tritium has been to boost the yield of both fission and thermonuclear (or fusion) weapons, increasing the efficiency with which the nuclear explosive materials are used.

Thermonuclear Detonation during Nuclear Weapons Testing

Nuclear tests have been conducted in the atmosphere since 1945, producing tritium in amounts that greatly exceed the global natural activity, particularly during 1954 to 1958 and 1961 to 1962 when a number of large-yield test series were undertaken. The tritium activity arising from atmospheric nuclear tests can be estimated from the fission and fusion yields of the weapons tests or from environmental measurements. For example, the tritium activity produced per unit yield is dependent upon the attributes of the device, as well as on the characteristics of the detonation site, and tritium generation from fusion reactions is much higher than from fission. The tritium that is produced by a nuclear explosion is almost completely converted to tritiated water (HTO), which then mixes with environmental water. (“Investigation of the,” 2009)

What about WTC-6?

We have established that tritium is a rare hydrogen isotope, the vast majority of the tritium that is produced is used in nuclear weapons and that the tritium produced by a thermonuclear explosion is converted into tritiated water (HTO). Tritiated water WAS found in the basement of Building 6 at concentrations 55 times background levels. Here is Ed Ward’s breakdown of the DOE’s water sample data:

1. Trace definition as it applies to quantity: Occurring in extremely small amounts or in quantities less than a standard limit (In the case of tritium, this standard level would be 20 TUs – the high of quoted standard background levels.) http://www.thefreedictionary.com/trace

2. The stated values of tritium from the DOE report “Study of Traces of Tritium at the World Trade Center”. “A water sample from the WTC sewer, collected on 9/13/01, contained 0.164±0.074 (2ó) nCi/L (164 pCi/L +/- 74 pCi/L – takes 1,000 trillionths to = 1 billionth) of HTO. A split water sample, collected on 9/21/01 from the basement of WTC Building 6, contained 3.53±0.17 and 2.83±0.15 nCi/L ( 3,530.0 pCi/L +/- 170 pCi/L and 2,830 pCi/L +/- 150 pCi/L), respectively. https://e-reportsext.llnl.gov/pdf/241096.pdf Pico to Nano converter – http://www.unitconversion.org/prefixes/picos-to-nanos-conversion.html Nano to Pico converter – http://www.unit-conversion.info/metric.html

3. 1 TU = 3.231 pCi/L (trillionths per liter) or 0.003231 nCi/L (billionths per liter) – http://www.hps.org/publicinformation/ate/q2282.html – (My original TU calculations came out to 3.19 pCi/L, but I will gladly accept these referenced minimally higher values. http://www.clayandiron.com/news.jhtml?method=view&news.id=1022 )

4. In 2001 normal background levels of Tritium are supposedly around 20 TUs (prior to nuclear testing in the 60′s, normal background tritium water levels were 5 to 10 TUs – http://www.hps.org/publicinformation/ate/q2282.html ). However, groundwater studies show a significantly less water concentration: Groundwater age estimation using tritium only provides semi-quantitative, “ball park” values: · <0.8 TU indicates sub modern water (prior to 1950s) · 0.8 to 4 TU indicates a mix of sub modern and modern water · 5 to 15 TU indicates modern water (< 5 to 10 years) · 15 to 30 TU indicates some bomb tritium http://www.grac.org/agedatinggroundwater.pdf But, instead of “5 to 15 TU” (which would make the increase in background levels even higher), I will use 20 TUs as the 2001 environmental level to give all possible credibility to the lie of “Traces”.

5. Let’s calculate the proven referenced facts. Tritium level confirmed in the DOE report of traces of tritium = 3,530 pCi/L (+/- 170 pCi/L, but we will use the mean of 3,530 pCi/L). 3,530

pCi/L (the referenced lab value) divided by the background level of 20TUs (20 X 3.231 p (1 TU = 3.21 pCi/L) = 64.62 pCi/L as the high normal background/standard level. 3,530 divided by 64.62 pCi/L = 54.63 TIMES THE NORMAL BACKGROUND LEVEL. 3,530 pCi/L divided by 3.231 pCi/L (1 TU) = 1,092.54 TUs

6. This is my ‘fave’ because lies tend to eat their young. Muon physicist Steven Jones calls 1,000 TUs “The graphs below show that hydrogen-bomb testing boosted tritium levels in rain by several orders of magnitude. (“Tritium in precipitation,”) (Jones, 2006) Yet, calls the EXACT SAME LEVELS quoted in nCi/L as “Traces” and “These results are well below the levels of concern to human exposure” (Jones, 2006). Interesting isn’t it.

7. Thomas M. Semkowa, Ronald S. Hafnerc, Pravin P. Parekha, Gordon J. Wozniakd, Douglas K. Hainesa, Liaquat Husaina, Robert L. Rabune. Philip G. Williams and Steven Jones have all called over 1,000 TUs of Tritium, “Traces”. Even at the height of nuclear bomb testing 98% – after thousands of Megatons of nuclear testing – of the rainwater tests were 2,000 TUs or less. https://e-reports-ext.llnl.gov/pdf/241096.pdf

8. It is also important to note that the tritium present was diluted by at least some portion of 1 million liters of water accounting for BILLIONS of TUs.

An important point that Jones glosses over is the dilution of water in the basement of WTC 6. If not for copious amounts of water sprayed on the WTC site undoubtedly the concentration of tritium would have been higher than the measured 55 times normal background levels.

Ed Ward’s Breakdown of the WTC Rain and Fire Hose Water, 4 Million Gallons of Dilution: http://groups.yahoo.com/group/EdWard-MD/message/136

WTC 6 = 1 acre (approx.)

WTC site = 16 acres. Rain = 4 million liters. 4/16 = 1/4 of a million liters deposits in WTC 6 in its 40 ft. (depth) by 120 ft. (diameter) crater.

WTC 6 was hot – see thermal images 2nd article on WTC Nukes.

Firemen = 12 million liters. Firemen would mostly be spraying the hot areas.

There are about 5 acres that gradually increase to maybe a total of 6 to 7 acres, but let’s be generous and say they sprayed 8 acres (this will lower the total amount of Tritium Units estimate).

8/16 = 1/2 of 12 million liters = 6 million liters spread over 8 acres = 3/4 of a million liters per acre.

Rain plus Firemen = 1 million liters in WTC 6 in the 40 ft (depth) by 120 ft (diameter) crater.

1 liter of the pooled water = 1,106 TUs X 1 million liters of water = 1.1066 BILLION TUs JUST IN WTC 6 (no other places were checked.)

This completely ignores 104 Million Liters (30 Million Gallons) pumped out of the bathtub and the drain water of 51 TUs. 120 million liters X 51 = 6.120 BILLION TUs.

This completely ignores the amount of Tritium in gas form that escapes into the atmosphere and gets massive dispersal.

Just what happened to Building 6? HOW did all of that tritium get in the basement in the first place?

Plume of smoke seen rising from the area where WTC6 stood:

WTC6 explosionPhoto shows WTC6 damaged BEFORE the North Tower “collapsed.”

WTC_6_blackened_prior_to_collapse

Another Bill Biggert photo shows WTC6 blackened BEFORE South Tower debris hits it:

Biggart_WTC6

Overhead photo:

WTC_6_from_overhead

Reminiscent of the OKC Murrah Building:

Murrah Building OKC

Chuck Boldwyn slide shows possible placement of mini/micro neutron bombs:

PotentialplacementofverylowyieldminineutronnukesAnother Chuck Boldwyn slide shows the damage done by upwardly directed shaped mini/micro neutron nukes:

WTC6Infrared photo that shows the huge crater in WTC 6:

noaa_wtc2

To sum this up: we see a plume of smoke rising from Building 6, photos that show the building was blackened and bombed out before ANY debris from the Twin Towers hit it, a massive crater in the middle of the building and the DOE found massive quantities of tritium in the basement eleven days after 9/11. Only a thermonuclear explosion explains all of this, which strongly suggests that WTC-6 was nuked. And there is more proof.

PROOF OF FISSION:

The US Geological Survey collected samples of dust and airfall debris from more than 35 localities within a 1-km radius of the World Trade Center site on the evenings of September 17 and 18, 2001. The USGS was primarily looking for asbestos in the dust but they found a host of elements that when analyzed properly proves that nuclear fission took place at Ground Zero.

A quick glance at the chemistry table and immediately the presence of the elements such as cesium, uranium, thorium, barium, strontium, yttrium, rubidium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, chromium and zinc raise suspicions. But deeper analysis shows that these elements correlate with each other according to relationships expected in a nuclear fission event.

Jeff Prager has done extensive work with the USGS dust samples and we’ll use some of the slides from his Vancouver Power Point presentation to help us analyze the USGS data:

Barium and Strontium

People might argue that strontium and barium could be found in building debris and they would be correct however strontium and barium could never, under any circumstances, be found as building debris constituents in a demolition in these quantities.

The levels never fall below 400 ppm for Barium and they never drop below 700 ppm for Strontium and they reach over 3000 ppm for both of them at WTC01-16, Broadway and John Streets. Why?

Barium and Strontium are rare Trace elements with limited industrial uses. The enormous peak in Barium and Strontium concentration at WTC01-16 is readily apparent in the chart at right. The concentration of the two elements reaches 3130 ppm for Strontium and 3670 ppm for Barium or over 0.3% by weight of the dust. This means that 0.37% of the sample was Barium and 0.31% of the sample was Strontium by weight at that location, WTC01-16, Broadway and John Streets. The Mean concentration for Barium including the very low girder coating samples is 533 ppm and for Strontium it’s 727 ppm. These are not Trace amounts. They are highly dangerous and extremely toxic amounts. They are also critical components of nuclear fission and the decay process.

Barium and Strontium

Here we’re plotting the concentration of Barium at each location against the Strontium concentration. The correlation between the concentrations of the two elements, Barium and Strontium is extremely high.

The Coefficient of Correlation between the concentration of Barium and Strontium at the outdoor and indoor sampling locations is 0.99 to 2 decimal places (0.9897 to 4 decimal places). So we have a Correlation Coefficient between the concentration of Barium and the concentration of Strontium of 0.9897, or near perfect. The maximum Correlation Coefficient that is mathematically possible is 1.0 and this would mean we have a perfect match between the two factors we’re examining and the data points would lie on a straight line with no variation between them. To obtain a Correlation Coefficient of 0.9897 with this number of measurements (14) around Lower Manhattan is very, very significant indeed. What this means is that we can say that there’s a 99% correlation in the variation in the concentration between these two elements. They vary in lockstep; they vary together. When one element varies so does the other. We can state with absolute mathematical certainty that any change in the concentration of one of these elements, either the Barium or Strontium, is matched by the same change in the concentration of the other. Whatever process gave rise to the presence of either the Barium or the Strontium must have also produced the other as well. Fission is the only process that explains this.

concentration of barium and strontiumThorium and Uranium

Next we come to the detection of measurable quantities of Thorium and Uranium in the dust from the World Trade Center, elements which only exist in radioactive form. The graph below plots the concentration of Thorium and Uranium detected at each sampling location. Again, the last two locations, WTC01-08 and WTC01-09, are for the two girder coating samples. The Uranium concentration follows the same pattern as Thorium, although the graph scale does not show this markedly. Uranium follows the dip at WTC01-03 and WTC01-16 but the highest concentration of Uranium also matches Thorium in the second girder coating, WTC01-09, at 7.57ppm. 7.57 greatly exceeds normal Trace element levels. This equals 93 Becquerels per kilogram. Normal background radiation is approximately 12Bq/kg to 40Bq/kg with 40Bq/kg the highest level we would expect to see. This girder contains more than twice the expected level of uranium. The second girder contained 30.7 ppm of Thorium, 6 times as high as the lowest level of that element detected. Thorium is a radioactive element formed from Uranium by decay. It’s very rare and should not be present in building rubble, ever. So we have verifiable evidence that a nuclear fission event has taken place. As we said earlier, Thorium is formed from Uranium be alpha decay. An alpha particle is the same as a Helium nucleus, so this means we have one of the favored fission pathways: Uranium fissioning into a Noble Gas and the balancing elements, in this case Helium and Thorium.

thorium and uraniumThe graph of Thorium versus Lithium including the Girder Coatings has exactly the same form as the graph showing Thorium versus Uranium, also including the Girder Coatings. Without the two Girder Coatings the correlation of Thorium to Lithium in the dust is completely linear. We therefore have compelling evidence that this fission pathway of Uranium to Thorium and Helium, with subsequent decay of the Helium into Lithium, has indeed taken place. It is out of the question that all of these correlations which are the signature of a nuclear explosion could have occurred by chance. This is impossible. The presence of rare Trace elements such as Cerium, Yttrium and Lanthanum is enough to raise eyebrows in themselves, let alone in quantities of 50 ppm to well over 100 ppm. When the quantities then vary widely from place to place but still correlate with each other according to the relationships expected from nuclear fission, it is beyond ALL doubt that the variations in concentration are due to that same common process of nuclear fission. When we also find Barium and Strontium present, in absolutely astronomical concentrations of over 400 ppm to over 3000 ppm, varying from place to place but varying in lockstep and according to known nuclear relationships, the implications are of the utmost seriousness. Fission occurred in NYC on 911.

thorium vs lithiumThe graph (below) shows that (apart from the very high peak in Sodium levels for one of the indoor dust samples) the Sodium and Potassium concentrations both display this now characteristic peak at location WTC01-16, the corner of Broadway and John Street. Sodium has the same peak as Zinc at WTC01-22, the corner of Warren and West, and like Zinc, falls to a minimum in the girder coatings – far below the concentrations found in the dust. Potassium is very similar except its concentration was not a peak at WTC01-02, Water and New York Streets, but somewhat lower than the next location, WTC01-03, State and Pearl Streets. There are clear correlations and relationships here which show that the Potassium and Sodium concentrations did not arise at random. They are products of radioactive decay. Remember that Strontium is produced by a fission pathway that proceeds through the Noble Gas Krypton and then the Alkali Metal Rubidium. Similarly, Barium is produced through Xenon and the Alkali Metal Cesium. We know that Uranium fission favors these pathways through the Noble Gases. Just as radioactive isotopes of Krypton and Xenon decay by beta particle emission to produce Rubidium and Cesium, radioactive isotopes of Neon and Argon also decay by beta emission to produce Sodium and Potassium. We would indeed expect to find anomalous levels of these elements present – what was found is again consistent with the occurrence of nuclear fission.

zinc sodium potassium

We know beyond doubt that the only process that can cause Barium and Strontium to be present in related or correlated quantities and any process that can also cause Barium and Strontium to have such strong relational concentrations across different samples, is nuclear fission. We know that if nuclear fission had occurred that Barium and Strontium would be present and a strong statistical correlation between the quantities of each would be found, and we have that, in spades. What else do we have? Quite a lot.

About 400 ppm of Barium and Strontium were measured in two samples of insulation girder coatings (WTC01-08 and 01-09). The concentration of Strontium actually falls somewhat below that of Barium in the second girder sample, WTC01-09, as at WTC01-16, whereas in every other sample the level of Strontium discovered was higher than Barium. Given the elevated levels of Barium daughter products found in the second girder and even the highest level of Uranium found (7.57ppm just West of and behind Tower One) this shows that active fission was still ongoing in the second girder coating, in the very same way as at WTC01-16 and therefore more Barium was found then Strontium. In other samples where the rate of fission had slowed down to give way to decay, the concentrations of Barium and Strontium reverse, due to the different half-lives. Barium isotopes have a shorter half-life then Strontium isotopes so they decay more quickly and after a period of time when no new Barium or Strontium has been deposited, Strontium will exceed Barium. The fact that more Barium then Strontium was still found at WTC01-16 and WTC01-09 shows that the overall nuclear processes taking place were somewhat favoring Barium over Strontium and hence Zinc as well. The tighter cluster of Barium (400-500 ppm) and Strontium (700-800 ppm) concentrations across widely separated sampling locations in Lower Manhattan is cast iron proof that Nuclear Fission occurred. We know that Barium and Strontium are the characteristic signature of fission; they are formed by two of the most common Uranium fission pathways. The fact that their concentrations are so tightly coupled means that their source was at the very epicenter of the event which created the dust cloud that enveloped Manhattan. This was not a localized preexisting chemical source which would only have contaminated a few closely spaced samples and left the remaining samples untouched. The very high concentrations of Barium and Strontium at location WTC01-16 shows that active nuclear fission was still ongoing at that spot; the dust was still “hot” and new Barium and new Strontium were being actively generated, actively created by transmutation from their parent nuclei.

The presence of Thorium and Uranium correlated to each other by a clear mathematical power relationship – and to the other radionuclide daughter products such as sodium, potassium, zinc, lithium, strontium and barium – leaves nothing more to be said. This type of data has probably never been available to the public before and it’s an unprecedented insight into the action of a nuclear device. September 11th, 2001, was the first nuclear event within a major United States city that we have incontrovertible proof for and this is without question the most closely held secret surrounding the events of September 11th, 2001.

Anyone seriously interested in 911 truth will naturally be compelled to fully and thoroughly investigate the serious implications raised by this report personally, and I strongly encourage this. The material is complex yet if I can understand it anyone can.

No one promised us that the answers to 911 would come easily.

There’s more compelling and incontrovertible evidence I’d like to cover now. We’ll discuss the elements:

Lanthanum
Vanadium
Yttrium
Chromium
Nickel
Copper
Lead
Zinc

In this graph Zinc has been divided by a factor of 10 to avoid losing all the detail in the scaling if the ‘Y’ axis instead went up to 3000 ppm. The variation in Lead is matched by the variation in Zinc almost perfectly across all sampling locations, including the Indoor and Girder Coating samples.

The concentration of Copper follows that of Zinc with one distinct exception at WTC01-15, Trinity and Cortlandt Streets, just several hundred feet East of Building Four. There seem to be two Copper-Zinc relationships. If some of the Zinc was being formed by beta decay of Copper, then the high Copper at WTC01-15 could reduce Zinc, since formation of Zinc by that decay pathway would be retarded by material being held up at the Copper stage, before decaying on to Zinc. Therefore this graph does confirm that some of the Zinc was indeed being formed by beta decay of Copper.

This would at least be a very small mercy for the civilian population exposed in this event since the Zinc isotopes formed from Copper are stable, i.e. they are not radioactive.

zinc lead copper

The copper found in the Ground Zero dust is indicative of nuclear fission. If we plot the concentration of Copper against Zinc and Nickel, we obtain the graphs pictured here. The concentration of Nickel was almost the same everywhere, except for the peak of 88 ppm matched by the Copper peak of 450 ppm.

The Copper – Zinc relationship is very interesting, showing in fact two distinct relationships again depending on isotopic composition. There are two radioactive isotopes of Copper (Cu 64 and Cu 67) with short half-lives of 12.7 hours and 2.58 days respectively which decay into Zinc isotopes. The other two isotopes (Cu 60 and Cu 61) decay the other way by positron emission into Nickel and in fact Cu 64 goes both ways, into both Nickel and Zinc. This would explain why there strongly appear to be two Copper – Zinc relationships.

The decay of radioactive Copper by beta particle emission into Zinc would have been another source for the extraordinarily high concentrations of Zinc found in the World Trade Center Dust.

copper vs zincLanthanum is the next element in the disintegration pathway of Barium, situated between Barium and Cerium. The concentration of Barium versus Lanthanum is plotted in the graph below.

This graph is almost identical in form to the relationship between Barium and Cerium. A similar inverse exponential (cubic) relationship is clearly visible. In this case, Lanthanum is approximately equal to 5 times the cube root of Barium.

Lanthanum has a much shorter half-life then Cerium; most of its isotopes have a half-life of only a few hours whereas beta decay by Cerium is measured in half-life periods of a month to 10 months. Cerium’s beta decay going back to Lanthanum occurs more quickly but Lanthanum’s beta decay going back to Barium occurs in a similar time-scale to that – a few hours, so we are left with the net effect of Lanthanum’s beta decay being much quicker than that of Cerium, so the concentration of Cerium remaining was higher than that of Lanthanum.

barium vs lanthanumYttrium is also a very rare element and should not be present in dust from a collapsed office building. Yttrium is the next decay element after Strontium. If we plot concentration of Strontium against Yttrium, we see what happens in the graph below. Strontium 90 has a much longer half-life (28.78 years) than most Barium isotopes so we would not expect to see as high a concentration of Strontium’s daughter products as those that are produced from Barium. This is in fact what we see – the concentration of Cerium (next daughter product to Barium) is higher than Yttrium, the next daughter product to Strontium.

strontium vs yttriumThe presence of Chromium is also a telltale signature of a nuclear detonation. Its concentration is shown plotted against Zinc and Vanadium in the graphs below.

There is a strong correlation between the Zinc and the Chromium concentration. The Coefficient of Correlation is high, 0.89.

There is also an indication of strong correlation between Chromium and Vanadium within 6 points of lying on an almost perfect exponential curve, with one outlier, WTC01-03, the corner of State and Pearl Streets, of 42.5 ppm where the Vanadium concentration reached its highest level.

chromium vs zincLooking at the data for Zinc we see that the Zinc concentration for WTC01-02, Water Street at the intersection of New York, is 2990 ppm and this immediately stands out. In fact, for the outdoor samples, Zinc is the most common Trace element at all sampling locations, with generally between 1000 ppm and 2000 ppm except for this spike of nearly 3000 ppm at WTC01-02.

This equates to an enormous concentration of Zinc. 0.1% to 0.2% of Zinc in the dust overall and at WTC01-02, 0.299% of the dust was Zinc. This exceeds the concentration of the supposed “non-Trace” element Manganese and Phosphorous and almost equals the elevated Titanium concentration of 0.39% at that same location.

What process produced the zinc?

If we include the data for WTC01-16, the Correlation Coefficient between the Zinc and Barium concentration is 0.007 to 3 decimal places, from which we can conclude that there is absolutely no correlation at all. But if we exclude that one sampling location, where Barium and Strontium concentrations peaked, the correlation coefficient between Zinc and Barium is 0.96 to two decimal places and between Zinc and Strontium, 0.66 to two decimal places. So what happened?

zinc strontium

This shows that the Zinc and Barium concentrations are closely related and if we exclude what must have been an extraordinary event at WTC01-16 as an outlier, the correlation is very good. The Product Moment Correlation Coefficient is 0.96. The concentration of Zinc is now 3 times the concentration of Barium but the correlation between Zinc and Strontium is not so clear, showing that the relationship must be more indirect. This is to be expected since Barium and Strontium are produced by different nuclear fission pathways.

In spent nuclear fuel, Strontium is found as Strontium Oxide (SrO) – the Strontium produced by the nuclear fission explosion under the Twin Towers will certainly have been oxidized to SrO by the heat. SrO is extremely soluble in water, so some of the Strontium concentration results obtained may have been distorted by the rain water which fell on New York a few days after the towers were destroyed.

There is a very strong linear relationship between Barium and Zinc found at the World Trade Center. This may indicate that a closely related nuclear sub-process gave rise to them, which produced 3 times as much Zinc as Barium by weight. If so, that would be a very unusual nuclear event.

There is a lesser known nuclear process that accounts for this, which would be indicative of very high energies indeed. This process is known as Ternary Fission.

What is ternary fission? From Wikipedia: Ternary Fission is a comparatively rare (0.2 to 0.4% of events) type of nuclear fission in which three charged products are produced rather than two. As in other nuclear fission processes, other uncharged particles such as multiple neutrons and gamma rays are produced in ternary fission.

Ternary fission may happen during neutron-induced fission or in spontaneous fission (the type of radioactive decay). About 25% more ternary fission happens in spontaneous fission compared to the same fissioning system formed after thermal neutron capture, illustrating that these processes remain physically slightly different, even after the absorption of the neutron, possibly because of the extra energy present in the nuclear reaction system of thermal neutron-induced fission.

True Ternary Fission: A very rare type of ternary fission process is sometimes called “true ternary fission.” It produces three nearly equal-sized charged fragments (Z ~ 30) but only happens in about 1 in 100 million fission events. In this type of fission, the product nuclei split the fission energy in three nearly equal parts and have kinetic energies of ~ 60 MeV (Wikipedia contributors, 2013)

Mini-Neutron Bombs

We have evidence of nuclear fission and fusion taking place at Ground Zero. Fission triggered fusion bombs fit the evidence. These bombs had limited but powerful blast effects, a burst of neutron radiation as well as EMP effects. Mini-neutron bombs appear to be what was used.

What is a neutron bomb? A neutron bomb, also called an enhanced radiation bomb, is a type of thermonuclear weapon. An enhanced radiation bomb is any weapon which uses fusion to enhance the production of radiation beyond that which is normal for an atomic device. In a neutron bomb, the burst of neutrons generated by the fusion reaction is intentionally allowed to escape using X-ray mirrors and an atomically inert shell casing, such as chromium or nickel. The energy yield for a neutron bomb may be as little as half that of a conventional device, though radiation output is only slightly less. Although considered to be ‘small’ bombs, a neutron bomb still has a yield in the tens or hundreds of kilotons range. Neutron bombs are expensive to make and maintain because they require considerable amounts of tritium, which has a relatively short half-life (12.32 years). Manufacture of the weapons requires that a constant supply of tritium of be available. Neutron bombs have a relatively short shelf-life. (Helmenstine)

Per Sam Cohen “In a broad sense, the neutron bomb is an explosive version of the sun; that is, the relevant energy it emits comes from thermonuclear, or fusion, reactions involving the very lightest elements. To be specific, its fuel consists of the two heavier nuclei of hydrogen, named deuterium and tritium. By means of a fission trigger, a mixture of these two nuclei is compressed and heated, as happens in a hydrogen bomb, to cause nuclear reactions whose principle output is in the form of very high energy neutrons. Also produced will be blast and heat, but so predominant are the neutron effects against human beings, who are a hundred to a thousand times more vulnerable to radiation than blast and heat, that by bursting the weapon high enough off the ground the only significant effects at the surface will come from radiation. In so doing, the blast and heat effects will not be strong enough to cause significant damage to most structures. Hence, a bomb which, accurately but misleadingly, has been described as a weapon that kills people but spares buildings.” (Cohen, 2006)

Neutron Radiation and EMP Effects at Ground Zero

Neutron radiation and EMP appears to be responsible for the “toasted cars” found near Ground Zero. What is neutron radiation? From the Shots Across the Bow Blog: To understand neutron radiation, imagine a pool table set for the start of a game. 15 balls are in the middle of the table, with the cue ball set for the break. The cue ball is a free neutron. When the neutron hits the nucleus, one of three things might happen. First, if the cue ball doesn’t have enough energy, or hits at the wrong angle, it caroms off, barely disturbing the pack of balls. Second, if the ball has too much energy, it slams through the pack, breaking it up. This is fission, and results in fission products, more free neutrons, and energy. Third, if the ball has just the right amount of energy, it just makes it to the pack and joins in, becoming another neutron in the nucleus. Here is where our analogy breaks down, because many times, when a nucleus gets another neutron, it becomes unstable, and begins to decay, emitting alphas, betas, or gammas. This is called activation, and is one of the trickier problems with neutron irradiation and the physical properties of the irradiated matter can be quite different from the original. (“A nuclear power,”)

A large quantity of high energy neutrons bombarding an object will cause the atoms in the material to move i.e. heat up. This is why so few bodies were found at Ground Zero – most of the people that were near the Towers were vaporized either by the blast and heat effects of the bombs or the neutron radiation that was released.

The “Toasted” Cars

Ted Twietmeyer has a post on Rense’s website that goes a long way towards explaining the toasted cars found near Ground Zero. Twietmeyer attributes the damage to aluminum vehicle parts such as engine blocks and mirrors to strong EMP eddy currents produced by nuclear detonations at Ground Zero: “and what else do eddy currents create? HEAT if the currents are strong enough. The stronger the eddy currents, the more heat which will be generated. Although magnetic fields are being created, they are temporary in aluminum because it is not magnetic, but paramagnetic. This means aluminum will be affected by magnetism, but it cannot be magnetized.

meltdd

“SACRIFICIAL VEHICLES” PROVIDE SHIELDING FOR OTHER VEHICLES AND SHOW PULSE VECTORS

A vector is simply a line that shows direction and usually has an arrow. Arrows are not shown above, in an attempt to simplify the image. The direction of force is from upper left to lower right. The notated image above provides a possible explanation for the location of the source of the magnetic pulse, and why some vehicles were damaged and others were not. This parking lot may be the best evidence in support of my theory.

Yellow lines indicate the pulse(s) blocked by the rear row of vehicles. It appears the entire outside of all rear vehicles were destroyed. Note how several hoods on the rear row of vehicles have white dust or ash, indicating an intense heat originating from under the hood. This is probably caused by the engine block vaporizing, and the white dust may be aluminum oxide. If the vehicles are still around somewhere in a junk yard, some simple lab tests will confirm this.

White lines show the pulses that reached the vehicles in the foreground.
Orange shapes around each car show the damage threshold line. The cars are basically undamaged below these lines and some might be repairable. If it wasn’t for “sacrificial” vehicles at the rear, those in the foreground would have been completely burned.
Note that white and yellow lines are not meant to be a literal interpretation to show size of the pulse, how many lines of force hit each vehicle, etc… Each line is intended to show only the direction the pulse(s) came from. Regardless of whether this parking lot is close to the WTC or not, it clearly shows that the nuclear device (or pulse source) was high above the ground. If the pulse source were close to the Earth, then vehicles in the foreground would have been completely shielded from the pulse.” (Twietmeyer, 2007)
Ed Ward’s take: I believe some of what he attributes to EMP was done by neutrons – in particular his linear evaluations (angle computations) would seem more neutron than EMP. EMP should tend to flow around – seems to be a correlation of dust cloud carrying EMP. So the linear blockage of cars protecting other cars would seem to be more appropriate for neutrons. Other than that seems on the money, IMO.

The Temperature of the Pile

Temperatures at Ground Zero were 600 to 1,500 °F or even higher for 6 months after 9/11. Firemen were fighting fires at Ground Zero for 99 days after 9/11. AVRIS data showed that temperature in one spot was 1,341 °F on 9/16/01. These high temperatures could be attributed to neutron bombs that were detonated underground in order to destroy the foundations of the Twin Towers. Some of the hotspots may have been unexploded nuclear fissile material reacting underground.

The workers at Ground Zero experienced hellish working conditions. One Ground Zero worker, Charlie Vitchers, describes the nightmare “The fires were very intense on the pile, the heat was very intense. In some places you couldn’t even get onto it. In some areas where you could walk, you’d travel another five feet and then you could just feel the heat coming up and you would have to just back off. You’d say to yourself, “I can’t see a fire, but I can feel the heat, so something’s wrong here,” and you’d back off.

That was one of the concerns we had about putting equipment on the pile, because the operators were sitting eight or ten feet up above the debris pile in their cabs and couldn’t feel the heat. But they’re carrying a hundred gallons of diesel fuel, hydraulic hoses, and other flammables, and there was nothing to stop the heat from wrecking the machine. If they got stuck in a place where the heat was so intense that it set his machine on fire, that operator wasn’t going to make it out.

We were so lucky. We didn’t lose anyone. We lost a lot of equipment, mostly due to collapses, but didn’t have any piece of equipment catch on fire or anything like that. But hoses melted, and there was a lot of damage to tires- some of them melted just from being too close. I mean, the bottom of your shoes would melt on some of the steel. Some of that was so hot you could feel the hair on the back of your neck start to burn when you walked by. There were cherry-red pieces of steel sticking out of the ground. It was almost like being in a steel-manufacturing plant. You just couldn’t physically go near that stuff.

Every time a grappler grabbed a piece of steel and shook it out, it would just fan the fire, like a fan in the fireplace. All of a sudden there’d be smoke billowing out.

The Army Corps of Engineers eventually supplied us with infrared aerial shots of where the heat was. It was like looking at the blob. The fire was moving under the pile. One day it would be here, it would be 1,400 degrees, the next day it would be 2,000 degrees, then five days later it wouldn’t register over 600 degrees.” (Stout, Vitchers & Gray, 2006)

Conclusions of this Study

Evidence for fission and fusion abounds at Ground Zero. Tritiated water in any significant quantity is a telltale sign of a thermonuclear explosion. A 170 meter high plume of smoke was observed rising from Building 6, and massive amounts of tritiated water were found in the basement. It appears to be beyond reasonable doubt that this building was nuked, because no alternative explanation is reasonable.

The Twin Towers were 500,000 tons each and destroyed in 9 and 11 seconds respectively with debris ejected hundreds of feet out. There can be no doubt that the Twins Towers were nuked as well.

The USGS dust samples prove beyond all doubt that nuclear fission took place at Ground Zero. Fission triggered fusion bombs such as mini or micro neutron bombs explain the dust and water sample evidence perfectly.

The destruction of the Twin Towers was an unprecedented use of nuclear bomb technology. The public had never before witnessed anything like it. While Steve Jones and Judy Wood, among others, have added to uncertainty over what happened to the WTC buildings on 9/11, the mystery has finally been solved. The World Trade Center was nuked on 9/11.

Donald Fox has done extensive research on the role of mini-nukes by Dr. Ed Ward and on work by The Anonymous Physicist on the towers and has formulated an account of how it was done and why there is more to this story relative to very low-yield thermonuclear devices. See his blog at https://donaldfox.wordpress.com.

Jeff Prager, founder of an award winning magazine for Senior Citizens, in 2002 he tried to prove 19 Muslims hijacked four planes and attacked us. By 2005, he realized this was false, sold his business, left the US and began to investigate 9/11 full-time. See 9/11 AMERICA NUKED, Part 1, Part 2.

Ed Ward, M.D., among the leading experts on the use of nukes on 9/11, maintains an extensive archive about them at his “Weblog of Tyranny”, http://edwardmd.wordpress.com/, and has also appeared as a guest on “The Real Deal”, which you can hear at radiofetzer.blogspot.com

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

Conspiracy Theorists by Jolly Roger

Have you been called a “Conspiracy theorist”? It’s just a tool to ridicule people who think with their own brains instead of just believing every rubbish story, that mainstream media tries to stuff down with their throats. Here’s a nice little article about this situation:

 Conspiracy Theorists

by Jolly Roger  slicingthroats@yahoo.com
1/08/2005

Everyone has heard, and has probably used the term “conspiracy theorist,” and the fact of the term being in common use, also indicates that we generally agree on what it means. I saw a movie by that name, and the title character was a raving lunatic who kept his food in thermoses with combination locks to reduce his chances of being poisoned by imaginary enemies.

Regardless of how the stupid movie turned out, what’s important here is the common perception people have of someone to whom that label is applied, and just as important, is who it is that applies the label. The common perception is that someone who is labeled a “conspiracy theorist” is suffering from some type of psychological disorder, and that label is usually applied to people by our government, and our news media. The next thing to consider, is that the label is applied to anyone who questions our government’s version of events in any matter. Doesn’t it logically follow that the media are teaching us to assume that anyone who questions the government is insane? When that label is applied to a person, doesn’t it become easy to dismiss everything they say without even hearing it? How convenient for them.

I think the label first became widely used to slander people who questioned the details surrounding the JFK assassination, and forty years later, there aren’t too many thinking people who still believe the Warren Commission’s “lone gunman” explanation. That explanation is doubted by everyone who has taken the time to look into the details, and believed only by people who refuse to.

Which is “theory” and which is fact? In the absence of a full confession, this can only be decided by a preponderance of evidence, and it would be silly to come to a conclusion on any matter without looking at all the evidence available. This is only common sense, just as it is safe to assume some degree of guilt or complicity on the part of anyone who lies about an event, or tries to hide, plant, or destroy any type of evidence.

Conspiracy theories arise from evidence. After the government releases an explanation of a particular event, a conspiracy theory is only born because evidence exists to disprove their explanation, or at least call it into question. There’s nothing insane about it, unless you define sanity as believing whatever the government tells you. In light of the fact that our government lies to us regularly, I would define believing everything they tell you as utter stupidity.

In July of 1996, flight 800 exploded over Long Island. Shortly after their terrorist explanation failed scrutiny, our government then explained the event by claiming that a faulty electrical system caused a spark that ignited a fuel tank, and the people who doubted this explanation were quickly labeled “conspiracy theorists.” More than a hundred witnesses saw a missile travel from the ground up to the plane just prior to its explosion, but rather than being treated as eyewitnesses to an event, they were labeled “conspiracy theorists,” which label allowed all subsequent investigation to ignore the strongest evidence in the matter.

Our “investigative” news agencies decided to accept and disseminate the official story, and they helped us forget the U.S. naval station nearby, the fact that missiles were regularly test fired there, and naturally, they paid no heed to more than a hundred “conspiracy theorists” who saw the plane get blown out of the sky by a missile. I believe that the U.S. Navy accidentally shot down flight 800, and that’s my belief because it’s the most sensible explanation that can be drawn from the available evidence. I’m not theorizing about conspiracies, but there are conflicting explanations of the event, and if the Navy did accidentally blow a passenger plane out of the sky, who would have a motive to lie about it? The U.S. government, or a hundred witnesses?

Then of course, there were the “crazy conspiracy theories” arising from the bombing of the Alfred Murrah federal building in Oklahoma City. In that matter, audio tapes and witnesses agree that there were two explosions, the first of which occurred inside the building between eight and ten seconds before the truck bomb exploded. Explosive experts agree that Timothy McVeigh’s fertilizer bomb could not have destroyed the building, and the FBI’s counter terrorism chief, and members of BATF lied about their whereabouts during and prior to the catastrophe. The evening news decided not to tell you any of this, and they will label anyone who tries to a “paranoid conspiracy theorist.” In light of the evidence, we would be complete fools if a conspiracy theory didn’t exist.

There were no conspiracy theories arising from the explosion of flight 103 over Lockerbie, Scotland, and there were no conspiracy theories arising from the work of the uni-bomber, so the newly invented psycho-babble that tries to explain the malady of conspiracy theorists, also needs to explain why millions of conspiracy theorists all decided not to theorize about those events. There is no psychological malady. There was simply no evidence to indicate a conspiracy.

The real question is not why people theorize about conspiracies, but why people choose to believe the government’s version of events when it’s obvious that they’re lying. One reason is that most people never see the evidence because our “news” industry hides it, and another reason is that the same news industry will quickly associate anyone who questions the government with the people who see Elvis, Bigfoot, and UFO’s.

But sadly, I think the main reason people choose to believe the government’s version of events despite overwhelming evidence to the contrary, is because it’s easier, and safer. If you ignore most of the evidence, and accept as plausible whatever ridiculous explanation the T.V. provides, your life remains simple, and you get to sit on your ass and watch more T.V. If on the other hand, you pluck your head from that same ass and realize you’ve been lied to, as a citizen in a democratic society, you’re instantly burdened with being responsible for doing something about it. Every citizen of the United States has a civic duty to participate in their government, and keep themselves informed of its actions, or government “of the people, by the people, and for the people” isn’t possible. You were warned that “eternal vigilance is the price of freedom, ” but you chose to ignore your government, and believe whatever they told you, and because of this, Americans have lost their freedom. Although presidents and senators are public servants, unlike the dog catcher and mailman, they wield a lot of power over people’s lives, and that’s why they have to be watched, and scrutinized.

Statistical analysts from UCLA and Rutgers University believe that John Kerry won the 2004 presidential election by an estimated 1.3 million votes, and despite the fact that these learned scholars are probably the most qualified people alive to forward such an opinion, our news madia dismisses this as “conspiracy theory.” George W. Bush lost the 2000 election, and he lost the 2004 election, but he’s occupying the White House, shredding our constitution, and stealing our wealth and freedom in a “war on terror” that’s as fraudulent as his presidency because many Americans are too stupid to see it, too lazy to do anything about it, or both.

I’m sorry if I sound angry, but the fact of the matter is that I am angry. While you were staring into the television like an idiot, our freedom, wealth, and constitutional protections have been stolen from us, and because you’re stupid enough to believe the manure being shoveled by our government, you’ve allowed them to commit bigger and more heinous crimes. Because you were too lazy to research their nonsensical economic policies, and see them for the scams that they are, we’ll all soon be living in poverty. And because you’re so lazy, apathetic, and easily lied to, millions have died for the profits of a few. I have every right to be angry, and only a fool wouldn’t be.

Only a small portion of my anger is reserved for the government of the United States, because they only did what can be expected of any government. They grabbed money, power and control where it was easy to do so. Most of my anger is directed toward my fellow American citizens, because they allowed it to happen by believing whatever they’re told, and not doing what’s expected of them. Patriotism in America does not mean waving the flag in blind loyalty to the government. As an American citizen, you have a civic duty to question your government, and hold them accountable for their actions, not use the flag as a blindfold. The American people have been duped once again, and it doesn’t seem like it’s a difficult thing to accomplish.

America’s latest “conspiracy nuts” are better known as the 9-11 truth movement. The news media are doing their usual job of slandering them with their usual childish name calling, but for more than three years, they have refused to show you the documented fact, scientific data, expert testimony, photographic evidence, or the credible eyewitness accounts that prove U.S. government complicity in the events of September, 11, 2001. If this were just a “crazy conspiracy theory,” I don’t think people in our government would have worked so hard to destroy, hide, and lie about the evidence. The White House tried to derail every investigation into the matter. If we had an honest government, we wouldn’t have conspiracy theories. We would have honest investigations, and fair trials, but these things are disappearing from America.

There are disturbing facts regarding the events of September 11 that every American needs to be aware of , but naturally, none of it will be on T.V. I’ve met a lot of people in the 9-11 truth movement, and I can assure you that none of them are crazy, paranoid, or even “conspiracy theorists.” One generalization I can make about them is that they all seem to be very intelligent. Maybe the smartest thing you could do would be to start listening to them. The Arabs don’t “hate your freedom.” The White House hates your freedom, because it’s the only thing that stands between them, and unlimited power. – Jolly Roger

“Eternal Vigilance is the Price of Freedom” – Thomas Jefferson

911truth.org 911review.org 911review.com physics911.org wtc7.net

Anything written by “Jolly Roger” is the property of the American Resistance Movement, and the author hereby grants permission to anyone who so desires to post, print, copy, or distribute this letter as they see fit, and in fact, the author encourages you to do so.

Source

Read more from Auricmedia:

[carousel-horizontal-posts-content-slider]

The Stanley Kubrick Conspiracy – Part 1: Tales from a Paper Moon

There is something about Stanley Kubrick and here’s a nice collection:

The Stanley Kubrick Conspiracy – Part 1: Tales from a Paper Moon

Science fiction’s portrayal of covered-up or faked space missions dates back many decades. In the February 1955 issue of “Galaxy Science Fiction” magazine, author James Gunn published a story entitled “The Cave of Night”. The story deals with a manned mission to Mars which goes awry, stranding an astronaut with no hope of rescue. The climax of the story is shocking, utilising the notion of fakery to portray an erroneous perception of the outcome of the mission. http://tangentonline.com/old-time-radio/1180-the-cave-of-night

The plot of the 1969 movie “Marooned” also involved a manned mission to the Moon going wrong – failure of a re-entry rocket leaves the occupants of the lunar capsule stranded in space. Although there is no cover-up inherent to the plot, the original script called for the “suggestion” that a story would be created to perpetuate the notion of a heroic attempt to rescue the astronauts, should they have perished. The film received full support from NASA, including the use of Cape Kennedy for interior and exterior location filming. http://www.debate.org/reference/marooned

“Capricorn One” (1978) went much further than “Marooned”, featuring a plot that utilised Hollywood trickery and gimmicks to fake the first manned space flight to Mars. In the film, the astronaut crew are removed from their rocket and driven to a film set in the desert to record fake footage of their planetary touchdown. Bizarrely, this film also received full support from NASA – which is strange given how NASA has generally avoided supporting Hollywood productions that cast the agency (or fictional agencies with a resemblance to NASA) in an unflattering light (see: NASA’s refusal to support Spielberg’s “Close Encounters of the Third Kind”). The film was directed by Peter Hyams, who would go on to helm “2010: The Year We Make Contact” (the sequel to Kubrick’s “2001: A Space Odyssey”) six years later. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Capricorn_One

 

The film “Sneakers” also featured a character (played by Dan Aykroyd) who mentions the Apollo cover-up – including “this LTX71 cancellable mike is part of the same system NASA used when they faked the Apollo moon landings.” http://www.groundzeromedia.org/the-shadow-of-kubricks-legacy/

More recently, the film “Apollo 18” used the ‘lost footage’ plot device (popularised by films like “The Blair Witch Project”) to posit the notion that NASA carried out secret manned missions to the Moon. In this case, the “Apollo 18” mission (involving NASA astronauts landing on the Moon in 1974) was covered-up following the discovery of an extra-terrestrial insect-like organism on the Moon – an organism that subsequently kills the “Apollo 18” astronauts. Interestingly, the film shows the astronauts discovering a dead cosmonaut (along with a Soviet landing module) on the lunar surface – suggesting that, like NASA, the Soviets were also conducting clandestine missions and cover-ups. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Apollo_18_(film)

The reality of this latter concept has been studied by a number of researchers and is known as the “Lost Cosmonaut” paradigm. Whilst the evidence of Soviet space cover-ups isn’t as obvious as that of NASA, at least one account has been evidentially verified. Valentin Bondarenko was a would-be cosmonaut whose death during training was covered-up for decades by the Soviet government. http://www.jamesoberg.com/usd10.html

In 1960, the science fiction author Robert Heinlein wrote an article for Pravda describing how (whilst in the Vilnius region of Soviet-occupied Lithuania, May 15, 1960) he was told a Red Army cadet that the USSR had launched a man into orbit that day. The account was denied by officials later the same day. Heinlein elaborated on the story in a speech he gave at the XIXth World Science Fiction Convention Seattle in 1961.

“A Russian cosmonaut is circling the Earth!’ All the other cadets nodded agreement to everything he said and sometimes added details. I congratulated them on their country’s wonderful scientific achievement–with a frozen smile and a sick feeling in my stomach. We talked a bit more about it, then they went on up the hill and we went down. That afternoon, we tried very hard to buy a copy of Pravda. None were available anywhere… We did listen to the Voice of Moscow–Mrs Heinlein told me that it did report the rocket–but just as one of the Sputnik, no mention of a passenger. That evening our guide joined us to go to the ballet–and she immediately told us that the cadet had been mistaken; it was not a rocket ship with a man in it–just a dummy. The cadet had misunderstood. Well, perhaps so… but, if so, then all those dozen or more cadets were mistaken exactly the same way.”http://web.archive.org/web/20090522083740/http://www.firearmsrights.com/rah1961.htm

Another science fiction luminary and who has expressed views about the Apollo cover-up is Canadian novelist Margaret Atwood. Atwood authored the dystopian novel “The Handmaid’s Tale” – a story that addressed such concepts as population reduction, female fertility and ecological disaster. In a 2009 interview, Atwood questioned the technology of the 1960s, why man hasn’t landed on the Moon again, and mentioned the shadow discrepancies as well as the radiation belts.http://fullcomment.nationalpost.com/2010/09/23/margaret-atwoods-just-wondering-about-that-silly-moon-landing-hoax/

Perhaps the most unusual (non-science fiction) movie to allude to the Apollo cover-up is the James Bond film “Diamonds Are Forever” (1971). “While investigating multimillionaire recluse Willard Whyte’s Tectronics Space Centre outside Las Vegas in the Nevada desert, his cover blown, James Bond (Sean Connery) finds it necessary to make a hasty exit. Finding himself in an artificial moonscape complete with trainee astronauts, Bond dashes for a nearby Moon Buggy vehicle and crashes out of the centre and into one of the 007 films’ most famous chase scenes.” http://www.007magazine.co.uk/moonbuggy/moon_buggy.htm

Although I am slightly digressing for a moment, it is worth noting the larger esoteric significance of James Bond. Bond’s creator Ian Flemming has a documented connection with the British Intelligence Community, which in turn has connections with the occult – remember that the occult also appears to have been prevalent in agencies like NASA. Bond’s roots lie with John Dee – a sixteenth century mathematician, astronomer and navigator. Dee was an imperialist and devoted consort of Queen Elizabeth I. He was a student of philosophy, alchemy, divination, the occult and an associated freemason. He was also instrumental in the then-version of what we would now call MI5 and his code-name was 007! John Dee was Ian Fleming’s inspiration for James Bond. http://www.examiner.com/article/john-dee-007

Many of the designs on “Diamonds Are Forever” were conceptualised by Oscar-winning Production Designer Ken Adam. Adam was born into a German Jewish family that fled the Nazi Regime in 1934 to settle in England. Adam was a close friend of the legendary filmmaker Stanley Kubrick and worked on many of his films (he famously designed the “War Room” set featured in “Dr Strangelove”), with one notable exception: “2001: A Space Odyssey”. Adam once described how he was asked by Kubrick to join the production of the film. “I found out that he had been working with experts from NASA for a year on space exploration and all that sort of thing. And the moment I saw that, I thought, not for me. Because I could only function properly with this very powerful computer-like brain of Stanley by knowing as much visually about the subject matter as he did, because then I could justify departing from the visual reality that he knows.” http://www.telegraph.co.uk/culture/film/3561380/Ken-Adam-the-man-who-drew-the-Cold-War.html

 

Kubrick is often cited as the likeliest candidate to have filmed fake footage of the Apollo 11 Moon landing. Some researchers have suggested that a deal was struck between Kubrick and certain agenda players sometime in the mid/late 1960s. It is known that the production history of “2001: A Space Odyssey” overlapped the era of NASA’s Apollo program and that NASA collaborated extensively with the film’s production team. The film was released in 1968, over a year before the Apollo 11 mission. The film’s narrative also featured a cover-up (a story is perpetuated about the spread of a fictitious virus, prompting a quarantine of a lunar base) to hide the discovery of an extra-terrestrial artefact – the Tycho Monolith – on the Moon, and a subsequent mission to the planet Jupiter with a “secret” agenda.

In 1997, a number of “Apollo Hoax” researchers appeared as guests on Jon Ronson’s Channel 4 discussion show “For the Love of Lunar Conspiracies”. The show was one of a series that “examined” subjects often attributed to the hidden-global-agenda players. The guests on this episode were David Percy, Mary Bennett, Barry Reynolds, Matthew Williams, Andy Thomas and Marcus Allen. The guests predominantly discussed the then-prevailing evidence of a cover-up. At one point, Percy discussed the scene in the Bond film “Diamonds Are Forever”. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=75I_6uPtZCg

Percy: “It’s a James Bond movie and people say ‘what’s that scene doing in there!?’ He walks into this lab and they’re going to the Moon and he says, ‘I’ve come to inspect your radiation shields!’ The next thing he does, he walks out of the lab into a Moon set with astronauts poncing around and phoney backgrounds to it…”
Bennett: “…And a studio above it”
Percy: “That’s right. A complete studio… (Inaudible) he’s being chased out of the set. So you have a connection in a James Bond movie of a lunar set and a statement just prior to it: ‘I’ve come to inspect your radiation shield!’ Isn’t that interesting?”
Ronson: “And these movies were made for a purpose then?”
Bennett: “Well the… certainly all movies are made for a purpose. One is to entertain; two is to make money… or possibly the other way around. One is the product of the other.”
Ronson: “Or are they also made for a slightly more sinister purpose?”

Bennett: “I don’t think James Bond is made for a sinister purpose. I think we have a, erm… possibly… there’s a zeitgeist in artists that they’re going to pick up the general energy of what’s going on and scriptwriters who are very close to the edge of things are going to incorporate it in all work, as anybody does – a painter, writer, whatever. They’re caring about things and, as you know, in repressive societies you can get a lot said in fiction or in entertainment that you can’t actually say straight out. And just because America is not labelled a communist society, it doesn’t mean to say that it’s a democracy either.”
Percy: “But, in some cases, you can have a situation where things are done to confuse…”

The conversation quickly turns into a discussion of Hollywood’s perception management of the ET/UFO subject and no further mention of the lunar fakery subject in movies is made.  It is interesting that there is no mention made of Stanley Kubrick throughout the discussion. Given the nature of the subject, I am surprised his name wasn’t mentioned at least once. It is possible that Kubrick’s possible involvement was discussed, but never made the final edit. Alternative knowledge researchers who have participated in “conspiracy hit-pieces” for the mainstream media have regularly described how they have been, on occasion, interviewed for several hours – with only a few minutes of the interview footage ultimately being used in the final edit.

 

However, Jon Ronson is a life-long fan of Kubrick; he has written numerous pieces about the filmmaker. He even conducted an interview with Kubrick’s widow, Christiane, for an article published in The Guardian newspaper in 2010.
“After Stanley Kubrick” by Jon Ronson (Guardian.co.uk – Wed 18 Aug 2010) http://www.theguardian.com/film/2010/aug/18/stanley-kubrick-christiane

Interestingly, researcher and host of the popular “Richplanet TV” show, Richard D. Hall, has alleged that Ronson may be connected to, or an asset of, the British intelligence establishment. Here is a quote from his article “MI5 Exposed”:

“Ronson is another close associate of John Lundberg who runs Jon Ronson’s website. Ronson is the author of ‘The Men Who Stare at Goats’ and producer of many UK television programmes which have essentially debunked people like David Icke and Alex Jones. If there is going to be a mainstream documentary about an “alternative view”, it is often given to Ronson because he’ll make sure that truth and objectivity are the last things on the agenda. His recent book ‘The Men Who Stare at Goats’ is quoted by Colonel John Alexander, who the book is about, as being ‘based on about 5% reality and 95% hokum’, yet this hokum was made into a Hollywood film which therefore makes the film another piece of disinformation. Ronson’s close association with John Lundberg, along with the complete lack of truth seeking in both his writing and programme making makes us believe that Ronson is part of the MI5 psy-ops operation.” http://www.richplanet.net/detail.php?dbindex=209

It is possible that the reason why Kubrick’s alleged connection with the Apollo Hoax wasn’t discussed in Ronson’s show was because there was next to no awareness of the possibility in 1997. Whilst researching the “Kubrick connection”, I have attempted to identify who originated the story and when it first became publicly known. This has been incredibly difficult. I have watched, listened to and read as much material relating to Kubrick as I can lay my hands on. Although Kubrick’s knowledge of esoteric, alchemical and occult subjects (and the allusions, made to these subjects, in his films) has been examined for several decades, there appears to be no mention of Kubrick in relation to the Apollo cover-up prior to the mid/late 1990s… at least as far as I am currently aware of. It is possible that Percy, Bennett, et al, were unaware of the connection in 1997.

In Part 2, I will examine the origins of the Kubrick / Apollo Hoax paradigm…
Stay tuned folks!

http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/01/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-1.html
http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/01/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-2.html
http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/01/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-3.html
http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/02/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-4.html
http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/02/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-5.html
http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/02/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-6.html
http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/02/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-7.html
http://thetruthseekersguide.blogspot.co.uk/2014/02/the-stanley-kubrick-conspiracy-part-8.html

Source

The Titanic Sinking – Rothschild and Rockefeller Conspiracy

Some interesting info about Titanic and how it all could have been staged like 911:

In October 1910, a group of seven men, all senior players in the Rothschild and Rockefeller financial dynasties, met in strict secrecy on a private island off the coast of Georgia, USA. Their brief was to create an organisation to usurp the power to create and print money, until then solely a function of the US government. This organisation was to be named ‘The Federal Reserve Bank’. This plan however, had several extremely powerful, high-profile opponents who stood in the way of these banker’s goals.

In the meantime, John Pierpoint (JP) Morgan, another American high-financier, involved in the Federal Reserve scheme, who also happened to own the British-based White Star shipping line, had commissioned a series of ‘super-liners’, the Olympic class, in an attempt to gain the lion’s share of the highly lucrative Atlantic-crossing market. The speculative investment involved in this project was immense.

However, in September 1911, before the second one of the planned three ‘sisters’, RMS Titanic had been completed, Morgan’s plans were dealt a massive financial blow when RMS Olympic, the first of the ‘sister’ ships off the production line was involved in a disastrous collision with a Royal Navy cruiser, HMS Hawke.

And so, the scene was set for one of the greatest deceptions ever perpetrated… in the 100th anniversary year, John presents information and evidence that seriously questions the official account in the history books.

“Organic Robotoids are real” by Dr Peter Beter, clones and synthetic people

This is very a fascinating, but hard topic and if it’s true it explains many things in the world. I try to collect information from different sources, but the best source is Dr. Peter Beter’s audio letters. That is the reason I have posted them before, but now I leap to these letters, which include these organic robotoids. But if you want to learn the BIG PICTURE unfortunately you have to listen all Dr. Peter Beter’s audio letters:

Dr Beter Talks on how the Organic Robotoids are real, how the Russian Scientists stumbled upon the organic robotoids by pure accident, how they look like us and how they have now infiltrated the U.S..

 

 

 

There is a tons of information about these robotoids in Dr. Peter’s letters on this site: http://www.peterdavidbeter.com/

If I remember correctly the Robotoid stuff in Peter Beter’s audio letters begins on number 45 and then Dr. Beter tells about these almost every letter after that.

Then I list some information about these clones and synthetics:

What if you were to discover that certain individuals in government, corporations, military, academia, media, and the alternative research community are either reprogrammed versions of their former selves or artificial beings entirely? What if you learned these were under the complete control of covert forces possessing a vested interest in manipulating society?

>> Human Simulacra (Source)

>> Doubles, Robotoids and replicas

>> Doppelgängers/Doubles

>> Is Sylvester Stallone cloned?

>> “Synthetic people”, “bio-androids” and “robotoids” may be walking among us.

>> ARE US PRESIDENTS CLONED?

>> APPENDIX 3. CLONES, SYNTHETICS, ORGANIC ROBOTOIDS AND DOUBLES

>> Are Synthetic Humans walking amongst us? are they being used in public arena’s to control the population? is this youtube science fiction or reality?

 


Then some Videos about this topic:

 

And then some Nicki’s weird performances like the “double” is in malfunction or something. And if you search more about this topic, it is the main characteristic of a clone, that it doesn’t work properly and it may start to malfunction over time:

 

 

Here some robotoid collapses on live TV-Show:

 

And then we have a conspiracy, that Eminem is cloned and here the clone is malfunctioning on live TV-Show:

 

 


 

And then we have couple of videos about how celebrities have been cloned and some of them have lived before in our history:

DYSLEXIC !!!! … like it was in the beginning, it shall be in the end…VIDEOS —- former government insider George Green talks about cloning of presidents…that they started to clone humans around 1930 – http://youtu.be/cCD6dk2OtK8 …….. Obama Sees Self In Egyptian -Pyramid – http://youtu.be/a5-rRA-jV0k …… this is where i found the cloning stuff of obama – http://youtu.be/kQdfT3gKrD8 …The Government Are Cloning Humans and Themselves!- They’re All ZOMBIES – made by a woman that was ten years in the illuminati industry- http://youtu.be/SZhRaLhU6Zs ….Michael Jackson – Remember The Time music video — http://youtu.be/LeiFF0gvqcc ……Ancient Egyptian Michael Jackson statue– http://youtu.be/9ZJYqdLj3Bk … paul is dead documentary part 1 of 7 -. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5F-t8B… …. ONE OF THE MOST CRAZIEST ANCIENT TABLETS IN THE WORLD!! —- http://youtu.be/sxllptqVSYk

 

 

 

Then I post just some movies about cloning & robotoids, because Illuminati wants to hide things in the movies:

>> Futureworld (1976)

>> Body Snatchers (1993)

>> The 6th Day (2000) : This is actually pretty close to the process, that Dr. Peter Beter tells about. How they take “Hologram photography” of your brain and the plant it into the clone.

Hard topic to comprehend, but I think, that the technology is there so this could be possible.

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #24

Audio letter No. 24

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC., Box 16428, Ft.
Worth, Texas 76133.

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is May 28, 1977
and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 24.  This issue concludes
the second year of the Audio-letter.  But only if we are blessed
by a true miracle, will the third year ever be completed, because
as I speak to you today a tragedy has already been set in motion
that is beyond human comprehension.  Not since last July and
August, 1976 when the Soviet Union began planting underwater
bombs and missiles in our own territorial waters has the
situation been so grave and urgent as it is now.  For that reason
I will dispense with any further introduction today in order to
discuss these three topics: Topic #1--The Fall of Babylon
Revisited; Topic #2--The Handwriting On The Wall For America; and
Topic #3--WATER, THE ULTIMATE WEAPON.

Topic #1--We live today in a world that grows more complex and
more confusing with each passing day, but in spite of that we
Americans are fond of praising ourselves for the great man-made
wonders of our age.  And whenever the obvious dangers to our
continued existence as a nation prey on our minds, we are always
reminded that we, the great United States, have already survived
fully two centuries since our Republic was founded.  And scarcely
a day goes by that we are not reassured by our rulers, elected
and otherwise, that we are the mightiest nation on earth.  Our
technology, we are told day in and day out, is so wonderful that
it is impossible that any other nation on earth, especially the
poor, backward Soviet Union, might surpass us in any important
way.  In other words, we are technologically impregnable.  And
lest we become prematurely concerned over the impact of the
recent radical changes in our weather, certain news reports
recently have told incredible lies to the effect that the United
States has a two-year surplus of grains in our storage bins.  In
all of this, the behavior of the United States today is like that
of countless civilizations before us--just before they perished. 
And in some respects the greatest similarity of all is with that
of ancient Babylon just before its abrupt fall from power.  The
origins of the United States, unlike Babylon, were strongly moral
and spiritual in content, and the system of government set forth
in the United States Constitution, which freed men in a way
unparalleled in human history, was conceived by men who
understood man's place within God's creation.  This heritage
still lives today in the hearts of many Americans, but it's
rapidly being snuffed out under the bondage of rulers who are
superimposing the pattern of ancient Babylon on our beloved land. 
The Babylonian pattern is totally evil, and those who choose to
bow down to such Satanic rule thereby make themselves part of it. 
The origins of ancient Babylon are lost in the midst of time,
perhaps 5,000 years ago, but it reached its peak around 600 B.C.,
at which time it was undisputed as the most powerful empire the
world had ever seen.  The City of Babylon was the Rome of its
day, the most important trading center, the most powerful
military force, the greatest cultural influence, and even a
center of tourism because of its remarkable hanging gardens and
other man-made wonders.  The huge city of Babylon was surrounded
by city walls so high and so thick that they were impregnable by
any military technology of that day; and inside the city there
was a two-year supply of food, making any attempted siege against
Babylon unattractive.  And there was no lack of water either,
because no less than the mighty river Euphrates ran through the
city.  Yes, Babylon was powerful, wealthy, and so secure in
material terms that potential adversaries were hardly even taken
seriously.  Even when it became clear that the increasingly
powerful joint empire of the Medes and the Persians had designs
on Babylon, there was no real concern.  With all their means of
protection against invasion and their unrivaled prosperity, the
Babylonian attitude was simply "It couldn't happen here."  And so
when the Medo-Persian army of Cyrus and Darius laid siege to
Babylon, the only response of the ruler of Babylon was
debauchery, feasting, drunkenness, and mocking any real power
greater than himself.  At this point, we're told, the Babylonian
feast was interrupted by the appearance of a hand in midair
writing words on the wall that said Babylon's rule was at an end,
that its ruler had been weighed in the balances and found
wanting, and that the kingdom would be divided and given to the
Medes and Persians.  The handwriting on the wall said the
impossible was about to happen--Babylon, the impregnable city,
was about to fall--How could this be?  No one in Babylon had ever
had experience with invasion and so could not imagine such a
thing; and yet, within a few short hours, before the drunken
feast even ended, the impossible happened.  First, the water
level in the mighty Euphrates river, flowing through the middle
of Babylon, started dropping rapidly.  It dwindled to a trickle,
and soon stopped altogether.  Cyrus, the Persian, had worked out
of sight of Babylon and had diverted the Euphrates out of its
normal channel.  Now the great impregnable walls of Babylon were
left with huge openings--namely, the river bed no longer filled
with water, and in marched the Medo-Persian army, conquering
Babylon without resistance.  And today, the United States is
under siege by the Soviet Union with the cooperation from within
of quislings.  We are threatened by the joint Rockefeller/ Soviet
empire just as Babylon was besieged by the joint Medo-Persian
empire.  And now, as then, we are told there is nothing to worry
about, "It just couldn't happen here."  But, my friends, just as
happened in ancient Babylon, the handwriting is now on the wall
for America.  The America we know today is a perversion of the
pattern originally laid down for our beloved land, and America as
we know it is about to come to an end.  And as with ancient
Babylon, WATER is our Achilles heel and the means by which we are
to be reduced to surrender without a fight.

Topic #2--Not long ago the Carter administration's Ambassador to
the United Nations, Andy Young, made the remarkable statement
that: "Communism has never been a threat to me."  He also has a
habit of patting Cuba on the back for the so-called 'stabilizing
influence' of Cuban troops in Africa, and otherwise has
repeatedly shown a very amiable attitude toward World Communism. 
Many Americans have wondered why Andy Young is allowed to go on
saying such things without being restrained in any way by Jimmy
Carter.  But Carter has now answered that, in a major foreign
policy speech given at the University of Notre Dame on May 22,
1977.  This speech is as important as the famous Iron Curtain
Speech of Sir Winston Churchill a generation ago at Fulton,
Missouri.  White House aides stated that the Carter speech at
Notre Dame was specifically intended to "send some messages to
foreign governments"--and it did.  The foreign press is filled
with headlines about the major turn that has just been taken in
American foreign policy.  Yet, here at home, many Americans have
not grasped what has happened.  The most basic theme of that
Carter speech is an elaborate echo of Andy Young's statement,
that is: "We are no longer afraid of Communism."  Is this because
Communism is withering and dying?  One need only look at a map to
see how fast Communism is eating up the world.  What Jimmy Carter
is telling us and the world, is 'We can get along with
Communism'; and just to prove it, one of America's most
important, efficient intelligence operations to keep an eye on
Soviet naval movements and other important matters is being
closed down.  This intelligence unit, known as Task Force 157 and
run by the United States Navy, has a budget of well under 1/10 of
1% of that of the CIA, and yet it is being shut down--supposedly
for budgetary reason.  Meanwhile the signs of war to come are all
around us.  So great are the dangers facing us that military men
are speaking up in increasing numbers in an effort to warn
America before disaster arrives.  Since they are subject to
military law and subordinate to civilians who do not want them to
speak up, it's no small thing to speak out in this way.  So,
consider what Major General John K. Singlaub said in an interview
on May 19, 1977.  General Singlaub, the third-ranking U.S. Army
General in Korea said: "If we withdraw our ground forces on the
schedule suggested, it will lead to war."  And why did General
Singlaub speak up?  His answer was: "The question asked after
United States setbacks in Korea and Vietnam was: 'Did the
military people in the know express themselves loudly and clearly
enough that the decision-makers understood?'  We want to make
sure."  In speaking this way, General Singlaub was doing no more
than expressing the consensus of practically every knowledgeable
military man about the Korean situation.  For example, the same
Washington Post article that quoted General Singlaub also quoted
another headquarters Army officer in Korea as saying about the
Carter plan to withdraw our troops: "I don't know anybody who is
not staggered by it.  There's no military or strategic logic for
withdrawal."  The plan to withdraw from South Korea, in other
words, is strictly political--in line with the newly-announced
American foreign policy that it is no longer afraid of Communism. 
The reason General Singlaub's words had such an impact in this
country is that his name was attached to his warnings.  The words
I just quoted from the other anonymous Army Officer are just as
startling as what General Singlaub said.  But people will just
read those words once, frown, and then forget about it.  But
everyone knows about General Singlaub's warnings because,
deliberately or otherwise, he allowed himself to be identified as
the source of the warnings; and, for daring to warn us, he was
promptly relieved of his Korean command by Jimmy Carter.  The
situation in Korea illustrates the direction in which events are
now moving, but other events are due to occur long before the
pullout of our troops from South Korea.  The real threat to our
security is no longer in Korea or in Europe but right here in our
own backyard.

   Another military man who is actively trying to warn America is
Major General George Keegan, who retired at the beginning of this
year as Chief of Air Force Intelligence.  General Keegan is one
of the West's greatest intelligence analysts, and the story he
has to tell should be continuous headline news throughout our
nation.  General Keegan has been speaking on radio and television
talk shows, giving speeches, accepting interviews--in short,
using every channel open to him in an effort to wake up America
before it is too late.  One of his most comprehensive and
important speeches was the one delivered on March 11, 1977, at a
press conference sponsored by the American Security Council here
in Washington, D.C.  To find out in more detail what General
Keegan had to say, I would urge every American to obtain a copy
of that speech.  Write to the American Security Council, Boston,
Va., 22713 for information.  It was published as the April 1977
Washington Report of the American Security Council.

   We're frequently told by syndicated columnists that the CIA is
our first line of defense, but General Keegan said in his speech:
"The ultimate function of a nation's intelligence is to render
carefully assessed judgments and forecasts regarding the threat. 
When I look back upon my experience with this nation's highest
estimating body, I have the impression of having taken part in a
Charles Dickens novel.  The sense of make-believe and unreality
has to be experienced to be believed."  Further on he says: "The
intelligence estimators, heavily dominated by the CIA and the
State Department, have been wrong about Soviet purposes in
pursuing detente.  They have been shockingly deficient in their
estimates of the risks and the advantages to the United States
and the free world of the so-called technology exchange with the
Soviet Union."  And he adds: "If there has been a Watergate in
this country, and there has been, but ignored, it has been in the
monumentally incompetent judgmental processes of this government
regarding the nature, character, and growth of the Soviet threat
as it has evolved from year to year."  General Keegan goes on to
make crystal clear that the deficiencies in our intelligence
estimates are not due to any lack of our ability to collect
information or to analyze it technically.  The problem, instead,
has to do with what is done with that information.  To begin
with, the intelligence estimation process at the highest levels
in America today is not objective, but is manipulated to fit
political purposes.  In General Keegan's words, and I quote: "The
United States intelligence estimative process cannot be
understood unless it is first appreciated that national
intelligence estimates must perform three functions.  First, they
must support the decisions of the President, both for the record
of history and for the avoidance of impeachment.  Second, they
must substantiate or help to justify the decisions of the White
House 'Office of Management and Budget.'  Finally, the
intelligence estimates must, whatever other purpose they may
serve, rationalize the foreign security policy initiatives of the
Secretary of State."  Continuing, General Keegan says: "I
appreciate that those are extremely important allegations to
make, but I submit to you today that it is not possible to
understand the workings of the United States intelligence
community unless one is willing to open his mind to the influence
of those three factors."  This situation is illustrated vividly
by General Keegan's discussion of the controversy over the Soviet
Back-Fire Bomber.  As I've told you for many months, the
Supersonic Back-Fire is an inter-continental strategic bomber,
capable of striking the United States with nuclear weapons. 
General Keegan says: "The central issue all along has been
whether this bomber posed a threat to the United States.  The
Soviets argued that it did not, and the CIA and State Department
rather consistently accepted the Soviet point of view."  General
Keegan proceeded to acquire analysis of the Back-Fire's
capability from "the most competent analysts in the free world." 
The available intelligence information was provided to three
American aircraft companies with experience building strategic
bombers--plus, for good measure, the Royal Air Force and the
Royal Aircraft establishment in England--and the results: "every
single one of these organizations independently agreed that the
Back-Fire had an intercontinental capability.  Yet my word was
not good enough, nor was that of the American and British
heavy-bomber designers and builders.  CIA and State chose to
believe the Soviets."  General Keegan is not in a position to
express it this way, my friends, but his description of the
Back-Fire controversy illustrates what I've been trying to tell
you over the months--that the Rockefeller cartel has more faith
in the Soviet Union than in our own United States.  Finally,
General Keegan explains, the sheer weight of analysis made it
more and more apparent that the Back-Fire was truly
intercontinental: "however, CIA and State now judged that the
Soviet Union had no intention of using the Back-Fire as an
intercontinental bomber"--this in spite of the fact that the
second model of the Back-Fire has been given even greater range. 
The history of the Back-Fire controversy up to this point is very
disgraceful, and still generally unknown to the American people. 
But listen now to the final chapter in General Keegan's words,
and I quote: "Seemingly undaunted by the most extensive analysis
of a foreign bomber ever performed in the United States, the CIA,
in one final, super-secret, uncoordinated effort, proceeded over
a period of 18 months to undertake an analysis designed to prove
that the Back-Fire Bomber could not reach the United States. 
This effort, in which small bits and pieces of controlled
information were provided to McDonnell-Douglas Aircraft, designer
and builder of fighters, represents one of the most artful
contrivances I have ever observed.  It is one which I suspect may
have been designed to salvage a SALT accord.  Finally, when the
CIA surprised everyone by surfacing its new analysis, months of
painful and extensive analysis were required to show that the
books had been rigged.  Artificially high G-loadings had been
assigned to the design of the Back-Fire along with excessive
engine-drag and other factors which were designed to reduce
range."  And this, my friends, is how our so-called first line of
defense, the CIA, looks after America's national security to the
tune of over twenty billion dollars a year.

   Elsewhere in his talk General Keegan also spells out the
dangerous manner in which our military intelligence capabilities
have been progressively over-centralized, compartmentalized, and
taken over by civilians "who understand little about the horrors
of war--and these are people who understand even less about
military doctrine, strategy, and weapons."  The product of all
these trends described by General Keegan is the very intelligence
gap that I discussed with General George S. Brown, Chairman of
the Joint Chiefs of Staff, when I met with him last September
(1976).  For years General Keegan has tried in vain to obtain a
series of post-mortem audits on the predictive and estimative
record of the United States intelligence community.  The audit
would be performed by qualified but disinterested outsiders with
no links to the intelligence community so that their work would
be unbiased.  Quoting General Keegan again: "Such audits would
record scrupulously where we had been wrong, where we had been
right, where we had fallen short of the mark or where we had
exaggerated.  Yet, every such suggestion had been met with
disdain and has been resisted in the most resounding vocal and
emotional way."  He might as well have asked for an honest audit
of Fort Knox.

   General Keegan's speech contains many more things than there
is time to discuss in this tape, and they're all important.  He
reveals many things about the military capabilities of both the
Soviet Union and the United States that you will never hear
through the usual news channels, but they all boil down to just
two major conclusions, backed up by many, many facts.  One
conclusion is that Soviet military capabilities vastly exceed
what we are being led to believe, both in terms of quantity and
quality.  The other conclusion is that the Soviet Union is firmly
convinced that a nation can fight a nuclear war and continue
afterward as a functioning society; and based on that conclusion
from a Soviet study undertaken after World War II, the Soviet
Union has for more than 20 years been preparing militarily to
fight and win a nuclear war.  The American approach, on the other
hand, is only to deter such a war, even though General Keegan
says: "I am unaware of a single definitive effort ever conducted
by the United States to determine precisely and in great detail
what it would take to deter."

   General Keegan also explains another very important
principle--it has to do with official judgments of the strategic
balance and carries over into public pronouncements by the
Pentagon.  This is the tacit rule requiring the use of so-called
'agreed national intelligence.'  Says General Keegan: "Agreed
national intelligence is derived by committee, contains little
that is controversial except in some footnote or dissent; and it
rarely contains meaningful reference to the dynamics of strategic
competition in terms of the new weapons, new forces, and new
capabilities being evolved by the Soviet Union."  Thus, whatever
new threats are involved, whether it be the awesome particle beam
weapon warned about by General Keegan or the Soviet underwater
missiles I've been warning about for nearly a year, Pentagon
disclaimers dare not be accepted at face value today without
challenge.  Those who accept these denials are playing straight
into the hands of our nation's deadliest enemies.

   Meanwhile the build-up toward the start of Nuclear War One is
gaining momentum.  Two months ago Nelson Rockefeller visited
Israel to help speed up the preparations for a Middle East war. 
By mid April, Israeli troops had begun massive maneuvers in the
Sinai with live ammunition, Reserves had been called up, and
Egyptian maneuvers were soon underway as well in the western
Sinai.  These maneuvers, headline news in Europe and Britain,
have gone unmentioned in the United States except for the crash
in the Sinai of a huge helicopter killing 56 Israeli soldiers. 
Then just a few days ago the extremists came to power by way of
the recent Israeli elections.  The Middle East is now a powder
keg as a result, and the Carter administration is rapidly
disengaging and disassociating itself from Israel.  So, when the
nuclear strike from the Sinai against Arab oil wells takes place,
it will not be recognized by the world or by most Americans for
what it really is.  Perhaps General Keegan was also right about
one other thing he said in his speech: "We have reached a point
in America where I believe we are almost incapable, culturally,
of being warned."  If so, my friends, it is we, the United States
of America, who will have been weighed in the balances and found
wanting, like ancient Babylon.

Topic #3--When the sun came up on southeastern Idaho one day
almost a year ago, it looked like the start of just another
beautiful late spring day.  It was Saturday, and two fishermen
were looking forward to a relaxing day in the shadow of the new
Teton Dam.  The Dam, over 300 feet high, had been completed the
previous fall except for a few finishing touches that remained,
and had been gradually filling up with water during the winter. 
Now, due to the run-off of melting snow in the mountains, it was
almost full.  Further down stream from the dam, tens of thousands
of people were going about their business.  Some puttered around
their houses doing weekend chores, while others were at work at
businesses or on farms; but for the construction crew who arrived
for work on the Teton Dam site that morning of June 5, 1976, it
was a different story.  At about 7:30 A.M. it was discovered that
a sizeable leak had sprung, not through the dam itself but
through the section of mountain on one side where the dam was
anchored.  This was reported immediately to the proper
authorities, who directed that steps be taken immediately to
start lowering the water level behind the Dam.  Why the leak had
appeared so suddenly was a puzzle, since inspection of the Dam by
personnel around nine o'clock the previous evening had turned up
nothing wrong.  But there was no time to solve this puzzle,
because soon a second leak developed.  Like the first, this
second leak also appeared to break through the anchoring mountain
side rather than the Dam itself.  Now the situation began to
deteriorate at an alarming rate.  Soon a leak found its way
through the earthen dam itself, and a growing torrent of water
gushed from it.  Two bulldozers raced to that location to try to
stop the flow by moving more earth into position, but the leak
grew so fast that the bulldozers were lost, the operators leaping
and scrambling to safety barely in time to save themselves.  Like
a nightmare come true, the Teton Dam crumbled, collapsed, and
released tons of water into the valley below.  The day ended
abruptly in tragedy for the two fishermen, and others who lost
their lives as well.  For two days, flood waters from that ruined
dam continued to spread, ultimately covering an area of 300
square miles including several towns and 50,000 acres of farm
land.  One of the major purposes of the Teton Dam, like many
others around our country, had been flood control.  Now the
man-made flood unleashed by the collapsed dam had caused damage
estimated to be in the range of $350- to $500,000,000 in addition
to the loss of life.  The bursting of the Teton Dam provided
America with a preview, on a very small scale, of what the Soviet
Union plans to do to our entire country.

   Last month in Audioletter No. 23 I reported hard intelligence
I had received to the effect that 21 major lakes and dams in 10
western states have hydrogen Soviet bombs planted in them.  But
the information I gave you then, my friends, was only the
beginning.  Since recording Audioletter No. 23, I have been under
an avalanche of ongoing intelligence reports concerning the
ongoing Soviet program of planting nuclear weapons in our inland
lakes and reservoirs.  I can now reveal that this Soviet program
began at a relatively slow, careful pace as much as 18 months
ago.  For example, a Soviet nuclear device was planted over a
year ago at a dam known as the Dalles on the Columbia River east
of Portland, Oregon, and it is still there now.  The Teton Dam
disaster appeared to be just a great big accident, but it brought
to everyone's attention the fact that dams can be made to
collapse under certain conditions and that the consequences are
devastating.  Meanwhile the border of Idaho with Canada has
become an important entry point for Soviet agents who are
bringing nuclear bombs into this country.  On Monday May 16, I
received an alert from my intelligence sources that Soviet agents
were at that time in the process of transporting nuclear weapons
into the northern United States by truck through several entry
portals along the Canadian border.  The greatest focus of that
activity was at the Idaho entry points of Porthill and Eastport. 
For the next several days I was in frequent contact with my
intelligence contacts in Canada who were taking very definite
action to find and stop these Soviet intruders; but here in the
United States our attention is being focused on our border with
Mexico by the manufactured distraction of illegal immigrants.  At
the same time, we are undergoing a wholesale invasion along our
border with Canada by the Soviet Union and not one thing is being
done about it by the United States.  By late that first day, May
16, at least 16 Soviet vehicles carrying nuclear weapons were
known to have crossed into the United States from Canada through
entry portals into Idaho and Montana; meanwhile 7 more were on
Canadian Highway 3 from Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada,
heading toward Porthill and Eastport, Idaho, to enter the United
States.  By that time the origination point in the Vancouver area
had been narrowed down to a barge in Horseshoe Bay.  The
Canadians took care of the situation on their side of the border
by stopping and inspecting trucks in the appropriate area, and by
early May 18 all seven trucks driven by Soviet agents had been
stopped and rounded up just short of the border.  At that point,
however, their next step was to wait for further instructions
from Ottawa, and I have not yet been informed as to what further
action was taken.  Meanwhile the only public hint of what was
going on was contained in a short item printed in Vancouver
newspapers on May 19.  It stated that trucks were being stopped
and searched along Route 3, but did not give the reason.  For my
Canadian friends, now you know!  But it was a different and sad
story here in the United States.

   The Federal government is taking no action whatsoever, proving
that there is a continuing collusion between the Rockefeller
empire and the Soviet empire.  At the State level, one would hope
that the chances of obtaining action would be a little better,
but so far that has not been the case.  Concerned citizens who
have tried to bring my warnings to the attention of their
Governors and other high State officials have encountered
basically two reactions--one is that "This is something for the
Federal government, so we'll refer it to them"; and of course
there it ends.  The other main response is to the effect:
"Naturally even if we did find a bomb in the lake next to the
dam, we would not make it public--after all, we don't want to
excite the people."  But, my friends, that is like an air raid
warden refusing to turn on the siren during an attack because it
might frighten people.  At the local level though, one would hope
that some action could still be expected, but No; during the
period of May 16 I tried in every possible way to get local and
state police in northern Idaho to simply check out some very
specific reports I had been given, but to no avail.  Several
Soviet trucks were known to be heading southward in northern
Idaho toward the town of Sandpoint, and I was informed of the
approximate positions where it should have been possible to
intercept them on the highway; but when I relayed these reports
to State and local police in the area, both directly and through
a brave local citizen in that area, it turned out to be
impossible to persuade them to take action.  As one police
sergeant told me, "We're wondering why the Federal government
hasn't stepped in on this."  And since they had not, even after
being notified, the assumption was that there must not be
anything to it, therefore it was not even going to be
investigated.  And so there, my friends, is a part of the
handwriting on the wall for America.

   Most all Americans have been tricked into accepting the idea
that only the Federal government counts or is able to do
anything, even though this idea is totally alien to our Republic
as originally founded.  All the Federal government has to do is
not act or to remain silent about a matter, such as Soviet
missiles in our waters, and people conveniently leap to the
conclusion that there must not be any missiles.  As General
Keegan says, we're becoming incapable of being warned; and, my
friends, if we don't snap out of it, we will suffer horribly. 
The fact that something was afoot in the area of our nation's
water supplies should have been realized four years ago when
Nelson Rockefeller started his "National Commission on Water
Quality."  This he started at the same time as his much better
known "Commission on Critical Choices for Americans."  And just
as the Commission on Critical Choices was absorbed into the
Federal government in everything but name, the same was done with
Rockefeller's Commission on Water Quality.  But even if it was
clear that water was to become a political tool in some way, I
doubt that anyone in his worst nightmares imagined what was
actually afoot.  Over the past several years, Federal and State
water quality control boards have built up a comprehensive and
up-to-date picture of our nation's water resources and
requirements--and all this data has been turned over to the
Soviet Union!  So now, the Soviets know exactly where and how to
strike at us through our Achilles' heel of water, just as the
Medes and Persians were able to calculate how to attack ancient
Babylon through its water source.

   In the alliance between the Rockefeller and the Soviet Union
empires, the Rockefeller brothers still want to rule the American
continent under complete dictatorship; and the Soviets still want
America to become their complete satellite--a nation of slaves. 
But the Rockefellers realized long ago that this country could
not be brought under the total control they desire without the
benefit of crushing disasters to force us into that mold.  And
the Soviets for their part realize that to extract the benefit
from America that they seek, it is not enough simply to conquer
us in war.  Afterward there must be a core of turncoat managers,
quislings, to run America for them.  Soon, the Rockefellers
expect to obtain the "Declaration of National Emergency" that
they want in response to events which can be triggered by the
Soviets.  The Declaration of National Emergency, they believe,
will make their dictatorship all but complete.  At the present
time the Soviet Union has at least 158 underwater missiles in our
territorial waters along our coastlines.  In addition, the Great
Lakes now bristle with smaller, single warhead Soviet underwater
missiles--a total of 53 as of my latest information.  The fact
that the Soviet Union has been able to invade the Great Lakes and
place missiles there is shocking; and it is even more shocking to
know that Soviet agents are fanning out all over the United
States, unhampered, to sow seeds of nuclear disaster throughout
our land.  It's hard for most people to imagine how such things
are possible; but as I know from my own sources, they are being
facilitated from within our country.  For example, one of the key
steps which has been taken by the Carter administration to permit
these things recently was publicly confirmed by former
Congressman John Rarick of Louisiana.  Congressman Rarick
publishes a very informative monthly newsletter entitled "You've
a Right to Know", about which you might write to him at: Drawer
E, Saint Francisville, La.  70775.  Quoting from his March 1977
issue, "The Soviets are hauling United States cargo in
intra-coastal shipping illegally against the provisions of the
Jones Act.  Russian vessels can be seen in the river loading from
barges, and also unloading on two barges, as if they constitute
an integral arm of the United States Maritime Service.  Barges
loaded by Soviets have been followed up the river through inland
waterways and small canals to where their cargoes have even
reached the Chicago market."  Congressman Rarick further reports
that the Soviets are able to get away with this because Secretary
of the Treasury Blumenthal waived the provisions of the Jones Act
as applied to Soviet vessels.  Thanks to such generous help from
within the United States has been thrown wide open to offensive
Soviet actions.  As a result the planting of nuclear devices in
our inland waters--rivers as well as lakes and reservoirs--is
mushrooming at a tremendous pace.  To begin with, additional
bombs have been planted in some of the huge dammed-up lakes that
I named last month.  For example, Hoover Dam had one bomb when I
recorded Audioletter No. 23, but now it has 3--one next to each
end of the Dam itself, the third upstream some distance from the
Dam.  Another example is Oroville Reservoir in California.  Last
month it had one bomb, now it has 4.  But more serious than this
overkill of a few dams is the vast number of targets throughout
America where Soviet bombs have been and are being planted.  City
water reservoirs of any significance throughout America are
targeted.  Many already contain bombs, while others are scheduled
to receive bombs from the many trucks fanning out across America
with Soviet agents at the wheel.  Flood control, irrigation, and
hydroelectric dams of all kinds are targets as well; and major
rivers are also being seeded with bombs at strategic points.

   To indicate the magnitude of the Soviet attack plan, I will
report the current status of just one state--Texas, which is a
major target.  As of my latest intelligence, over 100 bombs have
already been planted in Texas; and I have been provided so far
with a partial list that specifies 33 of the lakes involved. 
These are: Toledo Bend Reservoir, Sam Rayburn Reservoir,
Steinhillyers Reservoir, Lake Vernon, two lakes northeast of
Houston which provide water for the city, Conroe Lake, Somerville
Reservoir, Lake Waco, Lake Whitney, Malakoff Lake, Frankston
Lake, Lake Livingston, Millwood Reservoir, Lake Texarkana, Lake
O' the Pines, Cedar Lake, Lake Tawakoni, four water reservoirs
for Dallas and Fort Worth, Lake Texoma, Arbuckle Reservoir, Lake
Bridgeport, Hubbard Creek Reservoir, Lake Kemp, Lake Arrowhead,
O'Folla Reservoir, San Angelo Reservoir, Twin Buttes Reservoir,
Lake Thomas, and White River Reservoir.

   A number of rivers around the country are also known to be
involved already.  These include the Mississippi, the Missouri,
the Illinois, the Ohio, the Columbia, the Potomac, and the
Susquehanna.  In the Mississippi alone there are already 31 bombs
located near dams, and locks, and other strategic points.  The
farthest to the north is a bomb about 5 miles downstream of
Little Falls, Minnesota.  From there, they have all been planted
all the way down to New Orleans of Louisiana, where 2 bombs are
in the river.  There are also two other bombs near New Orleans at
the east end of Lake Pontchartrain.

   My friends, the Soviet Union is striving to be in a position
to suddenly, decisively rob America of our water resources. 
While we are distracted with arguments over weapons delivery
systems, such as bombers and missiles, the Soviet Union is
striving for the reliability of weapons that are already on site
at the target.  When war comes, the Soviet Union plans to be able
to just push a button, detonate nuclear weapons all over America,
devastate our country with floods and the pestilence that they
bring, and still have all their missiles and bombers still in
reserve.  But before war comes, the Rockefeller/ Soviet alliance
plan to lay the groundwork for a Declaration of National
Emergency in the United States.

   One option still available to them is war in the Middle East
causing a cutoff of Arab OPEC oil supplies.  But a horrendous new
capability is now in place as an alternate means for creating our
national emergency; and, my friends, there are ominous signs that
this capability is going to be used, very soon.  Lurking deep in
the waters around the Philippine Islands there are now 7
fission-fusion-fission bombs planted there by the Soviet Union. 
Such a bomb is essentially a hydrogen bomb with a jacket of
uranium 238.  When it's set off, the nuclear reaction converts
much of the jacket material to plutonium 239, which in turn
explodes as well.  The Soviet Union is the only nation that has
ever set off such a bomb--16 years ago on October 30, 1961.  In
doing so, they set an ugly record that still stands--the biggest
nuclear weapon ever fired in the atmosphere.  Its yield was
something over 50 megatons--that is 50 million tons of TNT, 2500
times as large as the atomic bomb dropped on Hiroshima. 
Theoretically, there's no limit to the yield of such a bomb, but
for 16 years it has been thought of in the West as unusable
because it produces such vast quantities of fall-out that it
would endanger the country that used it.  But the Soviet Union
has found a way to use it--deep under the ocean for geophysical
warfare in an environment where the radio-active products are
relatively confined, producing little fall-out.  The Philippines
sit like a keystone among a long arch of sub-sea trenches and
faults that comprise the most earthquake-prone areas on earth. 
Starting just north of New Zealand, a band of geological
instability runs northwestward toward the Philippines, then
northeastward past Japan to the Kamchatka Peninsula, eastward
along the Aleutians to Alaska, and then southward along the west
coast of the United States, Mexico, Central America, and onward
all the way to Chile.  This long, irregular zone around the
Pacific rim is often called the "Ring of Fire."  The 7 Soviet
bombs planted in Philippine waters are there for the purpose of
triggering major earthquakes, which, thanks to the peculiar
convergence of faults and trenches in that area, are intended to
work their way by chain reaction all around the Pacific rim,
devastating Washington State, Oregon, and California in the
process.  The 7 bombs in the Philippines are in the so-called
gigaton range--that is, each one is equivalent to a billion tons
of TNT--50,000 times more powerful than the Hiroshima bomb and
therefore big enough to trigger massive earthquakes.  And the
Soviets believe they can safely use such warfare, treaties or no
treaties, because most of the Soviet Union has no history of
earthquakes.  The Soviet gigaton bombs in the Philippines are
located at navigational coordinates which I will now reveal.  No.
1 is at 17-23-23 north, 117-7-23 east; No. 2 is at 14-48-48
north, 119-2-18 east; No. 3 is at 14-0-40 north, 118-23-53 east;
No. 4 is at 13-0-0 north, 117-42-8 east; No. 5 is at 12-0-54
north, 126-4-55 east; No. 6 is at 13-50-36 north, 125-21-45 east;
No. 7 is at 19-48-3 north, 123-51-57 east.  But to make sure that
our west coast is devastated by the effects of a seeming natural
disaster erupting in the Philippines, a series of 7 conventional
but large hydrogen bombs have been planted off our west coast by
the Soviet Union.  These can be set off in conjunction with those
in the Philippines, and at the right moment to produce tidal
waves which would sweep in from the Pacific with devastating
effect along our west coast.  Bomb No. 1 west of Seattle is at
48-0-0 north, 127-50-0 west; No. 2 west of Eugene, Oregon is at
43-29-18 north, 127-55-5 west; No. 3 west of San Francisco is at
37-8-45 north, 125-42-30 west; No. 4 west of Monterey is at
36-31-0 north, 125-26-30 west; No. 5, also west of Monterey, is
at 36-26-30 north, 124-56-0 west; No. 6 west of Los Angeles is at
33-25-15 north, 122-23-50 west; and No. 7 southwest of San Diego
is at 31-45-35 north, 120-36-0 west.  In my Audioletter No. 20
for January 1977, I referred to a warning document issued in
December 1975 by Mr. Tony Hodges of Hawaii.  In that document Mr.
Hodges presented evidence of the feasibility of underwater
missiles.  He also warned of the dangers of bombs on or in the
seabed designed to generate earthquakes or tidal waves. 
Unfortunately, it turns out that Mr. Hodges warnings were all
valid.

   The dictatorship and war plans are being speeded up now; the
world will be stunned by what will look like a massive, natural
disaster in the Philippines that also spreads around the Ring of
Fire to decimate our west coast.  And when it happens, Jimmy
Carter will have the excuse David Rockefeller wants him to have
to declare a National Emergency and in effect suspend the United
States Constitution.  The President's dictatorial emergency
powers spelled out in Executive Orders 11490 and 11921 will be
activated, and the complete bureaucracy of dictatorship set in
motion under circumstances designed to stifle all dissent; and
the elaborate prescriptions for complete governmental control of
all of our water resources spelled out in Executive Order 11921
will be activated under conditions which enable this to be sold
to the people as necessary for our best interest.  Soon
thereafter, with the Rockefeller dictatorship in place, Nuclear
War One itself is planned to come.  Dams and reservoirs all over
America are to be destroyed at one blow by the Soviet Union; and
the quislings from the Trilateral Commission, who now control the
Federal government, will use their control over what little
remains of our water supplies to make their domination of us
total.  The saddest thing about all of this is that only when it
happens will people believe.  By total exposure there is a chance
to prevent the West Coast disaster; but without exposure, there
is no chance whatsoever.

   My friends, it's only by the grace and power of our Lord Jesus
Christ that I've received the information I revealed over the
recent past; and it's my solemn duty to pass on this information
to you--it's not meant for me alone.  And in the same way, it's
not meant for you alone--it needs to be known by every one.  And
so, my friends, this completes two years of my monthly
Audioletters.  I want to thank you for all your words of
encouragement, your support, and especially your prayers.  Again,
thank you; and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #23

Audio letter No. 23

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

(This recording is a product of Audio Books, Inc., Box 16428,
Fort Worth, Texas  76133)

    Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is April 24,
1977, and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 23.

    Two months ago in Audioletter No. 21 for February 1977, I
explained how America had been turned into a nation-wide energy
addict over the course of two generations and more, and how this
energy addiction is to be used against us by the four Rockefeller
brothers in turning off our national security; and just four days
ago, on April 20, 1977, this process got under way in earnest by
way of David Rockefeller's revolutionary energy program announced
to the world by his employee, Jimmy Carter.  To the casual
observer it must seem incredible--a new administration under a
new President, with no previous experience in Washington, has in
only three short months done what no previous administration has
ever succeeded in doing: developed a comprehensive, detailed
energy program for the most complex economy on earth. 
Furthermore, Mr. Carter tells us that we must do as he tells us
in order to avoid "a national catastrophe"; and he says we must
act now.  Why the rush?  Why this sudden urgency?  And why does
he go out of his way to call his energy program "the moral
equivalent of war"?  The answer lies in what I warned you about
at the end of monthly Audioletter No. 22 just last month.

    The CIA is hard at work arranging what is to be the CIA's
crowning achievement--the staging of a horrendous act of
terrorism that is intended to cause war to erupt in the whole of
the Middle East.  This is to set in motion a modified, up-dated
version of the detailed war plan I revealed in monthly
Audioletter No. 6 for November 1975.  This plan includes a
limited nuclear strike from the Sinai to cap off Arab OPEC oil
wells except those in Libya, which is controlled by the CIA. 
This will lead immediately to very harsh energy rationing in the
United States, and the Federal government will at last get to
issue those precious gas rationing coupons that have been
awaiting use now for over three years.  So the Carter energy plan
with its underlying warlike atmosphere is actually the first step
in a gradual shift unto a war footing for the United States.  It
has the same purpose as the declaration of national emergency
which President Franklin D. Roosevelt proclaimed in May 1941, six
months before Pearl Harbor, to start getting America ready for
war he was helping to bring about.  The second major step in our
progressive shift onto war footing is intended to occur the time
of the cut-off of Middle East oil, by war.  This will provide a
perfect excuse for an actual Declaration of National Emergency,
and that in turn will activate all the dictatorial presidential
powers spelled out in Executive Order 11921 signed by President
Ford very quietly in June 1976, and described in my Audioletter
No. 14 for July 1976.

    Audioletter No. 14, of course, is also the issue in which I
first revealed the presence of Soviet underwater missiles and
bombs in our own territorial waters.  The terrible Middle East
incident now brewing, which I fervently hope and pray will
somehow be sidetracked by its advanced exposure, is to cause a
limited nuclear war in the Middle East.  That in turn is supposed
to initiate a chain of events, culminating in Nuclear War One
between the Soviet Union and the United States of America. 
Originally this was to have been a carefully programmed war for
the mutual benefit of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet
allies, with the Rockefellers and their intimates riding out the
war safely in the nuclear-safe zone across the northern United
States; but ever since the Soviet Union began its double cross of
the Rockefellers last summer 1976, the plans for war have been
undergoing frantic revisions.  Even the insane Rockefeller
concessions to the Soviets, embodied in the Red Friday agreement
of October 1, 1976 (which I revealed that month in Audioletter
No. 17) have failed to fully reinstate the Rockefeller/Soviet
alliance--so now anything can happen.  The Rockefeller brothers,
who for so long have tried to play God with their immense power,
are now finding out that they too are fallible and human, even if
they still refuse to consciously admit it.  Today, my friends,
the power of the Rockefeller empire is in the process of
destroying itself; but just as Samson pulled down the temple
around him, the Rockefeller brothers threaten to pull down modern
civilization around their heads as their power runs out of
control and collapses into the inferno of nuclear war.

    Earlier this month, on April 7, 1977, Prime Minister Rabin of
Israel resigned.  The press has played up his resignation as if
it were another Watergate, but actually it was only a
technicality having to do with a modest bank account held here in
Washington, D.C. by Rabin against government regulations. 
Overnight Rabin was out of office, and his public career has been
described as ruined; but the real reason for Rabin's lightning
exit from Israeli politics was that he learned of the CIA plot to
ignite war in the Middle East, and he wanted no part of it.  It's
almost a replay of Sir Harold Wilson's sudden unexplained
resignation as Prime Minister of Great Britain on March 16, 1976,
just over a year ago; and as I explained then in monthly
Audioletter No. 10, Wilson resigned because he had learned of the
coming war plan and wanted nothing to do with it.  And so the
build-up toward war continues, and our rulers know it.  But what
of the American public in general?  How many know what danger we
are in?  And especially, how many believe it enough to do
something about it?  My friends, most Americans today are on
vacation from reality, but reality will have to be faced one day
in the not too distant future.

    My three special topics for today are: Topic #1--THE PRE-WAR
SABOTAGE OF AMERICA, Topic #2--THE COMING NAVAL BATTLE FOR THE
UNITED STATES AND THE WORLD, and Topic #3--THE UNTOLD PERSONAL
SACRIFICE OF GENERAL GEORGE S. BROWN.

Topic #1--In the early days of the 20th century the
Rockefeller/Standard Oil monopoly had already become supreme in
the United States, but abroad it faced two powerful competitors
in oil.  One was the British Empire, whose destruction by means
of two World Wars I've discussed in a number of my past talking
tapes.  The other foreign competitor was even bigger than the
British Empire in oil, and it was attacked and destroyed first. 
That competitor was Czarist Russia.  After the Bolshevik
Revolution took place in 1917, property owners and businessmen of
all kinds were dispossessed and liquidated in great numbers.  And
included in this, by design, was the utter destruction of the oil
fields, refineries, oil tankers, everything having to do with
oil.  The small band of revolutionaries under Lenin and Trotsky
who had been sent into Russia with the help of Rockefeller
financing had done their job well; and within a few years the new
Communist regime of the Soviet Union welcomed the
Rockefeller/Standard Oil interests with open arms to re-develop
the huge Russian oil reserves.  Ever since that day, right down
to the present, practically all of the oil leaving the Soviet
Union has been carried in oil tankers of the Rockefeller/Standard
Oil empire under various names, nominees, and national flags. 
For a thorough and most unusual expose of the oil competition
presented to the Rockefellers by Czarist Russia, I highly
recommend a new book by Robert V. Tolf, entitled THE RUSSIAN
ROCKEFELLERS--THE SAGA OF THE NOBEL FAMILY AND THE RUSSIAN OIL
INDUSTRY published by the Hoover Institution Press, Stanford
University, Stanford, Calif.  94305--the price is $15.95
postpaid.

    For decades following the Bolshevik Revolution, the Soviet
rulers were absolutely dependent upon an uninterrupted flow of
transfusions from the West of money, technical know-how, food,
and arms.  The Kremlin ruled a huge nation with an iron fist, and
the Rockefellers shared this rule with the Kremlin.  The Soviet
Union, therefore, appeared to be the perfect vehicle for bringing
the entire world under the control of the super-rich Rockefellers
and their intimates.  All that was necessary, or so they thought,
was to gradually build up the Soviet system while bleeding to
death the harder to control United States and the western world. 
This was the situation the four Rockefeller brothers inherited
long ago-they literally grew up with it, and could hardly imagine
things being any different.  But now things are different.  The
Soviet Union can now survive without continued outside help, and
now they have been double-crossing the Rockefellers and we the
people will have to suffer for it.  Now, both the Rockefellers
and the Soviets are maneuvering, playing a tricky game, and all
the while trying to emerge supreme from the conflict to come. 
But, just as it was planned before the Rockefeller/Soviet
alliance began coming apart, the main and prime battleground is
to be the United States of America.  The Soviet Union is busy at
work trying to weaken America here and abroad so that we can be
defeated in Nuclear War One; and the Rockefellers are trying to
turn our nation into a complete dictatorship under their
domination.  Both are trying to bend the weakening of America's
freedom to their own special advantage.

    The centerpiece of the Rockefeller program to completely take
over America right now is the so-called CARTER ENERGY PROGRAM. 
Recently the CIA s-u-d-d-e-n-l-y upgraded its estimates of Soviet
spending for new military equipment and installations to four
times the previous figure so as to alarm us.  In a similar vein,
the CIA has also provided Jimmy Carter with grist for his energy
mill to grind us into submission by issuing a report saying world
oil reserves are much lower than previously thought.  Both CIA
reports are rubbish, issued purely for propaganda purposes; so
the CIA under Admiral Turner, who is a Rockefeller man, is
continuing with the preparations for the limited nuclear strike
from the Sinai in order to get the war started.  American F-15
fighter bombers are now available in the Sinai and would hit all
of the five or more Arab target areas with ease; and the special
low-yield nuclear weapons for the job are already on the scene,
currently stored underground at the so-called American Monitoring
Station in the Sinai.  The bombs themselves are atomic, not
hydrogen, very clean, with primary blast effects confined to a
radius of only 300 to 400 yards--just right for a so-called
surgical attack to wipe out the oil wells in the target areas.

    As for America, even though the Alaskan oil is supposed to
start flowing through the pipeline this summer, it will not come
into the lower United States.  It happens to be high sulphur oil
of a type which west-coast refineries cannot handle even though
there have been ten years to get ready for Alaskan oil.  Instead,
the Rockefeller plan is to ship this oil to Japan at a handsome
profit, of course, and make up the difference with more imports
of, guess what--Arab oil.  When the Arab oil is cut off, there
will be some attempts to ship some of the otherwise useless
Alaskan oil to the Gulf Coast by small, inefficient tankers
through the Panama Canal, which is targeted both by underwater
missiles and by missiles in Guyana.  The sharp drop in our oil
supplies will also help to intensify the reduction in food
supplies, which is already resulting from drought here in
America.  Many factors are contributing to the drought situation,
including not only the Soviet weather modification activities
I've mentioned in the past, but also activities under Rockefeller
control.  For example, I mentioned in Audioletter No. 9 for
February 1976 that for years the Rockefeller oil companies have
been knowingly lowering the underground water table in many areas
of the Midwest and Great Plains by means of excessive pumping
from their oil wells; and now, in many of these very areas, the
problem of low ground water is adding to the drought crisis.

    Meanwhile, the Rockefellers never lose sight of their
objectives, no matter how much they are forced to change their
tactics along the way.  Their objective for America is
DICTATORSHIP, according to the pattern spelled out in their
secret New Constitution, which I revealed in my Audio Book
Talking Tape No. 4 released in July 1975.  Under the guise of
"governmental reorganization", the provisions of their
dictatorial new constitution are being imposed on the United
States piecemeal, gradually, while our real Constitution is
increasingly "interpreted" out of existence.

    But of all the things that determine whether a nation will
survive or succumb in time of crisis, the human spirit is still
the most important.  A strong spirit and deep resolve can
overcome seemingly insurmountable obstacles, and it can make a
people impossible to conquer; but a weak spirit, without
convictions or values, leaves a people defenseless--defenseless
no matter how much armor they may wear or what weapons they may
command.  This is why the human spirit has been the most
consistent target of all, both of the Rockefeller "One World"
group and of the rulers of the Soviet Union.

    Last month in Audioletter No. 22 I pointed out one of the
extremes in church philosophy that has been promoted wherever
possible for generations by the Rockefellers and their
collaborators.  This extreme is to divorce the moral and
spiritual lessons of religions from daily decisions and actions,
as if the two had no relationship to one another except for lip
service.  For whatever reasons, this extreme is personified today
by one Jimmy Carter.  The opposite extreme is equally deadly, if
not more so.  This is to dilute the spiritual teaching for which
churches originally existed and replace it with preaching about
economic, political, and social issues.  To do this is to play
with fire; but this is exactly what the National Council of
Churches and its sister organization the World Council of
Churches have been doing for decades.  Prior to November 28,
1950, the National Council was known as the Federal Council of
Churches.  For many years the Federal Council had been dominated
at the national level by the Rockefellers and their agent John
Foster Dulles, and was the recipient of several grants from the
Rockefeller Foundation.  But the Federal Council became so
totally identified with political activism in support of
socialist causes that it became an object of increasing distrust. 
Accordingly, the name was changed to the National Council of
Churches, and its tarnished halo was polished up with public
assurances that this was a new organization which would devote
itself to the real business of the church.  There were many
influential laymen in the churches under the umbrella of the
National Council who wanted to help insure that the supposedly
new organization would truly devote itself to proper areas of
church concern.  As a result, a National Lay Committee was
brought into being under the chairmanship of the late J. Howard
Pugh, a truly great American, who was the director and president
of the Sun Oil Co. when it was still free of the grasping
clutches of the Rockefellers.  The National Lay Committee existed
from March 28, 1951, until June 30, 1955.

    The whole story of what happened to the National Lay
Committee of the National Council of Churches is told in the
"Chairman's Final Report" by J. Howard Pugh.  Unfortunately this
important report has long been suppressed and buried.  I have in
my possession one of the very few copies still known to be in
existence; therefore I will read a few brief passages from the
Chairman's Explanatory Letter, which serves as a Foreword to the
Report as a whole.  These quotations are taken in sequence; and
although they do not do justice to Mr. Pugh's complete
explanatory letter, much less the entire 316-page Report, I
believe you will find them revealing:

   "In the failure of this most important effort to bring about
an enduring partnership between the clergy and laity, I feel a
very real responsibility to provide a comprehensive and factual
account of those steps which led to the Board's
action--discontinuing lay participation."

   "We lay people found ourselves not only deeply in the minority
but often poles apart from the clergy who invariably out-voted us
10 to 1 in these sessions."

   "The members of the Lay Committee were often misunderstood in
their urgency to keep the churches out of politics and their
insistence on the promisee evangelism.  Our premise was that
instead of appealing to government, the church should devote its
energies to the work of promoting the attributes of
Christianity--truth, honesty, fairness, generosity, justice, and
charity in the hearts and minds of men.  We attempted to
emphasize that Christ stressed not the expanded State, but the
dignity and responsibility of the individual."

   "Their philosophy, it seemed to the Lay Committee, looked to
an ever-expanding government."

   "With few exceptions, the members of the Lay Committee had
agreed to serve only because they had been assured that the new
National Council would avoid the political involvements and
controversies of the old Federal Council of Churches, which was
now superseded."

   "Most of the members of the Lay Committee came finally to the
realization that a wide chasm existed between the thinking of the
laity and the clergy and executives of the denominational bodies
which comprise the National Council."

   "Thus, on June 30, 1955, the Lay Committee ceased to exist as
a committee of the General Board."

   "The members of the Lay Committee believed, and so stated,
that the political adventures of the National Council in the
fields of economic and political controversy would seriously
hinder and not further Christian leadership in the pressing
fields of evangelism, fellowship, and education."

   "It appears from the record that the National Council could
find no room for opposition to the philosophies and practices
carried over from the old Federal Council.  Lacking the patience
to resolve the basic problem, it has sought to bury it."

Thus ended, my friends, more than 20 years ago the last major
effort to deflect the Rockefeller-dominated National Council of
Churches away from its political programs and toward concern for
spiritual matters.  After more than four years of frustrating
effort, the National Lay Committee was dissolved.  This signaled
the end of any influence of the general church population of
America on the policies of the National Council of Churches.  The
National Council proceeded on its way, proclaiming to the public
that it represented 34,000,000 Protestants, while using this
power base to help undermine our free Republic.  The National
Council has done much to help dull and weaken the spirit of
millions of Americans, softening our approach in opposition to
Communism.  Let us hope and pray that in these dangerous days
they will at last see the light and begin to work at last to
build up the American spirit, instead of destroying it.

Topic #2--In monthly Audioletter No. 15 for August 1976, I
explained that the planting of short-range underwater-launch
nuclear missiles in our territorial waters was part of the Soviet
naval strategy for the United States and world conquest.  The
same continues to be the case now.  Admiral Gorshkoff, who has
commanded the Soviet navy for more than 20 years, has built it
into a fighting force that is radically different from any other
navy the world has ever seen; and as we near the very threshold
of war, it is no accident that the Rockefeller insider who now
heads the CIA is also an Admiral--4-star Admiral Stansfield
Turner.  The CIA has become the most powerful military
organization in the United States, and Nuclear War One will
revolve around naval strategy.  Both the importance of the Soviet
Navy and its great difference from our own United States Navy can
be illustrated by just one fact: When the supersonic Backfire
long-range bomber entered operational service in the Soviet Union
late in 1974, it did so simultaneously with the Soviet Navy as
well as with the Soviet Air Force.  This is like giving our own
new supersonic bomber, the B-1, to our Navy to fly--or, since we
still do not have the B-1 to counter the Soviet Backfire, having
our navy fly B-52s.  Of course our own navy does not fly
strategic bombers.  The United States Navy, like the British Navy
and most of the other great navies of history, has as one of its
primary missions the protection of our sea lanes of commerce--a
war which is basically defensive in nature.  Since World War II
our navy has also acquired offensive missions which have
gradually assumed greater importance, including the ability to
attack an enemy from the sea with the submarine-launched
ballistic missiles.  But the traditional defensive mission of
protecting our sea lanes can never be neglected.  Admiral
Gorshkoff, however, has been able to concentrate on building a
navy which is almost totally offensive in character.  Soviet
fishing trawlers, some of them genuine, roam the world; but the
Soviet Union does not depend for its survival on the sea nearly
as much as the United States.  So the Soviet Navy is designed
first and foremost for offensive operations; and this not only
includes the ability to interdict enemy sea lanes and attack
enemy naval forces at sea, it also includes an unprecedented
emphasis on projecting naval power ashore.  This in turn means
not only the ability to carry out amphibious assaults and
tactical bombardment, but strategic attack--a role we usually
tend to think of only in terms of the Soviet Air Force with its
ICBMs and bombers.

    The new Soviet Navy of Admiral Gorshkoff also differs from
ours in another way.  Aside from missile submarines, the American
Navy is structured around the aircraft carrier; whereas the
Soviet Navy is built around the submarine.  American task forces
include all kinds of ships designed to coordinate with the needs
and capabilities of the aircraft carrier.  By the same token,
Soviet surface ships of all kinds are intended to support the
huge submarine force in various ways.  This applies even to the
new Soviet aircraft carriers which are now beginning to appear on
the scene since Soviet naval aviation is heavily oriented toward
anti-submarine warfare, although it has other capabilities as
well.  The relative naval capabilities of the Soviet Union and
the United States have never been considered in the Strategic
Arms Limitations Talks, the SALT talks, except with regard to
sea-launch ballistic missiles; and yet it is the coming naval
confrontation that could all by itself determine the outcome of
Nuclear War One.  It is often forgotten, for example, that the
North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) is primarily a naval
alliance.  We hear frequently about NATO in the controlled major
media of the United States as though the only problems were Army
problems--such as rusty tanks and lack of spare parts; and when
the Supreme Allied Commander, Europe, who is presently General
Alexander Haig, is mentioned in the news, he is often called the
head of NATO, or some such, but actually he's only one of three
co-equal Commanders in NATO.  The other two are Naval
Commanders--they are the Commander-in-Chief, Channel Command; and
the Supreme Allied Commander, Atlantic, the latter based at
Norfolk, Va.  NATO depends for its very life on its naval
strength, including the ability to keep open the vital North
Atlantic sea lanes.  But now, Soviet naval Backfire bombers with
air-to-surface, anti-ship missiles threaten to cut those North
Atlantic sea lanes in time of war; and the Mediterranean, which
was once dominated by the United States Navy, is now heavily
populated by the Soviet Navy as well.  While the Soviet Navy has
undergone explosive growth over the past decade to the formidable
armed force that it is today, the United States Navy has been
allowed to shrink to half its former size with more and more
ships aging and obsolescent.  When the Arab oil is cut off by war
soon, Europe will have to fall back on its meager reserves, which
will run out within 60 to 90 days.  Interdiction of NATO sea
lanes at that point by the Soviet Union could cause all of Europe
to fall like a plum into Soviet hands.  This is especially true
in light of the short-range Soviet underwater missiles in
European territorial waters, which I mentioned in Audioletter No.
22 last month.  So far only Great Britain shows signs of being
able to withstand such a course of events.  As I mentioned last
month, the British government had requested the latest missile
coordinates from me, and I had supplied them.  Of the 29 Soviet
missiles around the British Isles at that time, all but one had
been removed by the Royal Navy as of April 18--6 days ago. 
However, I have been informed of 3 newly planted missiles there,
and I have relayed these to the British for action.  Great
Britain also may have the benefit of her new North Sea oil fields
which, barring sabotage or the like, should make Britain
independent of foreign oil producers in the near future.

    Since I spoke to you last, action has been taken in another
area also.  Acting on information which I relayed, of the 8
missiles around southern Africa, seven have now been taken up. 
At last report, however, the missile lying off Mozambique
targeted on Rhodesia was still in place.  Such removals of
missiles are better than no action at all, but they are still no
more than holding actions.  What is needed, if war is to be
prevented, is for this deadly cat-and-mouse game to be stopped
altogether by revealing to the whole world what the Soviet Navy
is up to.  Late last September, as I revealed in monthly
Audioletter No. 16, the United States had a golden opportunity to
do just that, and to do so while the Soviet underwater missile
threat was only a small fraction of what it is now.  At that
time, a Soviet missile-laying mini-sub equipped with
sonar-defeating design features entered Chesapeake Bay and became
trapped there, due to a malfunction that ultimately killed the
crew.  It was a perfect opportunity for the United States to pick
up the sub, display it on television world-wide by satellite, and
tell the Soviet Union that the jig was up; but instead, as I
revealed in Audioletter No. 17 the following month, the Red
Friday agreement on October 1, 1976 reinstated a strained
alliance between the Rockefellers and the Soviets, and the Soviet
Navy was allowed to enter Chesapeake Bay under cover of darkness
and recover the mini-sub.  But now, a similar opportunity exists
once again--not in American waters but in those of Norway.  In
March 1977 a Soviet submarine entered the fjord of Folda on the
north coast of Norway.  The Norwegians detected its presence and
sealed off the exit to wait for the sub to surface.  On April 4,
1977, the story was broken in European press, although the
location was not mentioned.  To my knowledge, however, it has
received no mention anywhere in the United States.  I strongly
suggest to the Norwegian government that before the Soviet
submarine be allowed to escape, a search be made at the
navigational coordinates 64 35' 23" north, 10 23' 14" east.  This
location is not far from where the Soviet submarine is trapped
and is the site of one of the seven Soviet underwater missiles
that have been planted recently in Norwegian waters.  Should the
government of Norway so request, I will naturally provide the
other locations as well, through proper channels.

    As for the United States, there continues to be no effort at
all to clear our waters of the Soviet nuclear weapons which
threaten our country.  As of my latest report a few days ago, not
one of the 158 Soviet missiles and hydrogen bombs lurking in our
territorial waters has been removed, and I have not been
approached in any way by the United States government with
requests for their locations.  Meanwhile the Soviet plutonium
cloud attacks on the United States are still continuing by means
of the new canisters which are being deployed close to shore
along the West Coast, which I mentioned last month.  Of the 16
canisters which were deployed at the time I recorded Audioletter
No. 22 last month, 11 had been discharged as of April 15, but by
then there were 17 new ones.  At last report, these canisters are
being deployed along the entire West Coast from San Diego to
Seattle.  These are extremely easy and simple to deploy--for
example, they are dropped from aircraft flying under our radar
like the Soviet Bear bombers that we were told about by news
reports the other day.  They are also planted by Soviet trawlers,
since they are allowed to enter our new 200-mile fishing zone to
catch certain fish there.  The fact that this is being done was
proven by the arrested Soviet trawler Taras Shevchenko which was
carrying plutonium canisters in a compartment near the stern of
the ship.

    Thus the maneuvering in preparation for Nuclear War One
continues with a strong naval emphasis.  At one level,
Rockefeller agents in America appear to continue to cooperate in
the joint plan of conquest with the Soviets; but on the real
level the Soviets and the Rockefellers are both jockeying for a
decisive knock-out blow.  In this, time is on the side of the
Soviet Union, so they're trying to delay war slightly while the
Rockefeller brothers are trying to hurry it up; and to condition
us all for it, the Carter Administration is flexing its muscles
to show us how strong it is when it comes to the Soviets.  In
short order it has forcefully espoused Human Rights, handed the
Soviets an ultimatum on SALT talks, seized Soviet fishing
trawlers, chased Soviet Bear long-range turbo-prop bombers away
from the southeast coast of our country--and what's next?  A
photo of a Soviet submarine in our waters?  Already the
Rockefeller position has decayed further in the past several
months because of the further deterioration of their CIA undersea
super-missiles in the Atlantic and Pacific.  Of the fleet of 14
such missiles which I described in Audioletter No. 20, January
1977, all 5 in the Pacific have now sprung leaks and are no
longer usable.  Of the 9 in the Atlantic, 4 have now
failed--missiles #4, 6, 7, and 8.  That leaves only 5 of the
original fleet of 14 CIA missiles still available for Rockefeller
threats against their Soviet partners.  Meanwhile the Soviet
short-range missiles in our waters in the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans and the Gulf of Mexico are now being used by the Soviets
to further weaken our position as a nation.

    But, my friends, that's not all.  For the very first time
Soviet missiles have now been planted in the Great Lakes.  From
there they now threaten Chicago, Racine, Milwaukee, Cleveland,
Bay City, Erie, Buffalo, Rochester, and other cities of our
industrial heartland.  At present there are exactly 50 such
missiles in the Great Lakes.  These, however, are single warhead,
short-range missiles, and are even smaller in size than the
multiple warhead missiles that have been planted along our East,
West, and Gulf Coasts.  As if this were not enough, I have just
been alerted that Soviet agents are now fanning out across
America planting small hydrogen bombs in selected inland lakes. 
The primary targets here are major dams, but some other targets
are also involved.  Since the Federal government refuses to take
action, it's imperative that State governments--especially those
in the West--take action now to protect their citizens.  Security
patrols around major dams and lakes should be beefed up
immediately and placed on full alert.  In addition, search
operations must be performed to locate those bombs that have
already been planted so that they can be removed.  Already,
Soviet underwater nuclear devices have been planted in 21 places
within the United States, and more are being planted.  Nineteen
(19) of the targets are dams, the other 2 are cities.  CALIFORNIA
has 4--Oroville Dam north of Sacramento, Castaic Dam north of Los
Angeles, Shasta Dam in north California, and Otay Reservoir Dam
near San Diego.  ARIZONA also has 4 bombs--Glen Canyon Dam,
Coolidge Dam, Theodore Roosevelt Dam, and Lake Pleasant Dam near
Phoenix.  NEW MEXICO has 3--the Navajo Dam, Blue Mesa Dam, and
Alfa Butte Dam.  MONTANA has 3--Fort Peck Dam, Yellow Tail Dam,
and Hungry Horse Dam.  NORTH DAKOTA, SOUTH DAKOTA, NEBRASKA,
NEVADA, and WASHINGTON STATE so far have 1 bomb each, threatening
dams which are among the world's largest--these are respectively
Garrison Dam, Oahe Dam, Fort Randall Dam, Hoover Dam, and Grand
Coulee Dam.  IDAHO has 2 bombs, both threatening towns--one is in
the north end of Cour d'Alene Lake, threatening the town of that
name; the other is in the north end of Lake Pend Oreille near the
town of Sandpoint.  My friends, this would not have been possible
had it not been for the destruction of the FBI beginning with the
murder of J. Edgar Hoover.  God help us all.

Topic #3--With our military situation so serious, one would
naturally expect someone to come forward to take action against
the Soviet underwater missiles.  For example, General George S.
Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, brought about the
removal of many of these ocean and gulf missiles during August
and September 1976.  But where is he now?!!  My friends, here is
what has happened to General Brown.  No matter how much the
tactics of public manipulation change and shift, some things
never change.  I mentioned several months ago in connection with
the disgraceful Sputnik One episode that nowadays accolades and
awards go to the spoilers and traitors in our midst, while the
true heroes who dare to raise their heads are beaten down,
suppressed, and forgotten.  Today there is no more grim testimony
to this fact than the current predicament of General George S.
Brown.

    As Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, General Brown is
the top military officer in the United States, and therefore in
some respects in the entire free world.  As I revealed in detail
in monthly Audioletter No. 16 for September 1976, it was he,
General Brown, who more than any other person in the United
States government, prevented a surprise Soviet nuclear attack on
America during August and September 1976.  Under extremely
adverse conditions, he obtained the go-ahead to remove Soviet
underwater missiles and hydrogen bombs then planted in our own
territorial waters and then ordered the United States Navy to do
the job, which it did quickly.  And on September 16, 1976, I met
for over an hour with General Brown in his office at the Pentagon
to discuss the continuing Soviet underwater missile crisis and to
relay new information to him which had been prevented from
reaching him through normal channels.  In meeting with me,
General Brown was accepting terrible personal risks, and he knew
it.  He had overruled his entire staff in order to meet with me,
and the meeting itself was completely free of interruptions of
any kind.  Nor was there any cut-off due to time; the meeting
simply continued without pressure until we finished the business
at hand.  Then I left, along with an associate who had
accompanied me to the meeting as a witness.  We drove away from
the Pentagon that day in a driving rainstorm; but the brave
patriot whose office we had just left now faced a far worse
personal storm--thanks to his efforts on our nation's behalf.  I
warned my listeners about this in monthly Audioletter No. 16 last
September, and asked that everyone strengthen his hand by
expressing their support for him.

    General Brown, alone among the top echelons of the United
States government, had stood by us and had saved millions of our
lives in the process.  Now he was depending on us to stand by him
in his continuing efforts to carry out his Constitutional duties
to the letter.  Some of us did so, my friends, but far too many
of us did not.  During August and early September 1976, the Joint
Chiefs of Staff were flooded with demands for action against the
Soviet underwater missiles; but after that action was taken,
there was no such massive outpouring of thanks for General
Brown's crucial leadership or support for the continued positive
efforts needed to save our country.  Far too many of us forget
that it is not enough just to complain about what is wrong; we
must also actively support that which is right, or it will wither
and die.  After the crucial actions taken under General Brown's
leadership late last summer, far too many of us just relaxed and
went back to sleep, leaving General Brown to fend for himself.

    Now I must tell you what has happened to General Brown as a
result.  For many months now I have been cut off from direct
contact with General Brown; and in recent months General Brown
has seemed like a completely different person than in the past
whenever he appears in public.  In place of the outgoing
personality which has been General Brown's trademark in the past,
there is nothing but resignation and acceptance of the dictates
of his civilian superiors.  The change has been so dramatic that
it has even been commented upon by syndicated columnists, who are
mystified.  What has happened to General Brown, my friends, is
known to very few.  I myself have been able to confirm it only
within the past few days.  General George S. Brown, the nation's
top military officer, is now virtually under house arrest.  This
is exactly the same kind of confinement that was meted out, for
example, to Army Lieutenant William Calley during his court
martial for the My Lai massacre in Vietnam.  But there are two
differences in General Brown's case.  First, there has been no
court martial.  Instead, he is living under the threat of a court
martial, for its twisted evidence and perjuring witnesses have
already been assembled.  Second, General Brown's isolation at the
Pentagon and confinement to his Fort Myer residence are not
absolute.  Instead, they are interspersed with very carefully
controlled appearances at official functions, since his absence
from these would quickly arouse suspicions that something was
terribly wrong.  Now, should General Brown attempt again to step
out of line and defy those in high places by giving orders to
remove the missiles, doing his Constitutional duty, the suspended
threat of court martial would instantly come crashing down upon
him.  By means of the elaborately doctored and falsified evidence
I've already mentioned, General Brown would be railroaded into
certain conviction for treason for doing his duty.  Already
alleged statements by General Brown have been published recently
to make him appear to be a dangerous man.  Were General Brown to
be courtmartialed with falsified evidence, it would destroy him
personally.  It would also prevent his efforts from producing any
benefits to America--such as a resumption of the removal of
Soviet nuclear missiles from our waters.  Any such orders of his
would be rescinded; and his courtmartial would be used to make
any attempts by him to warn America useless, by destroying his
credibility.

    As long ago as October, 1976, just a month after my meeting
with him, General Brown was given a powerful demonstration of the
ability of his enemies to crucify him publicly.  As I discussed
that month in Audioletter No. 17, a six-month old interview of
General Brown was dredged up and used to subject him to intense
public embarrassment and criticism.  A few alleged statements of
his from the interview were made public and played up by the
controlled major media to such an extent that he was forced to
make a public apology on nationwide television.  Can you imagine? 
All of that for a few relatively insignificant comments which, if
he really made them at all, had attracted no attention six months
earlier.  This episode had just one purpose--to prove to General
Brown that if the falsified charges of treason should ever be
leveled at him, he would have no chance at all either to defend
himself or to do a service to America.  His only recourse now
would be to himself publicly demand a court-martial, but even
that would not be successful without a massive outpouring of
public support for him ahead of time--and that, my friends, has
so far been denied him to the everlasting shame of our entire
nation.  Should General Brown come to any physical harm, the
responsibility for it will rest squarely on the shoulders of
David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Rockefeller III; but
meanwhile, he's a secret captive, keeping millions of Americans
reassured that all is well merely by his presence on the scene. 
Whenever a public or official appearance or statement by General
Brown is called for, it's arranged and carried out under the
watchful eyes of a heavy escort, although this is not always
apparent.  Otherwise the openness, the accessibility, and warmth
that has always distinguished General Brown among newspaper
reporters is now gone.  He's a virtual prisoner at the Pentagon,
held practically incommunicado except for the carefully
controlled communications and appearances I have already
mentioned.  As soon as this Audioletter is released, you can
expect to see things happen that may seem to disprove what I am
telling you--for example, General Brown may become more visible
publicly for a while.  It is even conceivable, though highly
unlikely, that this might even be carried to the point of having
General Brown publicly deny that he has come under any new
restrictions in recent months as the result, say, of the
unfavorable publicity he received some months ago.  Should that
happen, keep in mind that General Brown is now a prisoner of war,
imprisoned by the enemies within our own midst; and we've already
seen many examples of the kinds of things American prisoners of
war are forced to say for propaganda purposes.

    Yes, my friends, General Brown stood up for all of us only to
have too many of us let him down by failing to follow through
with our thanks and our overwhelming support; but there is one
way that we can still keep General Brown's great personal
sacrifice on our behalf from being in vain, and that is for us,
each and every one of us as individuals, to begin right now to do
whatever we can to save our beloved country.  My friends, there's
no vacation from reality.  It's up to you to do what you
can--there's no one else; and even though you may not be able to
do more than write a letter or two, do it.  You never know how
far your few words may spread.  They may pass from one person to
another, finally reaching the ear of someone you don't even know,
someone with far more resources than you have who may play a
vital role in saving our nation, yet who may never hear and never
act if you fail to do your part.  If all you have to offer is 5
loaves and 2 fishes, offer it; you just might be amazed at the
results.

    Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #22

Audio letter No. 22

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC.  (1980 current
address: 1629 K St., NW, Washington, D.C.  20006.)

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is March 27, 1977,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 22.

   Few things are certain in life, but one thing we can depend
upon is that things are always changing.  Today a flower blooms
in all its glory; tomorrow it will be withered and forgotten,
leaving behind only a beautiful memory.  Today a child at play
scrapes a knee, and the whole world revolves around a mother's
tender care.  Tomorrow the knee will be healed, leaving behind
only a lesson of caution and comfort.  Today you and I pass
through this world for a little while; tomorrow we will not be
seen, leaving behind only the legacy of our choices for good or
evil.

   Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I alerted you to the
possibility that we may have already failed in our efforts to
prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE, which is drawing closer by the day.  My
question is not "Can the war be stopped?" but "Will it be
stopped?"  There is nothing in this whole world that would please
me so much as to be able to tell you: "Good news.  We have
prevented the war.  We have won."  And when I recorded monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 16 on September 25, 1976, it seemed as though I
might soon be able to give you such good news.  Public reaction
to my AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 1976 had
thwarted an attempted Soviet double-cross of the Rockefellers by
means of underwater missiles along our coast lines, and it had
produced a direct meeting between General George S. Brown,
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and myself.  But then came
the terrible reversals for America that I revealed the following
month in AUDIO LETTER No. 17; and far too many of those who had
pressed the government for action during August 1976 failed to
follow through and support General Brown in his efforts to
continue to protect our beloved country.  Now, as a result, we
have lost General Brown as an effective force for good.

   Now the job of stopping NUCLEAR WAR I is even harder.  It can
still be done, but WILL WE DO IT?  My deep hope is still that the
answer is YES, otherwise I would not be speaking these words.  I
am doing all in my power to bring the truth to you.  So long as I
continue to have access to vital information that bears on your
life and your well-being, I will feel a deep responsibility to
communicate it to you, but then it becomes your responsibility to
choose what you will do about it.

   I have made many suggestions of things you might do to help
save our country.  ln December 1975 I even recorded an entire
tape devoted to nothing else, entitled "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE
AMERICA"; but all I can hope to do is open your mind as to what
you, as an individual, can do.  In this great nation of some
215,000,000 individuals, every person is different.  No two of us
have the same set of abilities, the same opportunities, or the
same avenues for possible action.  There is no way that I, just
one person, even with the help of my associates and information
sources, can provide a simple, cut-and-dried prescription for
what to do; but I am convinced that scattered throughout America
is all of the knowledge, all of the ability to organize, and all
the resources necessary to save our beloved land IF WE WILL BUT
DO IT.

   My three topics for today are:

Topic #1--HOW CIRCUMSTANCES ARE PROVING THE ROCKEFELLER-SOVIET
PLANS TO DESTROY AMERICA

Topic #2--PRESIDENT CARTER'S EFFORTS TO HURRY UP NUCLEAR WAR ONE

Topic #3--HOW THE CHURCH IS BEING USED.

Topic #1--For over four years now I have been trying by every
means at my disposal to alert the American people to the progress
of far-advanced plans to destroy our beloved country as we know
it.  We are seeing the final stages of a plan to create a
world-wide dictatorship acted out before our very eyes with
ourselves ensnared as the victims.  This commitment for a
ONE-WORLD GOVERNMENT under the control of a super wealthy elite
was set in motion in the early years of the 20th Century, using a
small group of powerful tax-exempt Foundations to coordinate and
direct the program.  This program of conquest long ago became so
massive, so powerful, and so complex that the average citizen had
no hope of grasping what was really going on.  And the ONE WORLD
plans were and are so evil that the normal person simply cannot
believe they are real without overwhelming proof.

   But how are things like this proven?  Such a long-range
commitment is a sophisticated form of conspiracy; so, how are
conspiracies exposed and proven?  Well known in legal circles,
and especially in the United States Department of Justice, are
the words of Special Judge Advocate John A. Bingham during the
trial of the conspirators involved in Abraham Lincoln's
assassination.  This trial took place in Washington, D.C. in
1865.  Listen to Judge Bingham's words, and I quote:

  "A conspiracy is rarely if ever proven by positive testimony. 
When a crime of high magnitude is about to be perpetrated by a
combination of individuals, they do not act openly, but covertly
and secretly.  The purpose formed is known only to those who
enter into it.  Unless one of the conspirators betrays his
companions and gives evidence against them, their guilt can be
proved only by circumstantial evidence.  It is said by some
writers on evidence that circumstances are stronger than positive
proof.  A witness swearing positively, it is said, may
misapprehend the facts or swear falsely, but that circumstances
cannot lie."

Judge Bingham's words may come as a surprise to you if you're not
a lawyer.  Contrary to the impression you may have received from
fictional detective stories, circumstantial evidence can be very
powerful indeed and has decided the outcome of vast numbers of
court cases.

   Furthermore, it is the incriminating power of circumstances
that makes any conspiracy most vulnerable to just one
thing--exposure.  If the plans of even the most powerful of
conspirators are made public and put on record before the plans
are executed, often the plans have to be abandoned; because even
if the conspirators succeed in carrying out their plans without
being caught in the act, the circumstances that result from their
criminal actions cannot be hidden, and the advance exposure of
their plan then causes the finger of guilt to point straight at
the conspirators.

   This is the principle I invoke every time I publicly reveal
anything about the plans or actions of those who are conspiring
to destroy America.  As I have always tried to make clear, my
purpose in exposing these criminal plans is to prevent them from
being carried out.  In this way I share a common goal with my
associates and the many sources who provide me with vital
confidential information.  The best achievements of Intelligence
gathering, like diplomacy, often lie in what did not happen--the
crisis quietly deflected.  And our efforts up to now have been
partially successful in that regard.

   But the commitment for world domination that was forged over
two generations ago has grown into an incredible monster with
countless tentacles and tremendous momentum.  As a result, the
four Rockefeller Brothers and their co-conspirators have found it
impossible to completely cover their tracks even though many
modifications in their detailed plans have been made.  So a brief
review of the circumstances that have been developing around us
over the past years is very, very revealing.

   First: Consider Nelson Rockefeller's unsuccessful attempt so
far to become our unelected President and Dictator by way of his
25th Amendment to the United States Constitution.  On October 11,
1974, I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK talking tape entitled: "HOW
TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD
WAR."  At that time Rockefeller still had two months to go being
confirmed as Vice-President; but I revealed that if confirmed,
Rockefeller intended to become President by June 1975.  In June
1975 during a trip to Europe, President Ford suddenly began
taking serious falls--once down an aircraft ramp, and persons
close to him said he also looked pale and unsteady.  The public
was quickly fed stories about the trouble being an old knee
injury from football, even though Ford's doctor stated flatly
that his falls had nothing to do with his knees.

   The following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 I relayed
information that I had been given to the effect that Ford's
troubles had been caused by a powerful virus of unknown origin
which had been arrested successfully.

   The next month I revealed in lectures and also in AUDIO BOOK
Special Tape No. 1 that by September or thereabouts we should
know whether Nelson Rockefeller was to be stopped in his drive to
seize the presidency.  And on September 5, 1975, an alleged
attempt on Ford's life was made by Lynette Fromme; but as I
warned in AUDIO LETTER No. 4 that month, this was only a dress
rehearsal intended to frighten Ford into resigning.  But Ford
refused to resign, and on September 22, 1975, a real attempt on
Ford's life took place.  During a visit to San Francisco, Ford
became the target of Sara Jane Moore, and it truly was only by
the grace of God that he escaped injury.  It had been planned for
Ford when he came out of the St. Francis Hotel to cross the
street and shake hands with people in the crowd.  And there
waited Sara Jane Moore, standing exactly where Ford was supposed
to enter the crowd, armed with a pistol she had bought with a
Treasury agent by her side the previous day, and with her mind
programmed for assassination by electronic programming
techniques!  But at the last moment the assassination plan fell
apart.  A Secret Service agent told the President not to cross
the street, so he headed straight for his limousine.  At that,
Sara Jane Moore raised her gun to fire across the street at Ford,
but her shot was deflected by another onlooker--a Vietnam veteran
in a wheel chair.

   As it turned out, this was indeed the real turning point in
Nelson Rockefeller's hopes for succeeding Jerry Ford as
President.  He ran through a series of additional back-up plans,
all of which my sources enabled me to reveal in advance in my
monthly AUDIO LETTERS--and he failed for the time being.  But he
recently whispered to reporters as he left a White House Award
ceremony, "I'll be back."

   And then there is Fort Knox.  I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK
tape in October 1974 less than three weeks after the so-called
Gold Inspection Visit to Fort Knox by 6 Congressmen, a Senator,
and about a hundred newsmen.  Here was a perfect example of a
case in which the true circumstances alone--namely, the absence
of the huge hoard of gold shown on Treasury and Federal Reserve
books--would have been sufficient all by themselves to prove the
existence of a tremendous financial conspiracy.  Therefore great
care was taken by the Treasury Department to prevent these
circumstances from being detected.  Instead of an objective,
honest inspection of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox by
independent gold experts, the Treasury substituted a public
relations peep show involving people who had no way of knowing
what they should look for.  And while the public was loudly
promised an independent audit by the General Accounting Office of
Congress, the actual so-called Audit Committee consisted almost
entirely of Treasury personnel; and the tiny Audit Report that
was finally issued several months late presented no findings of
fact, concluding only, quote: "We believe" the gold is there!

   My associates and I have amassed mountains of evidence in
connection with the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL.  This twin scandal
involves not only the theft of America's monetary gold supply but
also the storage of leaking canisters of CIA super poison
processed from radioactive Plutonium 239.  From time to time I
have made portions of this evidence public, such as in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975.  In that tape I was able to
reveal the sworn statement of former Congressman Frank Chelf
attesting to the constant flow of gold out of Fort Knox during
the mid 60's and the unsatisfactory answers he received from the
Treasury and the White House about what was going on.  I also
revealed that the official listing of gold shipments from Fort
Knox omits major shipments.  One example of which we had
photographs took place on January 20, 1965; and in response to
such a specific challenge, the Mint admitted the shipment had
taken place.

   But the most important item about Fort Knox that was revealed
in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 was the secret "Central Core Vault"--a huge
central gold storage vault whose existence was not revealed to
the September 1974 visitors and was later denied in writing by
then Treasury Secretary William Simon--another interesting
circumstance because the Central Core Vault was described and
confirmed for us and for Congressman Otis Pike by a former
Commanding Officer of Fort Knox, General John L. Ryan, Jr.  Both
Simon's lie and General Ryan's confirmation are quoted in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 8, January 1976.  The Central Core Vault is the
key to the whole Fort Knox Scandal.

   The joint Rockefeller-Soviet program to conquer the world is
so all-encompassing that many other aspects of it have been
discussed too in the monthly AUDIO LETTER.  But the most
overriding issue of all now is the rapid approach of NUCLEAR WAR
ONE on American soil.  In my very first tape recorded in October
1974 I explained the basic purposes for which the Rockefeller
Brothers were betraying America into nuclear war.  I also
revealed the target schedule for the war to begin--mid 1977 to
mid 1978.  Today some of the details of the war plan have
changed, and the economic and political scenarios being planned
by the Rockefellers at that time, while still on track, are
behind schedule.  But of all Rockefeller plans, the one for
nuclear war on America is most crucial and, as of now, the time
schedule for war is still practically unchanged.  For reasons I
will explain in Topic #2, the Rockefeller Brothers are straining
all their resources to prevent a slippage in the timing of the
war.

   In July 1975, Indira Gandhi clamped down on her own India in a
manner that stunned the world.  She was condemned most bitterly
of all by the Government of the United States!!  The following
month in AUDIO LETTER No. 3 I told you what had actually happened
in India.  Despite all appearances, Indira Gandhi was trying to
save India's freedom--not destroy it.  What she had done was to
smash a CIA project that had been under way for five years to
take over India.  In the same tape I went on to reveal that the
joint Rockefeller plans for war were being revised on India's
account.  The plan for nuclear war on American soil was put back
on a back burner until India could be taken over by war in Asia. 
The target date for India to be attacked under the revised war
plan was March 1977, this month.

   I also told you, quote:

  "The new plans do not involve hostilities on American soil as
they stand right now.  Keep in mind though that further changes
can and probably will occur.  In particular, should Indira Gandhi
be toppled from power any time soon, it may well enable the CIA
to put the original takeover plans back on track, and that would
restore the original plan for war on the United States."

   When I revealed these things 19 months ago, they probably
seemed remote and improbable to you; but by relaxing the
Emergency control she had imposed and holding election on March
21, six days ago, she lost--tragically for not only India but
America as well.  Once again things are not what they seem to be. 
The CIA succeeded in toppling Indira Gandhi by subverting the
free election she wanted for her people--and did so this very
month, March 1977.  This was the original target date for war on
India in the plans I revealed 19 months ago.

   With India taken care of, neutralized for the moment, NUCLEAR
WAR ONE on American soil no longer faces any delay on India's
account.  In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975, I
revealed the grand strategy for the huge Asian war that was to
precede nuclear war on America.  It called for hostilities to
begin in the Middle East with a severe provocation arranged to
justify a limited nuclear strike from the Sinai Desert at
Arab-OPEC oil wells.  This cut-off of oil supplies would cripple
the heart of Europe and Africa, disable Japan, and force
dictatorial measures such as gas rationing and other measures on
the American people by Executive Orders with all of these being
brought about more completely under the domination of the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

   But now, India has been rendered easy prey for a complete
takeover and has therefore dropped in priority.  The war in the
Middle East has been delayed several times.  The most decisive
failure in this regard occurred late in December 1975 when OPEC
oil ministers were kidnapped in Vienna by terrorists in the pay
of the CIA.  Several were supposed to be killed, inflaming
passions and leading to war, but the job was botched and they all
escaped with their lives.  This caused a tremendous slippage in
the plans for war and conquest; and for bungling this top
priority assignment, the CIA station Chief in Athens, Richard
Welch, was executed by the CIA itself, as I revealed in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976.

   In that same tape I publicly revealed the super secret White
House Merge Directive.  This Directive requires that life in the
United States be so altered that it can be comfortably merged
with life in the Soviet Union, and it has been in existence since
the days of Stalin!  Such a way of life is totally alien to
America; but today, under the puppetized administration of Jimmy
Carter, the federal government is now openly run by aliens with
alien philosophies.  Our life is being merged with that of the
Soviet Union.  Even so, the greed and lust for power that
motivates both the Rulers of the Soviet Union and the real Rulers
of America today knows no bounds.  And as early as November 1975
in AUDIO LETTER No. 6, I began warning of the threat of a Soviet
double-cross of the Rockefellers and their Corporate Socialist
intimates here in America.  By the spring of 1976 I reported that
certain Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled major Foundations
were increasingly concerned that such a double-cross was brewing. 
But not so the Rockefeller Brothers and their closest
collaborators, because they have more faith in the Soviet Union
than they do in America.

   Last summer, of course, the Soviet double-cross actually
began.  First, as I reported in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 for
June 1976, I received Intelligence information that a nuclear
weapon had been planted at Seal Harbor, Maine, between the summer
homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller.  Soon afterwards I was
notified that the Soviet Union was planting short-range nuclear
missiles within our own territorial waters ready for launch from
undersea resting places upon remote control.  We were in danger
of an immediate Soviet nuclear surprise attack, not only here but
world-wide, that would destroy all effective naval opposition to
the Soviet Union and thereby guarantee Soviet victory.  Thanks to
the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger as Secretary of
State, the information reaching me about the missiles was not
reaching the Joint Chiefs of Staff.  Intelligence sources
informed me that the only way action could be brought about to
save the situation was by making it a public issue, so that is
what I did by means of AUDIO LETTERS 14 and 15 last summer--and
it worked as I recounted for you in AUDIO LETTER No. 16 for
September 1976.

   But the four Rockefeller Brothers long ago passed the point of
No Return.  In spite of what has happened last summer, they are
continuing with the joint program of conquest with the Soviet
Union, trying to convince themselves that their long-time
alliance is back on track.  But at the same time they are trying
to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE because in the Soviet-Rockefeller
rivalry, time is now on the side of the Soviets.

   My friends, we are now surrounded by circumstances that prove
the existence of a grand conspiracy to rob us of our freedom and
even our very lives.  It is up to each one of us to open our eyes
and see these circumstances for what they really are before it is
too late.

Topic #2--Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I explained what the
words "NATIONAL SECURITY" really mean to those who control
America's government today.  To them National Security begins and
ends with the protection and the advancement of our unelected
Rulers themselves--not you and me.  Nowhere is this more vividly
proven than in the realm of war.  We are taxed to the breaking
point in order to support so-called National Security.  But when
in this Century has all of this prevented a war?  And for all our
vaunted Intelligence gathering and Early Warning Systems, when
have you and I ever benefitted by being warned in advance of an
imminent conflict by the Government?

   It has been proven beyond question, not only by circumstantial
evidence but by documentary evidence as well, that every single
major conflict in the 20th Century involving America has been
known about, in advance, by our Rulers.  But this advance
knowledge has never been communicated to us, the nation at large,
except once.  In 1962 President John F. Kennedy did notify
America of the warnings he had obtained of the imminent Cuban
missile threat.  It was a frightening experience for us all, but
the result was that a successful Soviet surprise attack was
rendered impossible.  Barely a year later, Jack Kennedy died at
the hands of the CIA for ruining this Rockefeller-Soviet gamble
by acting in the interest of true national security--our
security.  But in the cases of two World Wars, Korea, and
Vietnam, a different pattern has consistently applied.

   In 1916 Woodrow Wilson, the first American president to be a
total puppet of the Rockefeller empire, narrowly achieved
re-election with the peace-oriented slogan, "He kept us out of
war."  Meanwhile he was rapidly maneuvering America into war. 
Five months after his re-election on April 6, 1917, America
declared war on Germany, and soon American doughboys were off to
fight "The War to End All Wars."  There thousands died in
trenches while Trustees of the "Carnegie Endowment for
International Peace" encouraged Wilson to extend the war because
of the desirable changes it was producing in American lives!

   In 1940 with Europe once again aflame with war, President
Franklin D. Roosevelt, like Wilson before him, appealed to peace
sentiment in order to be re-elected.  Even now, my friends, I can
still hear those campaign words of F.D.R. ringing in my ears, and
I quote:

  "And while I am talking to you mothers and fathers, I give you
one more assurance.  I have said this before but I shall say it
again, and again, and again: 'Your boys are not going to be sent
into any foreign wars.'"

But even as he won an unprecedented third term in this way,
F.D.R. was moving the United States rapidly toward war.  On May
27, 1941, only six months after his re-election and with Pearl
Harbor still six months in the future, F.D.R. proclaimed an
"UNLIMITED NATIONAL EMERGENCY" to get ready for war!  In the
ensuing months everything possible was done to provoke a Japanese
attack on Pearl Harbor; and when this attack was known to be
imminent, most of the United States Pacific fleet was
conveniently bottled up in Pearl Harbor as a tempting target. 
Only our Aircraft Carriers were kept far away from danger, since
they would be indispensable for retaliation against Japan.

   Certain officials in the American government knew well in
advance that war with Japan was coming.  Proof of this can be
found in many places today, some of them quite unexpected.  One
example is the autobiography of the Rt. Reverend Edward Randolph
Welles II published by Learning, Inc., Manset, Maine  04656.  The
book entitled "THE HAPPY DISCIPLE" is not basically about
politics or economics at all but about the career and life of an
Episcopal minister.  But it so happens that in the fall of 1941,
Bishop Welles was the rector of Christ Church in Alexandria,
Virginia, the church of George Washington.  And on page 62 one
reads the following, and I quote:

  "Another of my friends was Norman H. Davis, President of the
American Red Cross, who was elected to our parish vestry.  He was
very close to President Franklin D. Roosevelt and saw him
frequently.  On November 6, 1941, I had lunch with Mr. Davis in
Washington and learned of the approaching war with Japan which
would begin within five weeks.  I was shaken, and asked Mr. Davis
to urge the President to appoint a national day of prayer, and
handed Mr. Davis a letter I had written to President Roosevelt on
the subject.  Mr. Davis did hand my letter to the President, who
did appoint the following New Year's Day as a 'National Day of
Prayer.'

   I was so moved by the luncheon revelations that later that
very day I sent our mimeographed postal cards to the congregation
stating:

    'The rector is preaching a sermon at 11:00 A.M. service on
Sunday, November 9, which he feels is sufficiently important to
call to your attention.  The sermon will assess the desperate
situation that confronts America this Armistice Day, and suggests
basic Christian attitudes and actions.'

   On Sunday in the course of that sermon I said:

    'Few people realize how great is the possibility that we
shall actually be at war with Japan within thirty days.'

   The congregation was deeply shocked; and in response to many
requests, my booklet of sermons was reprinted with this sermon
added.  Twenty-eight days after that sermon came, December 7, the
Japanese attacked Pearl Harbor and the war was on."

(End of quotation from Bishop Welles' autobiography.)

   Bishop Welles, of course, had no way of knowing that President
Roosevelt's advance knowledge of the impending Japanese attack
was due to conspiracy to bring about that attack, but he did know
that people should be warned about it--and he did just that.  The
federal government, of course, could have warned all of America
of the impending Japanese attack, but then the attack would never
have taken place.  And F.D.R., doing the bidding of the
Rockefellers and their allies, wanted the attack to take place so
that America would go to war!

   In the two-volume AUDIO BOOK talking tape I recorded a year
ago with Colonel Curtis B. Dall, the detailed story of Pearl
Harbor is told by Colonel Dall--and Colonel Dall, who was the
son-in-law and close friend of F.D.R., knows what he is talking
about.

   Next came Korea.  On June 21, 1950, Assistant Secretary of
State Dean Rusk testified before Congress to the effect that
there was no indication of any impending North Korean attack on
South Korea.  Several days later John Foster Dulles went to
Seoul, South Korea, to give reassurances that there was no danger
of invasion from the north.  Then he left quickly because the
North Korean invasion was already being launched!

   As for us, the American people, another nasty surprise. 
Vietnam, too, followed the old pattern.  The last thing the
American people wanted was yet another bloody war.  And during
the election campaign of 1964, Lyndon Johnson knocked down straw
man Barry Goldwater by playing on the Peace theme.  Goldwater was
portrayed as the dangerous man who would get America into a big
war; Johnson, as the 'great compromiser' who would keep us away
from any such danger.  But Johnson had already obtained the
Tonkin Gulf Resolution as the tool he needed, and within 3 months
after his landslide election, Johnson started turning Vietnam
into another big disastrous war.  By June 1965, the commitment of
American combat troops to the nightmare of Vietnam had begun
under the orders of one more president who had promised America
Peace and Prosperity.

   Today it is all happening again.  Jimmy Carter, the puppetized
president who works for David Rockefeller, is raising many
Americans' hope that this time it will be different.  This time
we have a president who wears sweaters and blue jeans and must
therefore be a man of the people.  He must be determined to have
peace since he is so aggressively seeking disarmament; and he has
promised us all that he will never lie.  Yet in a short space of
only two months, President Carter has succeeded in alienating and
angering governments the world over.  Under the guise of
folksiness, he is systematically insulting visiting ambassadors
with undignified receptions and by refusing to attend luncheons
given by the ambassadors.  He is preaching to the world about
"human rights", while doing nothing whatever about the violation
of our own human right to breathe clean air free of contamination
by Soviet plutonium attacks, among other things.

   In the case of the Soviet Union with whom he says he wants to
negotiate arms reduction to prevent war, he is breaching an
agreement not to interfere in one another's internal affairs that
was signed by President Nixon back in 1972.  He says he wants
peace; but the circumstances he is bringing about with great
speed are exactly those that could well lead to war.

   The fact is, my friends, that Jimmy Carter is sweeping us
along swiftly toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE--and the sooner the better,
according to his Rockefeller bosses.  Does he himself know where
he is taking America by following orders?  Bear in mind that he
is conspicuously trying to emulate F.D.R. in every respect right
down to launching his campaign last summer where F.D.R. did in
1932--Warm Springs, Georgia, and reviving the Fireside Chat as
president.  And listen to Carter's own words from a recent
Fireside Chat, and I quote:

  "I remember another difficult time in our nation's history when
we felt a different spirit.  During World War II we faced a
terrible crisis, but the challenge of fighting against Fascism
drew us together.  I believe we are ready for that same spirit
again."

   The Rockefeller Brothers want very badly to have NUCLEAR WAR
ONE begin as soon as possible, for several reasons.  The military
balance is shifting ever more rapidly in favor of the Soviet
Union and away from the Rockefellers even in the realm of secret
super weapons.  As of now, according to all the information I
have been able to obtain, the CIA undersea super missiles in the
Atlantic and Pacific, which I revealed two months ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 20, are still the most awesome nuclear missiles in the
world.  But as I revealed then, these CIA missiles which are to
protect the Rockefellers--not you and me--have become inoperative
in several cases, and there is no way to predict how long those
that remain will last before they, too, fail and start leaking.

   But there is another even more basic worry the Rockefellers
must think about.  As of now, the United States has no
anti-missile weapons at all, and the Soviet Union has only the
Galosh ABM, whose effectiveness against ICBMs is questionable;
but that situation is on the verge of changing drastically very
soon.  Major General George Keegan Jr.,  who retired on January
1, 1977 as head of Air Force Intelligence, is a man who has
repeatedly been first to detect major new developments bearing on
the military balance.  He has said recently, quote: "A global
conflict is in gestation."  And, my friends, he is right. 
Furthermore, he has been sounding the warning that the Soviet
Union is already testing a death ray type weapon called a
"Particle Beam."  Once this weapon is operationally deployed in
the very near future, it could destroy incoming missiles and
render the Soviet Union invulnerable to any ICBM attack,
including an attack by means of the Rockefeller CIA undersea
super missiles.

   Meanwhile the Soviet Union is continuing right now in a
relentless program of planting underwater missiles along the
coastlines of the United States and other countries around the
world.  And in spite of the "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1,
1976, which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17, the Soviet
Union is not honoring the "Nuclear Safe Zone" in planting these
missiles.  The Rockefellers believe that the threat of their CIA
undersea missiles will prevent the Soviet missiles inside the
Nuclear Safe Zone from actually being launched in NUCLEAR WAR
ONE, but that is strictly a gamble on their part because the
threat is there.

   During the latter part of this month, I have been receiving
reports from my own Intelligence sources about the current status
of the world-wide Soviet program of planting short-range
underwater nuclear missiles.  When I recorded monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 15 last August, I gave the coordinates for 64 missiles
and bombs around the world, including 16 in American and Canadian
waters.  That was sufficient to give the Soviet Union the
capability of a surprise knockout punch against all the naval
power in the world opposing the Soviet Union; but now, thanks to
the insane Red Friday policy of the Rockefellers, the situation
has been allowed to become far worse.  Now redundant targeting
insures that any such Soviet attack has a very high probability
of success.  And in addition to naval and other military targets
close to the sea, Soviet underwater missiles are now being aimed
as well at increasing numbers of non-military strategic targets.

   As of my latest tally, the Soviet Union has so far planted a
total of 372 nuclear weapons, mostly missiles but a few bombs, in
coastal waters of the world.  Of these nearly half, 158, are
planted in American waters.  This includes 130 around the
mainland 48 States, 9 more around Alaska, 15 in Hawaiian waters,
and 1 each at Midway Island, Guam, Christmas Island, and the
north approach to the Panama Canal.  The Soviet Union is also
preparing to be able to strike with additional plutonium cloud
attacks against America.  On March 1 America extended its
territorial limits to 200 miles, and Soviet submarines have moved
out beyond this new limit; but now remote control canisters are
being planted along our west coast within 3 to 5 miles of the
coastline.  So far 16 of these have been planted, and more are on
the way.

   There are 29 missiles around the British Isles and 11 in
Canadian waters.  Europe and the Mediterranean are currently
surrounded by 46 Soviet underwater missiles.  Ten of these are in
the Mediterranean.  Along the Atlantic and North Sea coasts,
Spain is targeted by one, France by 3, the Netherlands by 5, and
West Germany by 6.  Three Soviet missiles have been planted in
Danish waters, 7 near Norway, 6 near Sweden, and 5 near Finland. 
In addition, 7 Soviet underwater missiles surround Iceland. 
These are ready to decimate NATO Air Bases there, enabling the
new Soviet supersonic long-range Backfire Bomber in its naval
version to interdict all our vital sea lanes across the North
Atlantic.

   The rest of the pattern world-wide is: First on the Pacific
and Indian Oceans--Australia 7, New Zealand 6, New Guinea 4,
Philippines 6, Indonesia 6, Malay Peninsula 2, Thailand 1, Burma
1, India 1, Taiwan 3, Red China 7, border between Red China and
Vietnam 1, Japan heavily targeted 19, South Korea 8.

   Around southwest Asia, Africa, and the Middle East--Caspian
Sea coast of Iran 3, Persian Gulf coast of Iran and Saudi Arabia
5, in the Oman Gulf 1 (target Iran), Red Sea coast of Saudi
Arabia 2, Black Sea coast of Turkey 1, southern Africa 8.

   And along the coast of Latin America--Mexico 11, Guatemala 1,
British Honduras 1, Honduras 1, Nicaragua 1 even though Nicaragua
itself is being used for certain naval purposes by the Soviet
Union, Costa Rica 3, Venezuela 4 including one in the Orinoco
River, Chile 5, Argentina 1.  The British possession of West
Falkland near southern Argentina is also targeted by 1 Soviet
missile as is the Island of Bermuda.

   The government of any country I have named may obtain the
navigational coordinates of the threatening Soviet underwater
missiles from me upon official request.  Up to now only one
government, that of Great Britain, has requested these latest
coordinates and I have gladly supplied them.  Great Britain is
quietly living up to her majestic name, because alone of all the
nations on earth, the British Government is fending off the
Soviet naval threat with grim determination.  I do not think it
would be in the best interest of the British people for me to
tell you all of the measures being taken in this regard beyond
the fact that the Soviet missiles are being removed from British
waters.  But I will tell you that the British are proving one
very important fact up to now.  Given the will to do so, the
Soviet war threat can be staved off.  For all their modern
weaponry, the Soviets are not supermen except in comparison to
the treasonous jellyfish who control America's government today. 
What is necessary is to recognize circumstances for what they
really are, and then to summon the spirit and determination to do
what must be done; and that, my friends, is exactly what the
British are doing right now.

Topic #3--A few days ago the Reverend Billy Graham was quoted in
newspapers as saying he likes, quote: "symbolic gestures made to
the American people" by President Carter.  He expressed
particular pleasure at the fact that Carter not only plans to go
to Sunday School but even to teach there.  But as for the
substance of the new administration, Dr. Graham said it is just
too early to assess that.

   Millions of Americans are placing their trust in Jimmy Carter,
an untried newcomer to national politics, mainly because of his
Sunday School teacher image.  In the rush, rush world of today,
Jimmy Carter's highly visible piety almost seems like something
out of the past.  A hundred years ago the following words might
have been written about him, and I quote:

  "He became a regular attendant at the Erie Street Baptist
Church, and vigorously did Jimmy give himself to his work.  Jimmy
was publicly baptized in the fall of 1854.  Not long after, Jimmy
was made Clerk of the church, an unusual responsibility for a
mere youth, and indicative of the impression of maturity and
responsibility that he gave to others.  Before many years passed,
he was teaching one of the largest classes in the Sunday School.
As a bright High School graduate, a faithful attendant, a most
staid and responsible young man, Jimmy soon took a prominent part
in all church activities.  He threw himself into them with
characteristic single-mindedness.  As we have said, the church
offered this unemotional youth an outlet; but it also offered his
mother, brothers and sisters the best part of what social life
they enjoyed."

   My friends, I did not just make up these words to fit Jimmy
Carter.  I have simply substituted the name "Jimmy" for the name
"John" in excerpts from the biography of John D. Rockefeller, Sr.
by Allan Nevins.  The striking thing about John D. Rockefeller
was that his vigorous church activities never throughout his
entire career translated into fair, honest, or ethical dealings
in business!  And in a similar vein today, Jimmy Carter, whether
he realizes it or not, is preaching good but doing evil.  How far
might some dictators, past and present, have gotten if they had
eliminated church opposition by themselves going to church?  It
may be that Jimmy Carter is being misled and is not knowingly
doing that which is evil; but either way, my friends, that is no
excuse for the rest of us to blindly follow along like sheep to
the slaughter.  If we do so, history shows clearly what will
happen.

   The end of the world came for the organized church in Russia
after the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917.  Within a few short years
more than 20,000,000 Russians met death at the hands of the
Soviet government.  And while a struggling underground of
believers has persisted to the present day, the church as an
organization that can influence events directly no longer exists. 
And it will not exist so long as Communism remains the official
religion of the Soviet Union.

   In mainland China, too, the same thing happened when Mao
Tse-tung took over.  The church in China was much smaller as a
percentage of the population than it had been in Russia, but its
fate was the same--the end of the world aside from a struggling
remnant of believers forced under ground.  After killing more
than 60,000,000 of his own people, Mao succeeded in turning
Communist China into perhaps the most rigidly regimented society
on earth.  And David Rockefeller, who made Jimmy Carter president
and calls the shots now, has expressed strong approval of this
state of affairs.  For example, several years ago he said, and I
quote:

  "The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership
is one of the most important and successful in human history."

   Now, my friends, if we allow it to happen, we are
next--America and the whole western world.  The elaborate plan
which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975,
is being revised and updated for application in the present
circumstances.  Certain of my sources have expressed great
concern to me recently that a provocation for war in the Middle
East is now being established that will be unlike anything we
have ever seen before.  I repeat, the Rockefellers are
increasingly desperate to get NUCLEAR WAR ONE under way before
they lose what control they still have over events.  To achieve
that purpose, plans are being seriously considered which, if
carried out, could instantly throw all three major religions of
the western world into turmoil in the course of igniting a Middle
East conflict.  My hope is that by warning you of the existence
of such plans, I am making them too dangerous for the
conspirators to carry out.  But in case they are carried out, I
hope that you will now be able to recognize it immediately when
it happens.  We must not allow ourselves to be tricked,
stampeded, or neutralized, my friends.  We have important work to
do.

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source

 

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #21

Audio letter No. 21

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is February 27,
1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 21.

   For some time now I have been warning you of the dangers
facing America.  Now, time is fast running out.  When Jimmy
Carter was inaugurated President on January 20, 1977, a
contingency plan concocted in 1963 was set in motion, and it is
progressing very rapidly.  The key to this particular plan was to
be the placement of a completely puppetized president in office
at a time of rapidly-mounting war threats.  Under this plan,
inadequate performance by the puppet presidents in the face of
these dire threats is intended to enable a take-over of the
country by Rockefeller-controlled military and CIA inner circles. 
In this manner the total dictatorship sought by the four
Rockefeller Brothers is to be brought into being.

   We are now faced with the planned threat of NUCLEAR WAR ONE
with the puppet president now on the scene in the person of Jimmy
Carter.  Carter continually spouts the Rockefeller line as he
learned it from his participation in their TRILATERAL COMMISSION,
but he has no real grasp at all of what he is involved in.

   Meanwhile, the CIA is also being readied for its appointed
role.  Nelson Rockefeller has been busy packing key positions in
the CIA with his "new men"; and to facilitate the enlistment of
required military support for the coming Dictatorship, a military
man who is a member of the Rockefeller inner circle, Admiral
Stansfield Turner, has been selected to head the CIA.  That's why
the earlier nomination of Ted Sorenson ran into a brick wall--he
ran afoul of a game plan he didn't even know about.

   The plan calls for pre-war crisis measures to be used to
condition Americans to accept the elaborate transformation of
America into a total dictatorship, and this pre-war build-up is
going on right now.  Ultimately many millions of Americans are to
be annihilated in a Soviet nuclear attack, which is to be carried
out according to rules laid down in secret agreements negotiated
by former Secretary of State Henry Kissinger.

   As I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May 1976,
this joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan includes a super-secret
"NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE" across the upper portion of the continental
United States within which the Rockefellers and their intimates
plan to ride out the war on Mount Desert and Bartlett Islands off
the coast of Maine, right in the heart of the Nuclear Safe Zone. 
This Nuclear Safe Zone is merely the nuclear-age equivalent of
the orders which were given to Allied Bombing Commands during
World War II not to damage Rockefeller-owned strategic targets in
Germany.  These orders caused such huge important installations
as the I. G. Farben Chemical plants to survive unscathed all the
way through World War II, while other targets and even whole
cities nearby were completely leveled.

   Last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 20 I was able to reveal
the club the Rockefeller Brothers believe they hold over the
heads of the Soviets to make sure the Soviet nuclear attack on
America goes as planned.  In this way the Rockefellers will have
used the Soviets to do their dirty work for them.  In any event,
this club consists of an undersea fleet of 14 super-missiles
targeted on the Soviet Union--five in the Pacific, 9 in the
Atlantic.  These missiles are not under the control of our
Defense Department, and have nothing whatever to do with the
defense of our country as a whole.  They're under the direct
control of the Rockefeller Brothers through their controlled CIA,
and their only purpose is to make sure that the Rockefeller inner
circles in America are not included in the holocaust that is
being arranged for the rest of us.  If all goes as planned, the
CIA super-missiles deep in the ocean will never be fired at all. 
Only if there should be a Soviet double-cross would there be an
attempt to fire them, and under those circumstances they would
act only as vengeance weapons.

   Yet as awesome as these CIA super-missiles are, they cannot
prevent a Soviet double-cross.  In fact, they have already
provoked one double-cross.  Last summer the Soviet Union sneaked
in under the CIA missile umbrella and began planting short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles in our own territorial waters,
hoping to achieve such total surprise that the CIA undersea
super-missiles would never be fired.  The limited exposure of
this threat, which I was able to achieve by means of AUDIO
LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 1976, was sufficient
to ruin the Soviet surprise, so an attack at that time was
averted.  The joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan is back on track
for the time being, but now both sides are watching for a chance
to double-cross each other.  Meanwhile, as I reported last month,
the presence of the Soviet missiles in our waters are now being
incorporated into the joint war plan.

   For the first time in many years, Civil Defense, of which we
have none, has again become the subject of wide concern.  We are
again hearing radio test alerts on the Emergency Broadcasting
System which will be used in the event of war.  It has even been
hinted that we may soon experience unannounced air-raid drills, a
practice that could be especially effective in conditioning us
all to the idea that war is imminent.

   Only a few days ago, on February 11, 1977, President Carter
became the first president to fly with great publicity in a
special airplane now fitted as a flying Command Post to be used
in nuclear war.  The article above this in the New York Daily
News carried the headline, quote: "CARTER GETS A PREVIEW OF WORLD
WAR III."  Just a year ago such headlines would have been
unthinkable.  Now they are all around us.

   Because the plan now under way requires that military support
be arranged for the new Dictatorship, it was essential that
General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
be neutralized as I said he would be in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
17.  General Brown played a pivotal role in preventing a Soviet
nuclear surprise attack on the United States during August and
September 1976; but that will not happen again, my friends.  The
campaign which began in October 1976 to render General Brown
ineffective in his efforts to protect America has now succeeded. 
He is no longer able to influence events to any significant
extent.  That is why when Carter demanded on January 12, 1977,
that studies be performed toward eliminating 75% to 80% of our
Intercontinental Missiles, General Brown simply agreed to have
the studies done.  Can you imagine?

   My friends, now that we have lost General Brown, there is no
one left in the entire United States Government to help us. 
There are still many patriotic individuals in the Government, of
course, but they are not the ones in positions of power.  Only
massive public pressure--informed, angry, and determined--now has
any chance of stopping the carefully-planned war to kill millions
of us and enslave the rest.  Every one of us must work to bring
about public awareness and pressure in whatever time we have
left.  But suppose we do not succeed--then what?!  I believe the
time has come to face that question squarely and honestly.

   It may well be that we have already failed in our efforts to
help prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  Only God can know, but we dare not
give up because the victory may yet be ours.  But the fact is
that many Americans do not want to listen.  They are not ready,
and some will not be ready to listen until catastrophe comes upon
their heads.

   If NUCLEAR WAR ONE does come here, my friends, millions will
die, but there will also be some survivors.  You owe it to
yourself, to your family, and to our whole society to do whatever
you can to be among the survivors.  The godless dictatorship
being fashioned by our unelected Rulers will collapse in the end;
and when it does, there must be people left who know what America
was all about, and what went wrong.  Because you are willing to
hear the truth now before disaster arrives, YOU are that people. 
And if we are all forced to pass through the dark tunnel of war
and bungling dictatorship, it will fall your lot to help lead our
people out of darkness and into the sunlight once again on the
other side.

   My three special topics for today are:

Topic #1--HOW OUR NATIONAL SECURITY WAS REALLY LOST
Topic #2--PRE-WAR AMERICA, 1977
Topic #3--THE END OF AN ERA.

Topic #1--For more than a generation, since the outbreak of World
War II in fact, Americans have been preoccupied with the idea of
national security.  But what is National Security?  One concept
of national security is the familiar one promoted day in and day
out by the federal government.  According to the Government,
national security is a matter that is just too complex for most
of us to understand and must always be wrapped in secrecy,
intrigue, and more secrecy.  When we see diplomatic maneuvers
which seem to help our enemies while harming our friends or even
ourselves, we're always told we simply don't understand the
so-called National Security considerations that are involved. 
The map of the free world shrinks ever smaller, our country grows
visibly weaker and weaker, yet the federal bureaucracy knows
best, we are assured, and will take care of it all for us.  But
while you and I are both forced to pay the bill for it all, we
are never, never let in on what it is really all about.

   What is called "National Security" today by the Government
would be better described as security for our Secret Rulers. 
They see themselves as the embodiment of our nation, just as
royalty did in times past.  Thus to them, so-called National
Security is nothing more than a king's "X" to prevent the public,
you and me, from learning things about governmental doings that
could endanger our Rulers' security.  Vital secrets that are
routinely betrayed to our deadliest enemies are kept hidden from
our view.

   The Government's version of National Security involves ever
greater centralization of all power and all decision-making into
just a few hands.  Increasingly it involves spying on the
citizens of our own nation, and now it even includes diplomatic
manipulations that have betrayed us straight down the road to
NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  This is what the words National Security really
mean to those who secretly control the United States
Government--a government that used to be ours, but is no more. 
What is called National Security obviously is not what most of us
naturally think of when we hear these words.  The Government's
version of National Security, in other words, is an illusion and
a fraud.  Real national security has to be rooted in the people,
who are the nation.

   When we think of national security we usually think of the
ability of the nation as a whole to protect itself from damage by
other nations--politically, economically, and if need be
militarily.  But there's another side to national security that
is actually more basic, yet we in America have been led to
gradually neglect it and finally lose it altogether over the past
100 years or so.  I refer to the internal stability that has been
destroyed by over-centralization.

   Gone are the days when America consisted of thousands of
communities which could, if need be, survive for indefinite
periods without supplies from distant sources.  And gone are the
days when consumers could choose from among a wide variety of
products produced by true competitors.  Instead, most of the
things we now have to have for life come from somewhere else,
often we know not where; and there is little competition or real
choice left.  The flow of essential commodities can now be turned
off at will by the corporate socialists and a few central spigots
in order to bring America to a grinding halt.  Most Americans
today never give this state of affairs a second thought.  The
young cannot imagine things being any different; and most of
those who are old enough to remember a different way of life are
willing to settle for what we have today with the comforts and
luxuries that have become commonplace.

   What has happened, my friends, is that we have all become
addicts.  There is an addiction that underlies our entire way of
life today, and this same addiction has made it possible for us
to be brought to the threshold of Totalitarian World Government
and nuclear holocaust.  My friends, we are addicts--addicts to
energy.  There's no precedent in history for the magnitude of the
suffering man can now bring about, because there is no precedent
in history for the energy addiction that now grips America and
the world.

   For thousands of years mankind got by on the ancient and
renewable forms of energy such as animal power, water power, wind
power, and the burning of wood.  Then came coal, and the
industrial revolution was spawned.  But it was petroleum, thanks
to its great convenience and high energy output, that was
destined to make true energy addicts of us all.

   It is typical of addictions that they take time to develop,
and that is true of our energy addiction of today.  It began very
gradually over 100 years ago, and has built up over several
generations.  During the early years after petroleum first made
its appearance, we were still in the take-it-or-leave-it stage;
but gradually it found more and more uses, and then whole
technologies were spawned which depend specifically on petroleum
energy, such as the automobile and the airplane.  These
technologies gradually took on the character of necessities,
rather than optional luxuries, and from that point onward we were
true addicts.

   The same way, our energy addiction expanded to include
dependence on natural gas and electricity.  Even our food
production became increasingly dependent upon uninterrupted
supplies of non-renewable energy.  The American farmer, blessed
already with a rich land, began to retire his ox-drawn plow in
favor of a gasoline-powered tractor, and soon expanded his
productivity still further with other farm machinery--all of it
run by petroleum energy.  It became possible for fewer farmers to
feed us all; and farmers who failed to keep up with these new
trends, whether for financial reasons or otherwise, gradually
disappeared from the scene.

   Then came high-yield hybrid crops, petroleum-derivative
insecticides and fungicides to protect these delicate hybrids
from damage, and fertilizers made with natural gas as a raw
material in order to make them grow better.  Farms became bigger,
fewer, and more expensive; huge agribusinesses, energy-intensive
and geared for high productivity, began to dominate American
agriculture, making it still harder for the small family farm to
compete.

   Meanwhile, petroleum energy made possible fast freight
transportation over long distances.  High-volume food
distributors have exploited this in such a way that nearby small
suppliers of many foods are by-passed in favor of a few
centralized huge supply sources far away.  This, of course, has
caused many of the nearby supplies that used to exist in many
areas to dry up and disappear.  For example, every town of any
size used to have access to one or more local dairies which
processed the milk produced by cows in that area.  But today many
of the familiar, dependable local dairies of the past are gone;
and if you can find anyone who can tell you where the milk you
buy comes from, you may well discover that it comes from a
central processing plant in another state.

   We have now reached the point where practically all the
necessities of life, including food and water, reach us only by
means of non-renewable, centrally-controlled energy.  The energy
pushers have done their job well, making it appear that nothing
more than natural trends were at work.  They have fed our
addiction beyond the point of no return, taking care not to allow
competing sources of energy to develop that could get out of
their control and ruin their grip on us.

   Our energy addiction is now to be used against us for their
own purposes.  When we're told now that we must conserve, it
means that we must knuckle under to sacrifices as we are
gradually ground under the heel of artificial shortages and
rising costs.

   My friends, the role of energy in our society is so
all-pervasive today that it is hard to describe, and it is the
Rockefellers who first realized how powerful a tool it could be
for their own ends.  John D. Rockefeller, Sr. built the giant
Standard Oil monopoly with ruthless determination to corner the
market on petroleum.  The trust-busting era merely caused him to
devise better ways to hide his control while his program
proceeded without letup, and soon the Rockefeller Standard Oil
empire became involved in international intrigue and wars to
overcome foreign competitors as well.  The process has continued
down to the present with wars, skirmishes, coups, and so forth,
enabling the Rockefeller empire to maintain a strangle hold on
most of the world's oil.  In recent years this has been made
virtually airtight through control of most of the free world's
refining capacity.  So today it is the four Rockefeller Brothers
who are in a position to turn off the vital energy supplies to
which we have become addicted for our very lives.  We have all
become so accustomed to the steady supply of electricity, natural
gas, and petroleum products that the illusion of reliability has
been created.

   Alternative means of surviving by means of local resources
have gradually fallen into the disuse and have disappeared, while
we all have been lulled into a life or death dependence on
centralized energy sources controlled by the Rockefeller
Brothers.  And they're not interested in your security or mine. 
Their horizon is the world and how to control it--not the mere
survival of America.  Therefore when they turn the energy spigots
off, as they are beginning to do now, they will be turning off
our national security with it--in other words, we have NO
national security.  So long as the necessities of life remain
under the centralized control of men who are determined to murder
our beloved country, we will never again have true national
security.  Only if we, the people, will rise up and take back the
government that has been stolen from us, will the many things be
done that are necessary to restore true national security to our
land.

Topic #2--When I recorded my AUDIO BOOK tape on the coming
depression and war in October, 1974, I explained the real purpose
that caused World Wars I and II.  In both cases, Germany was
nothing more than a huge pawn in an ever bigger game of
international conquest.  Instead, as I said then, through two
World Wars America's Secret Rulers brought Great Britain to her
knees.

   The American people as a whole feel strong kinship to the
British, so it seems incredible that our Secret Rulers would have
deliberately smashed Britain through war.  But listen to what
former Prime Minister Sir Harold Wilson said last month on
January 22, 1977 on a television talk show.  When he was asked to
explain the economic crisis Britain is in, he said, quote:

  "Two world wars took all our investments; and the Lend-Lease
Agreement with the Americans not only took all our markets, which
was justified as we didn't want shipping going to Latin America,
but we had to give them all our inventions."

Thus the three decades from the beginning of World War I to the
end of World War II were used to concentrate the bulk of the
world's economic might into the hands of those who ruled America
secretly, behind the scenes--namely the ROCKEFELLERS.

   The technologies and markets of friend and foe alike were
stolen and poured into the coffers of the Corporate Socialist
empire controlled by the four Rockefeller Brothers.  But this
emergence of America into sudden world dominance was never
intended to be more than a temporary phenomenon by those who had
secretly caused it to happen.

   A dominant share of the economic and technological might of
the world had been centralized under American control so that we
could then serve as an immense reservoir for transfusions to the
Soviet Union!  The godless dictatorship set up by the Bolsheviks
in Russia in 1917 with the help of Rockefeller financing was to
be the real wave of the future.  It represented the ultimate in
monopoly--total control over every aspect of peoples' lives.  But
the Soviet System which is intended as the pattern for TOTAL
WORLD DOMINATION is artificial and unnatural, and that is why the
Soviet Union had to be built up by massive transfusions from
outside--transfusions of money, food, economic and technological
know-how, everything.  Now the transfusions are virtually
complete.

   It took three decades to drain Britain and Europe to build up
America as a reservoir for the Soviet Union, and it has taken
three more decades to drain the American reservoir and make the
Soviet Union the world's most powerful nation in material terms. 
The United States is now following Great Britain down the road to
ruin, and for the same reasons.  The Rockefeller Brothers and
their intimates now arrogantly believe they can no longer be
stopped in their plan of world conquest.  They are convinced
there is no power greater than themselves, and they are becoming
more brazen by the day.

   Jimmy Carter has been programmed to proceed with all possible
speed in dismembering what remains of our nation's defenses while
at the same time promoting public awareness of war tensions here
and abroad.  He is making the terrible mistake of thinking he is
actually President.

   Meanwhile long-time Rockefeller agent, Walter Mondale, stands
ready and waiting for the moment IF and WHEN Jimmy Carter is
erased from the scene.  Mondale is by far the most powerful
Vice-President in history next to Nelson Rockefeller, and he's in
a position to pick up the reins of presidential power at a
moment's notice.

   As for Nelson Rockefeller, he hasn't given up either.  After a
recent White House ceremony at which he was given an award,
Rockefeller whispered to reporters as he left: "I'll be back."

   Jimmy Carter is functioning with a skeleton government at the
present time here in Washington.  Huge gaps remain deliberately
unfilled in the Carter Administration--such as the Chairmanship
of the United States Export-Import Bank.  Normally positions at
Eximbank are among the most coveted plums in all of Washington,
and yet up to now they remain unfilled.  Why?  Because, my
friends, the Export-Import Bank is a peacetime operation, and it
will be shut down when war comes as it is planned to do.

   The Carter Cabinet is a war cabinet, and the unprecedented
measure was taken of rushing their confirmation hearings through
Congress even before Carter took office.  On hand to preside over
America's final destruction in NUCLEAR WAR ONE are men of
unchallenged qualifications for that task--such as Secretary of
State Vance, Secretary of Defense Brown, and National Security
Advisor Brzezinski, among others.  These men were in the
forefront of those who argued in favor of America's involvement
in the disaster called Vietnam, and helped guide the conduct of
the war in such a way as to guarantee our defeat!  Now all they
have to say about Vietnam is, quote: "We made a mistake."  And
with that, our country has been placed in their hands once again.

   We hear continually about "government reorganization", but
what does this really mean?  For one hint, consider the fact that
Brzezinski is on record as saying, quote:

  "The reality of our times is such that a modern society, such
as the United States, needs a central, coordinating, and
renovating organ which cannot be made up of 600 people."

In other words, the United States Congress in its present form is
obsolete and should be replaced by something else!!  Brzezinski,
by the way, is a close neighbor and associate of David and Nelson
Rockefeller's at Seal Harbor, Maine.

   And then there are the words of Andrew Young, appointed United
States Ambassador to the U.N. by Carter.  In that position, Young
is charged with speaking for everyone in the United States, yet
he has said, quote: "Communism has never been a threat to me." 
Do words like that speak for you, my friends?  Or for your
neighbors?  Or for any real American?  But those words have been
allowed to stand, and the man who said them is still the United
Nations Ambassador.

   We are moving rapidly toward the introduction of the secret
new Rockefeller Constitution for America which I revealed and
described in AUDIO BOOK tape released in July 1975.  The plan is
now to accomplish this as part of the scenario now under way to
take over the country under threat of war.  Even Carter's new CIA
Director, Admiral Turner, has been in contact with Carter for
over five years--not about military matters but governmental
reorganization.

   And so our unelected Rulers continue to plan and scheme to
take full advantage of the threat of war and even NUCLEAR WAR ONE
itself to destroy our way of life for their own purposes.  The
orchestrated pre-war build-up of tensions continues.  In recent
weeks, western Europe has suddenly been highlighted as our
nuclear-age Dunkirk because doubts are now being expressed that
NATO forces there could withstand a surprise attack by the Warsaw
Pact forces.

   And here at home it is now officially acknowledged that the
Soviet Union is shooting for military superiority over the West. 
Unofficially, some say they already have it.  Worse yet, the
Rockefeller-controlled CIA just 'happens' to have been grossly
underestimating the Soviet military build-up for a decade or
more.  Can you imagine?  Suddenly now we are told that the Soviet
Union has been spending four times the previous CIA estimates for
new weapons and military installations.  The deliberate
underestimates, which were arranged for years by Rockefeller
insiders in the CIA, had just one purpose: To undermine any
arguments about a serious Soviet threat and thereby to insure a
decline in American military might.

   But now that NUCLEAR WAR ONE is imminent, the CIA estimates
can no longer make any difference in our preparedness, so now the
estimates have suddenly been raised in order to demoralize us and
convince us that defeat at Soviet hands is all but inevitable. 
Having arranged for our Constitutional military forces to be
weakened as much as possible, the CIA itself has become the most
powerful military organization in the United States--a fact
symbolized by the fact that the CIA will now be headed by Four
Star Admiral Turner, a Rockefeller insider who will retain his
military rank.

   The CIA has been transformed into a combined super-Military
and Secret Police controlled by persons loyal only to the
Rockefeller Brothers instead of the country as a whole.  This is
in complete violation of the original charter of the CIA and of
the CONSTITUTION of the United States.

   Sixteen years after the establishment of the CIA at the
instigation of David Rockefeller, former President Harry S.
Truman expressed public regrets over having done so.  On December
21, 1963, he wrote for the Washington Post, quote:

  "For some time I've been disturbed by the way the CIA has been
diverted from its original assignment.  It has become an
operational and at times a policy-making arm of the government."

Saying that he had never visualized, quote, "peacetime cloak and
dagger operations" for the CIA, he added, and I quote:

  "This quiet Intelligence arm of the President has been so
removed from its intended role that it is being interpreted as a
symbol of sinister and mysterious foreign intrigue, and a subject
for cold war enemy propaganda."

   These words of President Truman were published just a month
after an American president, John F. Kennedy, had been brutally
removed from office by a successful CIA operation, as I revealed
in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975.  Already the CIA
had broken free of presidential control, and a decade later a CIA
operation called "WATERGATE" replaced an elected President and
Vice-President with appointees for the very first time in
American history!

   Today the United States is surrounded by 90 short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles planted by the Soviet Union
within our own territorial waters.  Our Constitutional military
services have been under presidential orders since October 1,
1976 NOT to remove them; and now that General Brown has been
neutralized, no effort whatever is being made to do so.  And the
only real counter-threat to these Soviet underwater missiles is
the fleet of 14 awesome super-missiles targeted on the Soviet
Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans.  These undersea super-missiles, as I revealed last month
in AUDIO LETTER No. 20, are not under normal military control but
are under direct Rockefeller command through their controlled
CIA.  Their purpose, as I have already explained, is not to
prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE or even to retaliate when it comes. 
Their purpose is only to insure that the Soviet Union abides by
the joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan to spare the Rockefeller
Brothers and their intimates while incinerating the rest of us.

   But as I revealed last month, the super-secret CIA missiles
have begun deteriorating and leaking.  One missile in the Pacific
is totally disabled, and several others are leaking plutonium
from their warheads into the surrounding waters, and probably are
useless also.

   One of the leaking missiles which I mentioned last month is
Atlantic Missile No. 8, which is located in the ocean about 290
miles east-southeast of Jacksonville, Florida.  On February 7,
1977, just two weeks after I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
20, the beach near Jacksonville, Florida became the scene of a
mystifying phenomenon.  For no apparent reason, whales suddenly
began beaching themselves in large numbers.  Within a short time
over 120 whales beached themselves only to die there.  That
evening NBC News reported that no autopsies were being performed
on the whales, that this was to be left to the Smithsonian here
in Washington.  The next day that story was retracted, but
meanwhile I know from my own sources that a high-ranking
Smithsonian official who is a covert CIA agent went to Florida
immediately to investigate and to make sure that the real cause
of the whales beaching themselves did not become publicly known.

   One story the Smithsonian circulated as a possible explanation
for the strange behavior of the whales was that some sort of
parasites, caused perhaps by pollution, had caused the whales to
lose their senses of depth and direction.  But that, of course,
does not explain why they would all have come ashore out of their
natural habitat, rather than wandering aimlessly at sea.  And it
explains even less what happened when some of the whales were
towed off the beach and into the sea.  In most cases they
unerringly headed straight for shore and beached themselves
again.  Even though death awaited them on the beach, they
preferred that to their natural habitat of the sea.

   What you have not been told, my friends, is that a number of
the whales were dissected, and in practically every case their
stomachs were completely empty--they were sick.  But the real
problem was not in their stomachs but in their lungs, which were
heavily contaminated with plutonium.  A few days after the whales
began beaching themselves, I was informed by my Intelligence
sources that the plutonium leakage from Atlantic Missile No. 8
had accelerated so rapidly that plutonium was now contaminating
the Atlantic in a fan that touches the east coast all the way
from about half way between Savannah and Brunswick, Georgia,
southward almost to Daytona Beach, Florida.  It was strongest in
the middle, right where the whales came ashore near Jacksonville.

   My friends, I am not a marine biologist, and I don't know
exactly how the whales got water-borne plutonium into their
lungs, but the facts speak for themselves, somehow it happened;
and once there, the plutonium produced a fungus-like infection
that interfered with their breathing.  Finally in desperation,
the whales (which are mammals like you and me) began casting
themselves onto the beach, gasping for air.

   By now the whales have been collected and buried in the Gerwin
Road landfill in Jacksonville, Florida, and forgotten by most as
yesterday's news.  But we would do well not to ignore the lesson
of the beached whales; because now, like the whales, our drinking
water in the United States now contains plutonium too.  The
Soviet injections of plutonium into our atmosphere which began
last October 1976 have continued and, in fact, are now
accelerating; and now fallout of this material has contaminated
our own drinking water nationwide.  It is invisible, it is
tasteless, but it is there.

   As I reported last month, a dramatic increase in flu-like
illness was to be expected all across America, thanks to the
Soviet plutonium attack No. 3 which took place in late December
and early January; and now it's happening.  Outbreaks of (quote)
"flu and flu-like illnesses" have been reported this month in at
least 23 states.  Perhaps you yourself have had a round of
something lately that seems like the flu, yet may have seemed
somehow different from flu you have had in the past, or perhaps
you have just noticed that something is "going around."  Even
this recording was delayed one week by flu-like illnesses which
hit myself and some of my associates very hard.

   I wish I could tell you that the flu-like illness season were
about over, but unfortunately the opposite is true.  A fourth
Soviet plutonium attack began this month on February 3 involving
25 Soviet submarines.  This time they were deployed along the
entire West coast from Seattle to San Diego, and they injected
plutonium into our atmosphere over a period of approximately two
weeks.  And now just three days ago on February 24 a fifth Soviet
plutonium attack on the United States has begun.  This time there
are 30 Soviet submarines, again deployed all the way from Seattle
to San Diego.  Furthermore, I am now able to confirm that there
is a weather-modification aspect to the Soviet plutonium attacks.

   In the past year or so the United States Environmental
Protection Agency, the EPA, has issued warnings, so-called, that
fluorocarbon propellants from household aerosol cans are damaging
the ozone layer far up into the atmosphere.  We have been warned
that this could have very dangerous effects on our environment;
and as a result, a trend away from aerosol spray cans is now
under way.  There may be some merit to that argument, but as
usual the EPA is merely seizing on a minor danger in order to
cover up a far more real immediate and major threat.

   The means by which the plutonium is being dispersed into our
atmosphere by the Soviet submarines is none other than by
fluorocarbon propellants discharging upward into the air at a
steep angle.  Each submarine in each attack exhausts huge
quantities of fluorocarbon propellant in such a way that it is
far more effective in damaging our ozone layer than millions of
ordinary household aerosol cans in normal use.  Even before the
plutonium attacks began last October, my Intelligence sources
believe that fluorocarbon injections like this into our
atmosphere were under way for some time.  The introduction of the
plutonium to these attacks last October was therefore an easy
matter.

   But by other means, also, weather-modification activities by
both the CIA and the Soviet KGB have been in progress for some
time now for use in warfare.  Because of these facts, I believe I
should warn you about one thing which, at this time, I must label
as conjecture.  Normally, as you know, my policy is to tell you
only those things which I have been able to confirm as
established fact; but this time I believe an exception is
warranted.  The timing, severity, and pattern of the huge winter
storm that struck the north and east portions of the United
States may well have been a massive pre-war weather-modification
experiment as a rehearsal for similar measures in NUCLEAR WAR
ONE.  Had war broken out while those weather patterns persisted,
large portions of the upper United States within the "Nuclear
Safe Zone" would have been immobilized by weather and therefore
could have been spared from attack--seemingly for natural
reasons.

   It may be that weather control is the key to the riddle of the
"Nuclear Safe Zone", enabling it to escape attack while the
southern two-thirds of the United States along with Alaska and
Hawaii endure a nuclear holocaust.  If this is the case, then a
future storm pattern that immobilizes the part of the United
States above the 40th Parallel could be the signal that a Soviet
nuclear attack is imminent.  I emphasize again that, as of now,
this is conjecture on my part.  I have not been able to confirm
it, but there are so many facts that point in this direction that
I believe you should be warned of this possibility.  The
Rockefeller Brothers, in any case, are doing everything in their
power to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE, so anything can happen.  They
are in a hurry because they want to make sure that the war takes
place while enough of their super CIA missiles are still
operational to provide an effective blackmail threat against the
Soviets.  But as for America's officially acknowledged fleet of
Intercontinental Missiles, that is another matter.

   I have never revealed what went on when I saw General George
S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, in his Pentagon
offices last September 16, 1976, but I think I should now mention
just one item which has now acquired urgent new significance.

   One of the things I discussed with General Brown was the
horrendous Intelligence gap created by then Secretary of State
Henry Kissinger.  Because of this deliberate Intelligence gap,
General Brown and the Joint Chiefs have been denied crucial
information needed to protect our country.  In this connection,
General Brown did not know about the super-secret "Nuclear Safe
Zone" negotiated for the private benefit of the Rockefeller
Brothers and their intimates by Kissinger.  In fact, it seemed
unbelievable because he pointed out the presence of several prime
targets--namely, ICBM installations inside the "Nuclear Safe
Zone."  But now Jimmy Carter is pushing for those very ICBM sites
to be shut down.  That is the meaning of Carter's incredible
order to General Brown at the Blair House meeting of January 12,
1977, and by that means the Rockefellers plan to make the
"Nuclear Safe Zone" off limits to NUCLEAR WAR ONE attack.

Topic #3--Whatever the future holds for us, my friends, one thing
is for sure.  We are witnessing the end of an era.  Politically,
economically, socially, and spiritually we are entering a time of
tumultuous change, but the question still remains: Change in what
direction?

   Will this be the end of the era of destructive Rockefeller
control over our lives?  Or will we just sit back wringing our
hands and let them succeed in their plans to snuff out the era of
human freedom?  Might we look forward to the new era of renewed
respect for nature as God in His wisdom created it?  Or will we
condemn ourselves by inaction to a suicidal era of ever
increasing destruction of our beautiful world under the greedy
exploitation of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet allies? 
Will the struggle that is being forced upon us lead us at last to
a new dawning of the day of the individual?  Or will we submit
without struggle to the perfect equality of slaves in the
Rockefeller-Soviet world empire?

   My friends, it will take organized, dedicated, selfless action
to sound the alarm and bring pressure to bear in time to turn
away from total disaster for our land.  But the hour is now so
late; where can we hope for this action to come from?  If history
is any guide, my friends, there is only one institution left.

   I have pointed out on previous occasions that what is
happening in America today is a ghastly replay of what happened
to Germany before World War II--with one difference.  Those who
brought Hitler to power as a pawn are themselves coming to power
here in America.

   With this in mind, I will now read a very rare letter to you. 
For reasons which will become apparent, it will be safely stored
away again under lock and key by the time you hear this
recording.  The letter, written by a distinguished churchman, is
dated October 16, 1945, and is addressed to Dr. Albert Einstein. 
I will now read directly from the letter:

  "My dear Dr. Einstein:

   I have seen you reported as having said, quote: 'Being a lover
of freedom, when the revolution came in Germany I looked to the
Universities to defend it, knowing that they had always boasted
of their devotion to the cause of truth; but NO, the Universities
immediately were silenced.  Then I looked to the great editors of
the newspapers whose flaming editorials in days gone by had
proclaimed their love of freedom; but they, like the
Universities, were silenced in a few short weeks.  Only the
Church stood squarely across the path of Hitler's campaign for
suppressing the truth.  I never had any special interest in the
church before, but now I feel a great affection and admiration,
because the church alone has had the courage and persistence to
stand for intellectual truth and moral freedom.  I am forced thus
to confess that what I once despised, I now praise
unreservedly.'"

Still continuing with the letter:

  "Would you be kind enough to let me know whether this
represents your feeling now that hostilities have ceased?  I
should be very grateful to know how you feel about this now.

   With great admiration and every good wish, I am
                                          Yours faithfully,"

and there follows the signature of the writer.  Below there is a
postscript as follows, and I quote:

  "P.S. - The statement is reported to have been made by you
before the United States entered the war, and I thought possibly
you might have had some occasion to change your opinion in the
light of later developments.  I naturally hope that you haven't."

The writer of this letter received it back with the following
answer in longhand along the right-hand margin, and I quote:

  "The reproduction of my verbally given statement is essentially
correct, and I have not changed my opinion concerning this
point."

There follows the signature:

"A. Einstein."

   My friends, the churches in Nazi Germany recognized the
onslaught of evil and stood up against it.  Today America faces
the same evil, multiplied a thousand times over.  But where?  oh
where are the churches today?

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #20

Audio letter No. 20

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

This recording is a product of Audio Books, Inc., Box 16428, Ft.
Worth, Texas  76133

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is January 24,
1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 20.

   Just four days ago, on January 20, 1977, our nation witnessed
the crowning achievement of Rockefeller public relations
propaganda, the so-called People's Inaugural of Jimmy Carter. 
Through emotional appeals to the American Dream, millions of
Americans are being enticed to let their hopes soar based on
nothing but blind trust.  But the most crushing disappointments
are always those which follow the brightest hopes; and the false
hopes that are being raised by Jimmy Carter will come crashing to
the ground all too soon.

   Even so, there is something to be thankful for that deserves a
moment's reflection.  Nelson Rockefeller still has been denied
the goal he has sought for so long--seizure of the Presidency and
his establishment as America's first openly visible Dictator. 
Never before has a bright light been focused on the real plans
and actions of Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers; but now,
after developing a total of nine scenarios and back-up plans for
placing himself in the Oval Office through the back door of his
25th Amendment, he has run through them all, and for the moment
he has failed.

   Major factors that have upset and delayed the plans of the
Four Rockefeller Brothers for total control have included such
things as: the twin Gold and Plutonium Scandal at Fort Knox which
is still being covered up, Indira Gandhi's crackdown on the CIA
in the summer of 1975, and of course their double-cross by the
Soviet Union that began last summer with the planting of
underwater nuclear missiles along our shores.  And according to
my own Intelligence sources, the glare of the truth has played an
important role in keeping Nelson Rockefeller out of the
presidency, so far.  In recent weeks, support for the leadership
of the Four Rockefeller Brothers among their corporate socialist
allies has been weakened by the shock of the Soviet double-cross. 
Nelson finally abandoned his ninth take-over scenario involving
the Electoral College scheme under pressure from brother David. 
Thus, David Rockefeller, the most powerful of the Four Brothers,
is now playing the role that their late uncle, Winthrop Aldrich,
always used to play in seeing to it that Nelson never became
President.

   What Nelson Rockefeller may do from this point onward remains
to be seen.  Only one thing is for sure: Like the Soviets, he
never gives up; and he has not given up on his dream of becoming
the President and Dictator of the United States--and ultimately
of the world.

   But for the time being it is his brother David who is now
President-by-proxy through his control of Jimmy Carter.  What we
are witnessing in the transition from the Ford to the Carter
Administration is nothing more than a changing of shifts in the
one real political party that runs America--the Rockefeller
Party.  The Soviet Union is run decade after decade by fewer than
one percent (1%), who belong to the ruling Communist Party; and
the United States of America is now run decade after decade by
fewer than 1%, who belong to the ruling Rockefeller
Party--whether they call themselves Republicans, Democrats,
Liberals, or Conservatives.

   Jimmy Carter, who campaigned as a Washington outsider, owes
his come-from-nowhere election to the fact that David Rockefeller
selected him some years ago as the ideal puppet for his purposes. 
Carter was invited to join David's TRILATERAL COMMISSION and was
then steeped in Trilateralist thinking--in other words, the
Rockefeller line.  With such powerful support, Carter has no idea
how dangerous a position he is now in.  Already a "Carter
Watergate" is brewing to cut him down; and, worst of all, the
threat of war hangs over everything he does.

   In his Inaugural Address, Carter expressed a preoccupation
with war; and for the past several weeks the American public has
been under an avalanche of warnings about the Soviet military
threat, including statements that the Soviets are now preparing
for war.  This is a complete turnabout from the virtual ban on
anti-Soviet news that was in force in the controlled major media
until very recently; and the excuse that has been provided for
all these new warnings is a new study of Intelligence information
that was launched last summer as soon as it was learned that the
Soviet Union was planting offensive missiles in our waters.  The
threat of war, my friends, is very real; but the intent of the
controlled major media in relaying these warnings to you now is
another matter.  We are now being psychologically conditioned to
accept a "Declaration of National Emergency" when the time is
ripe, and to submit to the dictatorial controls it will impose.

   The drive to merge the United States with the Soviet Union to
form an all-powerful World Government has already cost us two
World Wars plus Korea and Vietnam.  Now, we are once again in a
pre-war situation, on the brink of NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and for
reasons I can now reveal, the Four Rockefeller Brothers still
believe they can succeed in bending the coming nuclear war to
their own purposes.

   My three special topics for today are:

Topic #1--HENRY FORD'S PARTING CRITICISM OF THE LARGEST
FOUNDATION IN THE WORLD

Topic #2--THE CURRENT PRE-WAR HOSTILITIES THAT ARE LEADING UP TO
NUCLEAR WAR ONE

Topic #3--THE GREAT SECRET RACE IN SUPER WEAPONS.

Topic #1--One year ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8, I publicly
revealed for the very first time the supersecret White House
merge directive.  Under this directive our lives in America are
to be so altered that we can be comfortably merged with the
Soviet Union.  And since last spring I have also been drawing
your attention to the little known but central role that the
major tax-free Foundations have played for two generations and
more to push our nation in the same direction.

   Last month I was able to reveal one of my sources of
information about the Foundations--my friend, Mr. Norman Dodd,
and to repeat for you his own words about the clandestine role
they have played in progressively destroying the America that was
created by our Founding Fathers.  Mr. Dodd's story is incredible,
but it is also based upon painstaking, carefully documented
research which he directed with the Congress of the United
States.  As one of America's foremost authorities on Foundations,
Norman Dodd is a man whose words carry a great deal of weight. 
But since last April I have also been informed anew that there is
a contingent among the present-day Trustees of these Foundations
who are becoming increasingly worried about the direction in
which they are taking us.  Even before the Soviet underwater
missile crisis materialized last summer, their fears of a Soviet
double-cross were mounting rapidly.  And now, no less than Henry
Ford II has resigned in dissatisfaction as a Trustee of the
biggest Foundation in the world--the Ford Foundation; and he has
warned in a criticizing letter that a change in direction would
be wise to consider.

   In his resignation letter of January 11, 1977, he said in
part, and I quote:

  "The Foundation exists and thrives on the fruits of our
economic system.  The dividends of competitive enterprise make it
all possible.  A significant portion of the abundance created by
United States business enables the Foundation and like
institutions to carry on their work.  In effect, the Foundation
is a creature of capitalism--a statement that I am sure would be
shocking to many professional staff people in the field of
philanthropy.  It is hard to discern recognition of this fact in
anything the Foundation does.  It is even more difficult to find
an understanding of this in many of the institutions,
particularly the universities, that are the beneficiaries of the
Foundation's grant programs."

Shortly thereafter he continues, and I quote:

  "I am just suggesting to the Trustees and the staff that the
system that makes the Foundation possible very probably is worth
preserving.  Perhaps it's time for the Trustees and staff to
examine the question of our obligations to our economic system;
and to consider how the Foundation, as one of the system's most
prominent offspring, might act most wisely to strengthen and
improve its progenitor."

   If you are not aware of the concerted drive toward
collectivism that has been promoted for decades by the major
Foundations, these words of Henry Ford II may surprise you.  Even
so, you may be even more surprised at the reactions of the major
Foundations to his criticisms.  Almost universally their
bitterest reactions had to do with Ford's defense of free
competitive enterprise.

   For example, consider the Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace.  In AUDIO LETTER No. 19 last month you heard of the
chilling role the Carnegie Endowment has played since 1909 in
altering America's national life through warfare and twisting our
education.  When a high official of the Carnegie Endowment was
asked for his comments on Henry Ford's letter of resignation, he
reacted in the scornful words, "Is that what the Ford Foundation
is set up for--to promote free enterprise?"  He was very upset at
the mention of free enterprise--the indispensable foundation of
Freedom itself.

   Henry Ford II is not alone.  Those Foundation trustees who
insist upon continuing the suicidal drive toward collectivism
under the long-time commitment for a One World Government are
trying to put down all dissent within their ranks.  But Henry
Ford II has courageously shown the way, and we can hope for
others to follow.

Topic #2--In all the major wars of this century involving the
United States, undeclared warfare has been a consistent pattern. 
In the cases of Korea and Vietnam, in fact, the entire wars were
undeclared.  In the cases of World Wars I and II, undeclared
warfare and provocations preceded the formal outbreak of war and
marked the time period in each case that has since been called
"pre-war."

   In that sense, we are now living in the pre-war days that are
leading up to NUCLEAR WAR ONE here in America!  But as we are
living out the days of the pre-NUCLEAR WAR ONE period, undeclared
hostilities have reached a level unparalleled in the past.

   Consider first the repeated plutonium cloud attacks which have
been mounted on the United States by Soviet submarines in recent
months.  As I have related in previous monthly AUDIO LETTERS, the
first such attack was mounted in early October 1976 by Soviet
submarines deployed along the Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf coasts
of the United States.  Based on the results from that first
full-scale experiment on our country, Soviet chemical warfare
specialists concluded that subsequent plutonium cloud attacks
could be mounted most efficiently from stations along the
Northwest Coast.

   In late November 1976, a second experimental attack was
mounted to test this out; and while it was not completely
successful from the Soviet viewpoint, it provided all the
additional data they needed.

   Both of these experimental plutonium cloud attacks by the
Soviet Union were accompanied by convenient cover announcements
by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the EPA, to
the effect that radioactive clouds from Chinese nuclear blasts
would be passing over us.  Thus an explanation was readily
available should something unexpectedly severe happen--but it did
not.

   And on December 13, 1976, as I reported last month, 21 Soviet
submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our
atmosphere arrived on station along the Northwest Coast of the
United States.  This time, my friends, experimentation was no
longer the goal.  Certain individuals in the United States
Government knew they were there, and knew why, but did nothing
whatsoever to interfere with their mission.

   As of December 31, 1976, 13 of the 21 subs had emptied their
load into our atmosphere and headed out to sea, having timed
their attack to make optimum use of severe winter storm
conditions across the United States.  The other 8 subs remained
behind to reinforce the main plutonium cloud by continuing to
feed it periodically over a period of days.  Finally on January
3, 1977, these 8 Soviet subs also departed out to sea, having
emptied their loads into our atmosphere.

   According to my own Intelligence sources, this third and
latest plutonium cloud attack by the Soviet Union was very
effective.  The Soviets did achieve a very broad dispersal of the
plutonium poison throughout the continental United States.  This,
on top of the record cold weather blanketing most of the United
States lately, may well lead to an outbreak of flu-like
sicknesses in the near future, to which the Government has been
conditioning us now for nearly a year.

   Undeclared warfare by the Soviet Union is also continuing by
means of the short-range underwater-launch missiles which have
been planted in our waters by the Soviet Union ready for use in a
surprise attack.  Last month I revealed that 93 such missiles
were in place in American waters, and I gave the navigational
coordinates for nine of them which were surrounding the Island of
Oahu, where Pearl Harbor is located.

   I can now report that the United States Navy did remove all
nine of these missiles, completing the operation on December 31,
1976.  But four Soviet submarines were on hand to observe the
complete missile removal operation by our Navy; and as of January
17, just one week ago, two new Soviet missiles were already in
place, threatening Pearl Harbor again.  In addition, four other
Soviet missiles have been planted since I recorded monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 19 last month--two in Alaskan waters, the other two on
the West Coast.  This brings the total back up to 90 as of now.

   My disclosures last month demonstrated to certain persons that
I am not bluffing, that the United States is indeed targeted by a
massive new round of Soviet underwater nuclear missiles.  But for
the reasons I gave two months ago in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
18 for November, 1976, I do not intend to reveal the rest of the
missile locations merely to have them wasted in the deadly
cat-and-mouse game now under way.  Instead, my own Intelligence
sources have made it crystal clear that only public exposure of
the truth about this whole deadly matter has any hope of stopping
the coming war.  For that reason I have already launched efforts
through a number of indirect channels which lie outside the
Rockefeller sphere of control in an attempt to bring about this
public exposure.

   If full-fledged war does come, my friends, America is in for a
wide range of nasty military surprises.  In certain areas Soviet
approaches to military technology are far different from our
own--such as in the field of anti-submarine warfare.

   One field in which they are literally decades ahead of the
United States is in the area of microwaves as they affect human
beings.  Since early December the Soviet Union has been
conducting a major experimental test program on a new
satellite-based system that uses microwaves to directly affect
the behavior of humans.  The test victims: the crews of selected
tankers and freighters in and near American waters.

   Soviet researchers discovered long ago that prolonged exposure
to microwaves, even at intensities considered "safe" in the
United States, can produce a long list of effects on people. 
These range from dizziness and irritability to emotional
instability and alteration of brain wave patterns, as well as
other effects.  Starting from these findings, Soviet scientists
have developed microwave bombardment techniques which have the
basic effect of greatly reducing a person's capacity for
exercising judgment and fully comprehending facts at his
disposal.  A person under such bombardment, in other words, is
very prone to make mistakes, serious mistakes.

   On December 15, 1976, the Liberian tanker Argo Merchant went
aground on the Nantucket shoals off Cape Cod, and the resulting
oil spill of 7-1/2 million gallons was the worst to date in
American history.  Many things were strange about the
incident--such as the fact that the Nantucket shoals are a very
well known navigational hazard, and the Argo Merchant was many
miles off course.  Hearings later revealed that the ship's
navigational gear was not in proper condition, but strange
behavior by the crew itself went unexplained.

   The Argo Merchant was then followed by a rash of tanker
incidents in and near American waters; and in almost every case,
errors of judgment were either primary or contributing factors.

   It was a bad month for the Coast Guard; but it was worst of
all for the 38 nationalist Chinese crewmen of the tanker Grand
Zenith, which was lost at sea off the New England coast with over
8-million gallons of heavy fuel oil aboard.  On December 30,
1976, the Zenith reported its position as about 60 miles south of
Yarmouth, Nova Scotia.  It was never heard from again.  Several
days later, after the ship failed to arrive at its destination,
the Coast Guard began a search for the missing ship.  However it
was noticed that the last position reported by the Zenith was so
far north of its planned course that it did not seem to make
sense.  As a result, the search was shifted to a seemingly more
likely area far to the south of that location.

   The story of the Grand Zenith is a tragic one, my friends. 
But it might have been less tragic had the Coast Guard taken the
last position report by the Captain of the Grand Zenith more
seriously and anchored search operations on that position,
because on January 7, 1977, I received Intelligence information
to the effect that the location of the sunken Grand Zenith was
approximately 43 degrees 5 minutes North, 67 degrees 52 minutes
West.  Furthermore, my information indicated that as of that time
there were still survivors in the immediate vicinity of the
sinking.

   It was urgent that this be brought to the attention of the
Coast Guard without delay.  The search had already been narrowed
down to the wrong area--over 200 miles to the southeast of the
correct position--based on the finding of two life jackets
bearing the name Grand Zenith.  I immediately contacted the J. F.
Moran Company in Providence, Rhode Island (the ship's agent in
New England), and gave them the information.  They passed it on
to the Coast Guard--but there it stopped!

   For days I tried directly and indirectly to get someone to
check out the location I had been given.  On January 10 I
contacted the Coast Guard directly to see what had been done.  I
was informed that no attempt whatever had been made to check out
my report, and that no attempt was going to be made!!  Instead
the same fruitless area 300 miles east of Cape Cod was searched
day after day for a week with no hope whatsoever of finding the
survivors.  Meanwhile I could not persuade the Coast Guard even
to make a single flight over the actual site of the sinking in
order to check out my report.

   The same information was also given to the Navy after the
Coast Guard refused to investigate; and the Navy, too, refused to
check it out.  Had either the Navy or the Coast Guard checked the
information I gave them about the Grand Zenith, they would have
found it to be true, and that would have demonstrated to the
public at large that my Intelligence sources about matters like
this are extremely accurate.

   My Intelligence sources had hoped that this would be exactly
the outcome of my relaying the life-saving information about the
Grand Zenith.  But, my friends, the TRUTH has many enemies.

Topic #3--The brain-scrambling microwave weapons which are now
entering operational status in the Soviet arsenal are just one
example of a whole new generation of superweapons which are now
under development in a secret arms race.  The participants in
this race are none other than the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller
cartel on the one hand, and the State Socialists of the Soviet
Union on the other.  Thus, while they are allies in the drive to
take over the rest of the world, there remains a tension of
rivalry between the two.  Each would like to achieve clear
supremacy over the other, and each is trying to prevent the other
from achieving such supremacy.  Caught in the middle as both pawn
and prize is the United States of America with her people, her
resources, and her industrial and military establishment.  We
continually hear about the military relationship between the
Soviet Union and the United States, but the real arms struggle is
between the Soviet Union and the Rockefeller empire--and it is a
well kept secret.

   Weapons which are under normal official Defense Department
control in this country are always compared with weapons which
enjoy a similar officially acknowledged status in the Soviet
Union.  Thus military planners think in terms of Soviet Backfire
Bombers versus the American B-1 Bomber; Soviet missiles and
missile-firing submarines versus their counterparts; and new
developments such as Cruise Missiles which, by the way, are not
actually a basic new concept at all.  All of these things are
real and important factors in the military equation.  But there
is another layer of weaponry that you have never heard about, yet
which is crucial to the real power balance between the
Rockefeller and Soviet empires.  This is the realm of the secret
arms race in highly advanced super weapons.  This realm is
completely unaffected by SALT treaties or other treaties, and
involves a continual jockeying for pure raw power!

   Thus, for example, timid reports are just beginning to be made
public about the possibilities that lasers might be used to blind
military satellites, and that some day far in the future they
might even be developed into death rays like those of Science
Fiction.  As for operational weapons in the supersecret category,
the Soviet underwater nuclear missiles that now infest our waters
and the sonar-absorbing mini-submarines which are used to plant
them are good examples.

   One of the puzzling things to me until recently was the
incredible "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1, 1976, whereby the
Rockefeller Brothers pledged, through President Ford, not to
harass the Soviet submarines planting missiles in our waters. 
Even more puzzling has been the absence of a Soviet ultimatum or
surprise attack so far, given our heavy coastal targeting with
these missiles.  But now, I can give you the answers.

   When I first revealed the locations of Soviet underwater
missiles around the world in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last
August, I did so with the knowledge that a planned world-wide
Soviet surprise attack was imminent, and that public exposure was
the only thing that could prevent it.  Now I know more fully why
the surprise element was so crucial to the double-cross embarked
upon by the Soviet Union.  The Soviets were trying to prepare and
launch the attack before an awesome weapons system that is under
direct Rockefeller control could be activated; but ever since
that surprise was ruined, they have been forced to bide their
time while they watch for another opportunity to catch the
Rockefeller empire in a vulnerable moment.

   Meanwhile a standoff is being maintained between the Soviet
underwater missiles and the Rockefeller superweapons system I am
about to tell you about.  At the same time, Rockefeller
propaganda is being used to rapidly wash away the idea of
East-West detente in a flood of warnings about the Soviet threat
and possible war.  The purpose of it all is to lead up to a
"Declaration of National Emergency", as I have already warned. 
Finally, NUCLEAR WAR ONE is programmed to come.  The purpose of
the Rockefeller superweapons is not to prevent this war.  These
superweapons are only a club over the head of the Soviets to
insure that the war goes according to plan.  This includes Soviet
adherence to the "Nuclear Safe Zone" which was established by
secret agreement to protect the Rockefeller Brothers and their
intimates.

   I was first alerted to the existence of the Rockefeller
superweapons system as the result of my press release which was
sent out to nearly 11,000 newspapers in the United States late in
October in connection with the release of monthly AUDIO LETTER
No. 17.  The press release called attention to the pivotal role
General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
had played in preventing a surprise attack by means of Soviet
underwater missiles.

   On November 17, 1976, one of my associates received a call
from a Mr. Tony Hodges, a prominent environmentalist who lives in
Honolulu.  Mr. Hodges had been given a copy of the press release,
and called to find out more about it.  He had good reason to be
interested because nearly a year earlier, unbenoticed to my
associates or myself, he had delivered a 47-page warning document
to the ambassadors of more than 50 countries who had signed the
1971 Seabeds Arms Control Treaty.  In this warning document Mr.
Hodges alerted the reader to, quote:

  "Probable violations by the USA and the USSR of the 1971
Seabeds Arms Control Treaty."

He was careful to make clear that the material contained in the
document did not prove his suspicions that undersea weapons of
the sort banned by the treaty had been deployed by either the
United States or the Soviet Union.  Nevertheless he did explain
in considerable detail why such weapons, such as missiles and
undersea silos, would be militarily desirable; and he also
presented the statements of several extremely highly qualified
experts in this field of technology contending that such undersea
missile systems are feasible.

   One of these authorities is Dr. John P. Craven, who is
presently (Jan. 1977) the dean of Marine Programs for the
University of Hawaii as well as Marine Affairs Coordinator for
the State of Hawaii.  Formerly he was Chief Scientist on United
States Navy projects which involved both the development of this
nation's submarine-launched ballistic missile system and deep
submersibles.  He is also an attorney specializing in Marine Law,
and at last report continued to be a high-level consultant to the
Department of Defense.

   In his warning document, Mr. Hodges lists the impressive
credentials of Dr. Craven in more detail, and also presents
voluminous notes on a conversation he had with Dr. Craven in
November 1975 about the subject of undersea missiles.  The entire
Craven interview as reported in the Hodges warning document
provides a great deal of insight into the whole subject of
undersea missiles, which are discussed throughout as being sealed
inside a protective capsule while they dwell in their hiding
places beneath the sea.  At no point did Dr. Craven admit to
knowing of the actual existence of any such system; but according
to the report of Mr. Hodges, the feasibility of such undersea
missiles was strongly confirmed by Dr. Craven.

   To illustrate this, I will now quote from page 26 of the
Hodges warning document--Notes C-29 through C-31, quote:

  "Craven said he could develop a total weapons system to do what
I suggested in a maximum of four (4) years, longer if it needed
to be clandestine.

   The above is an enormously important statement by Craven,
since the author believes that Craven was intimately involved in
the development of the systems noted in this warning document.
The figure Craven gave for carrying out the system development in
total secrecy, such as has been done, was seven (7) years.  This
is significant because it is believed that the program to place
nuclear weapons on and within the seabed was begun in 1968 while
Craven was still chief scientist of the Navy's Strategic Systems
project and its Deep Submergence Systems project.  The seabed
silos and the tidal wave and earthquake-generating systems would
certainly fall in those two areas of responsibility of his.

   It should be noted that whenever during the conversation we
got away from whether or not the weapons system had actually been
implanted, Craven quickly warmed up to the subject as the 'can
do' technologist he is known to be.  When he said he could
develop such a program--a 'total weapons system' he called it--in
only (4) years, he did so with considerable gusto.

   It was in this vein that Craven offered the next remark.
Craven said that the individual missile capsules did not have to
be placed in silos on the seabed, but could be dumped off the
rear of a fast-moving destroyer.  Craven said that there would be
some problem for the missile to know its precise location, but
that this could be worked out."

   The Hodges warning document also reports the assessment of
feasibility of underwater missiles by two other experts.  One who
is identified as having worked for 16 years on American
submarine-launched ballistic missile projects is Robert C.
Aldrich.  He is quoted as saying, quote:

  "Quite feasible, though I was skeptical at first."

Another person quoted is Costa Tpsis of MIT Center for
International Studies, a well known analyst of strategic missile
systems.  His assessment of the feasibility of undersea missile
systems, as described by Hodges, is reported to be quote:

  "'Absolutely possible.'  Tpsis said that such silos could be
placed on the continental shelf in water as shallow as 100 meters
and still achieve the same protective purpose."

(End of quote from the Hodges warning document.)

   My friends, Tony Hodges deserves a great deal of credit, both
for the importance of the material he uncovered and summarized in
his warning document, and for the way in which he has handled it. 
First, he tried unsuccessfully to get the Government to take
proper corrective measures without having to resort to
embarrassing publicity about it.  Then, he turned to the press in
the person of a syndicated columnist, whom I will simply call
"Mr. X."  Mr. X took great interest in the Hodges warning
document material and in the plan to have it delivered to the
governments of the signatories to the Seabed Arms Control Treaty
on December 17, 1975.  According to Hodges, a big news story was
written ready to break on the same day the documents were
delivered--December 17, 1975.  But suddenly Mr. X decided to kill
the story because CIA Director William Colby, National Security
Council Staff Director Brent Scowcroft, and Richard Chaney of the
White House Staff all asked him to kill it!  Nevertheless the
warning document was delivered to the ambassadors of the Seabed
Treaty signatories in Washington and at the United Nations in New
York City.  According to Mr. Hodges this, too, apparently fell on
deaf ears.  Nor have attempts to bring it to the attention of the
United States Congress apparently been of any use!

   But, my friends, Tony Hodges was on to something very big
indeed.  Having been alerted for the first time by his warning
document that the United States might be involved in some way
with undersea missiles or other nuclear weapons, I began checking
my own Intelligence sources to find out whether it was actually
so or not.  And, my friends, the answer is "Yes."  The Hodges
warning document provides a great deal of very informative
background material for what I am about to tell you; and I am
informed that as long as he has copies of it left, you can obtain
a copy for $10.00 by writing to him directly.  The name and
address:

   Mr. Anthony Hodges, 3238 Paty Drive, Honolulu, Hawaii  96822
   His telephone number now is: Area Code 808-988-2557.

   What I have to tell you now, my friends, is not the
responsibility of Tony Hodges in any way.  It is what I have
learned from my own Intelligence sources over the past two
months, and I accept full responsibility for making it public.

   When I revealed the presence of Soviet short-range nuclear
missiles in our waters last August, I mentioned that the United
States had not placed similar missiles in the waters around the
Soviet Union.  I can confirm once again that this is the case. 
But now, I have learned that an entirely different kind of
underwater-launch offensive nuclear missiles are targeted on the
Soviet Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans.

   According to my own Intelligence information, only 14 of these
undersea supermissiles have been deployed--5 in the Pacific, 9 in
the Atlantic--but that's enough.  Each of these encapsulated
supermissiles is more akin to the Saturn moon rocket than to any
ordinary ICBM.  Each carries several dozen independently
targetable hydrogen warheads.  Several of these on each missile
are superyield warheads, with the rest being similar to the
normal Minuteman or Polaris warhead.  The superyield warheads are
designed to devastate all the major ports and key portions of the
industrial heartland of the Soviet Union, in spite of the Civil
Defense measures that the Soviets have taken in recent years. 
The huge number of lower-yield warheads are targeted on
relatively soft targets throughout the Soviet Union with the sole
purpose of raising the Soviet casualty toll as high as possible.

   The whole purpose of these undersea supermissiles is to
confront the Soviet Union with a threat of massive counterattack
which cannot be neutralized in a Soviet first strike, and which
would ruin the Soviet Union as a functioning society.  According
to plan, these missiles would virtually destroy the Soviet Union
as a modern civilization, killing over 100-million people in the
process.  But, my friends, the purpose of these undersea
supermissiles aimed at the Soviet Union is not to protect you and
me, nor to prevent war!  They are under the direct control of the
Rockefeller Brothers by way of their controlled CIA--not the
normal chain of command through the Department of Defense; and
their purpose is to serve as an awesome club over the heads of
the Soviet rulers to make sure that NUCLEAR WAR ONE goes as
planned.

   The world-wide Pearl Harbor attack that was imminent last
August when I publicly revealed the world-wide locations of
Soviet underwater missiles was a daring Soviet gamble.  Its
purpose was to eliminate the Four Rockefeller Brothers from the
scene and simultaneously prevent the CIA undersea missiles from
being launched by making such counterattacks seem pointless.  But
the key ingredient of that plan was secrecy and total surprise. 
My intelligence sources made it abundantly clear last July and
August that the only way to prevent immediate nuclear disaster
was public exposure of the truth.  And now we know why.  Now we
also know why the Four Rockefeller Brothers felt that they could
get away with the seemingly suicidal policy instituted on Red
Friday, October 1, 1976, agreeing to allow the Soviet Union to
keep planting short-range nuclear missiles in our territorial
waters without harassment.  It's all part of a nuclear standoff
involving weapons the public does not even know about and in
which the Rockefellers believe they hold the upper hand.

   There are now strong indications that the Four Rockefeller
Brothers, believing they still hold the upper hand with their
undersea supermissiles, plan to turn the presence of the Soviet
missiles in our waters to their own advantage.  During the fall
of 1976 they re-established the strained alliance between
themselves and the Soviet Union for the time being; and now we
are being built up rapidly to accept a Declaration of National
Emergency.  The announcement by the Government that there are
Soviet missiles in our waters is now being arranged to be done
with the advanced knowledge of the Soviet Union.  Just as
Franklin D. Roosevelt declared an "unlimited national emergency"
on May 27, 1941 as part of the build-up for war, a similar
scenario is being worked out now to trap us all!

   But the cruel joke may be on the Rockefeller Brothers
themselves, who may yet be buried by the Soviet Union along with
millions of us.  Something is going wrong with the CIA
supermissiles deep in the ocean; and as of now, one is completely
disabled and five more are deteriorating rapidly and probably are
not usable.  That leaves only eight undersea supermissiles at the
disposal of the Rockefeller Brothers; and their reliability, too,
is now open to serious question.  In addition, the Soviet fears
about their corroding underwater missiles in the secret Soviet
missile crisis of 1971, which I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER
No. 14 last July, apply again now.  Several of the undersea
supermissiles are now leaking plutonium from their disabled
warheads into the surrounding water, and the possibility of an
uncontrolled explosion cannot be ruled out.  Should this happen,
tidal waves or earthquakes could be created that could affect
Hawaii, the Bahamas, or any place along the east coast from Nova
Scotia to Florida.

   Just as my Intelligence sources emphasized last summer that
public exposure of the truth was the key to avoiding disaster,
the same situation exists again now.  The CIA undersea
supermissiles in the Atlantic and Pacific cannot protect us from
war, and in fact are not even intended for that purpose.  Yet
they sit there as a present hazard to all of our lives, directly
and indirectly.  Therefore I am going to reveal the locations of
all 14 of the CIA undersea supermissiles in navigational
coordinates.  At a minimum I hope to strip the Rockefeller cartel
of their ace in the hole that makes our survival irrelevant to
them; but even more, I hope to undo their continued cooperation
with the Soviet Union in a plan to sacrifice millions of our
lives.  This may well be our last chance to prevent the present
"pre-war period" from erupting as planned into NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

   The missiles are located in water depths ranging from a few
hundred feet at several Atlantic sites to more than 15,000 feet
at one Pacific site.

   The following five locations are in the Pacific Ocean. 
Incidentally, these are in the vicinity of locations which are
shown on a map in the Hodges warning document as probable
locations of undersea weapons.  As explained in the warning
document, Mr. Hodges believes that these locations were the
subject of seabed weapons installations or tests by the
CIA-financed Howard Hughes mystery ship, the Glomar Explorer.

Pacific Missile No. 1--About 25 miles north of the Hawaiian
Island Kauai at 22-37-14 North, 159-21-55 West.  Plutonium
leakage from this missile is badly contaminating the surrounding
water.

Pacific Missile No. 2--About 10 miles north of Kauai at 22-21-59
North, 159-36-19 West.  Leaking, but not as badly.

Pacific Missile No. 3--About 650 miles northwest of Christmas
Island at 9-20-0 North, 165-18-41 West.

Pacific Missile No. 4--About 550 miles northwest of Christmas
Island at 8-0-0 North, 163-34-38 West.  This missile is totally
disabled.

Pacific Missile No. 5--About 420 miles west-northwest of
Christmas Island at 3-2-0 North, 164-35-25 West.

Now for the Atlantic missiles:

Atlantic Missile No. 1--In Canadian waters near Sable Island at
43-52-0 North, 59-10-54 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 2--In Canadian waters about 140 miles
south-southeast of Halifax, Nova Scotia, at 42-30-24 North,
63-1-5 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 3--About 225 miles due east of Cape Cod at
41-46-23 North, 65-54-33 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 4--About 120 miles southeast of Cape Cod at
40-20-0 North, 68-18-32 West.  Leaking.

Atlantic Missile No. 5--About 50 miles to the southwest of
Atlantic Missile No. 4 at 40-4-0 North, 69-17-27 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 6--Only about 30 miles southeast of Cape
Hatteras, North Carolina at 34-49-1 North, 75-17-27 West.
Leaking.

Atlantic Missile No. 7--About 240 miles east-northeast of
Charleston, So. Car. at 33-5-40 North, 75-43-38 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 8--About 290 miles east-southeast of
Jacksonville, Fla. at 30-9-9 North, 77-8-44 West.  Leaking.

And finally:

Atlantic Missile No. 9--In British waters about 100 miles
east-northeast of Nassau in the Bahamas at 25-19-21 North,
75-54-33 West.

   In 1947 the Rockefeller Brothers arranged for the CIA to be
created for their own private purposes, and today it is the
CIA--not the normal military chain of command--that exercises
control for the Rockefellers over the undersea supermissiles as
part of its expanding encroachment into military affairs.  This
is helping to bring our beloved country to agony and ruin,
unless, my friends, WE stop it!

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #19

Audio letter No. 19

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

 

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1982 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is December 18,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 19.

   As our Bicentennial Year of 1976 draws to a close, the United
States of America is in grave danger.  Our economy is ravaged by
the twin plagues of high inflation and high unemployment, a
condition which I named STAGFLATION some years ago.  Our Republic
is under attack in a far-advanced plan to bring our country under
dictatorship.  Our very lives are under the threat of extinction
in a surprise nuclear attack which would be the beginning of
NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and all of these terrible things have been
brought about deliberately by a handful of ruthless, powerful men
here and abroad, bent on world domination.

   "But how can this be?", you ask.  "How can so few people
control the destinies of all the rest of us?"

   After all, it is easy to imagine how far our Secret Rulers and
their henchmen would get if they tried to take over even one
city, much less all of America, with their own bare fists and
brute force.  They would be stopped in their tracks in no time
flat because everyone understands that kind of threat and there
are far more of us than there are of them.  But those who want to
enslave us understand this all too well; they know better than to
try any kind of frontal attack on us that would be widely
understood.  Instead, they have perfected the art of harnessing
our own energies so that gradually, step by step, we are
enslaving ourselves under their control.

   The Hegelian principle of thesis, antithesis, synthesis is
being applied so as to gradually merge our life with that of the
Soviet Union at every level!  The average working man and woman
in America would never knowingly allow this to happen, and yet it
is happening--gradually, year after year.

1. The first step, called Thesis, is to create and publicize a
problem in education, economics, or otherwise in our daily lives.
In other words, where there is peace, create discord and trouble.

2. Step 2, Antithesis, is to create opposition to the problem.

3. The final step, Synthesis, is to offer a so-called solution to
the problem.

This diabolical, roundabout approach psychologically conditions
people to accept things which they would otherwise oppose
vigorously.  Just a look around with this in mind, and you will
see that this technique is being used all around you in a
thousand ways; but the real key to the success or failure of this
method of manipulating the public lies in something Abraham
Lincoln said over 100 years ago, quote:

  "With public sentiment, nothing will fail; without it, nothing
can succeed."

So long as we, the people, are simply told the truth about
things, public sentiment reflects the truth.  Under those
conditions, real solutions can be found for real problems to
everyone's benefit; but when we are not told the truth, public
sentiment reflects only what we believe and we can be manipulated
into supporting all kinds of things that are not in our best
interest.

   Here in the United States a subtle, long-range propaganda
technique--known simply as MISINFORMATION--has been used to build
up an artificial and false picture of the world and our own
nation.  In the areas of foreign policy, national security,
politics, and economics, the truth has been suppressed and
replaced with an elaborate structure of lies, distortions, and
half-truths.  This false picture has come to be accepted as the
truth with the result that the truth itself has been rendered
unbelievable.  I don't think anyone in his right mind could do
what has been done to us.  Our education, our CONSTITUTION, our
free enterprise system, everything possible has been perverted in
order to confer ever more power on our Secret Rulers.

   Now, WAR IS COMING.  The wars of this century have been fought
far from our shores, but this time it is coming here--to our
land, to our homes, to our people!  It will not be a conventional
war but NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  As in all modern wars, it will begin
with a surprise attack.  Thanks to the silence of the United
States Government and of the controlled major media, most
Americans will be caught completely by surprise, believing in a
lie called detente until thermonuclear fireballs erupt all around
our nation.

   To show how different the truth is from what we are led to
believe by our Secret Rulers, I will discuss these three topics
today:

Topic #1--WHY THE UNITED STATES WAS NOT FIRST TO LAUNCH AN EARTH
SATELLITE

Topic #2--WHY MOST AMERICANS CANNOT BELIEVE NUCLEAR WAR IS
IMMINENT

Topic #3--HOW THE MAJOR TAX-EXEMPT FOUNDATIONS HAVE CLEARED THE
WAY FOR SOVIET NUCLEAR ATTACK.

Topic #1--On the evening of October 4, 1957, Americans were
stunned by the announcement that the Soviet Union had become the
first nation in history to place a man-made satellite in orbit. 
Sputnik I, weighing 184 pounds, was circling the Earth every hour
and a half sending out beeps that became famous overnight.  The
world was thrilled, and the world press heaped great praise on
the Soviet Union.  They inferred from this accomplishment that
the Soviet socialist system was superior to our own in scientific
and technical progress.  It was a historical first that can never
be undone--the Soviet Union had beaten the United States into
space.

   Less than a month later Sputnik II was launched.  It weighed
over half a ton and carried the first live passenger into space,
a dog.  The dog died within a week but it was another startling
achievement nonetheless.

   Meanwhile poor old America was struggling along trying to put
a tiny 16-pound satellite into orbit by means of the Navy's
Vanguard rocket.  Two launches were attempted, but both failed. 
In one case the rocket lifted a few feet off the pad only to
settle back into a tremendous fireball as it exploded.  It made
exciting footage for the television news that evening.  Finally
on January 31, 1958, almost four months after Sputnik I, America
launched its first space satellite from Cape Canaveral, Florida. 
It was called Explorer I, and it was launched not by the Navy but
by the Army.  We were in space at last, but only after being
thoroughly humiliated before the entire world.

   After the Sputnik shock, space flight and rockets were
suddenly the "in" thing to be interested in.  Even then Senator
Lyndon B. Johnson arranged for a new "Aeronautics and Space
Committee" to be set up, with himself as its Chairman.  He was
thereafter as visible as possible in connection with space
matters, and today the manned space flight center in Houston
bears his name.  At the time, I could hardly imagine anything
more hypocritical for Johnson to do.  Even though I was a lawyer,
I had been a member of the then named "American Rocket Society"
for a number of years and had vivid memories of Johnson's
attitude toward space in the early 50's.  At that time, four or
five years before Sputnik, I was a member of a group headed by
Dr. Wernher Von Braun who approached Johnson in hopes of
obtaining support for a space program.  I'll never forget Lyndon
Johnson's reaction to the whole idea.  He did not merely say
"No", but jeered at the whole concept as ridiculous and
worthless!

   A few years later the United States was deprived of the chance
to be first in space, but not by Lyndon Johnson.  What I am going
to tell you does not affect our national security now, but it
does provide a typical example of what has been happening to
America for many years.  And as Wernher Von Braun lies on his
death bed in a hospital near Washington, D.C., I believe the time
has come for the truth to be told about why we were not the first
to put a satellite into space.

   In late 1955 or early 1956, the Joint Chiefs of Staff began
the first act of planning for an American space program.  Their
goal: To have the United States initiate the world's first
successful space flight at the beginning of the International
Geophysical Year that was to begin on July 1, 1957.  After some
controversy as to which Service should sponsor the space project,
it was concluded that the Army was most capable of doing the job. 
This was agreed to and approved by the Joint Chiefs and by then
Secretary of Defense Charles Wilson.

   The Army's Redstone Arsenal in Huntsville, Alabama was
fortunate in having the services of the world's foremost rocket
expert, Dr. Wernher Von Braun.  From a very early age Von Braun
had been fascinated with the idea of space flight, and he had
spent his life working with rockets.  During World War II Von
Braun was pressed into service by Hitler, and the German rocket
program was far ahead of other countries by the end of the war. 
When the war ended, many of Von Braun's subordinates at the
German rocket base were taken prisoner by the Soviet Union and it
was they who were forced to develop and direct the Soviet missile
and space programs; but Von Braun himself had resolved well
before hostilities ended that he would surrender to the United
States, and he succeeded in doing so.  Our Government then
prevailed upon him to enter governmental research where he would
have the money and resources to pursue rocketry in earnest.

   When the Earth Satellite project came under consideration
years later in the mid-50's, the Joint Staff project officers
interviewed the Redstone Arsenal officials along with Von Braun
himself to ascertain their capability.  Von Braun stated that his
group could engineer a space vehicle and have it ready for orbit
in only a few months.  The Joint Staff pushed for the Von Braun
project; and after it was approved by the Joint Chiefs and
Secretary of Defense, it went to President Eisenhower for final
approval and allocation of Defense Department funds--but there it
stopped!  Strangely there was a long delay in getting the
expected presidential approval.  Finally the word came down to
the Joint Staff from the President.  Incredibly, they were to
disregard the Army's capability and give the Space project to the
Navy instead.  Such a decision was all but unbelievable.  The
Navy did not even have a blueprint for such a space vehicle! 
They would be starting almost from scratch; but the decision
stood, so several large aircraft companies and Navy scientists
gathered to initiate a program called "PROJECT VANGUARD."

   As a direct result of this decision, the Soviet Union was able
to put Sputnik into orbit while the United States was still
struggling unsuccessfully with Vanguard.  Joint Staff project
officers were most perplexed about the American political
decision to allow the Soviet Union to beat us in this endeavor
when we had the capability to be far ahead of them.  It appeared
to follow a pattern of withholding American capabilities and
allowing the Soviet Union the advantage.  Later, an aide to
President Eisenhower explained confidentially what had
transpired.

   A select group of scientists and financial leaders got wind of
the American space satellite plans at an early stage.  The group,
headed by a man who was later awarded the Lenin Peace Prize by
the Soviet Union, went to the President and pressed him to
sponsor a purely American space project with only native
Americans working on it.  They didn't want by any means for a
former German, such as Wernher Von Braun, to give the world and
future historians the impression that the Germans of all people
were superior in the field of space science.  This group, who
were actually doing the bidding of the Rockefellers on behalf of
their Soviet allies, were instrumental in forcing America to take
a back seat in the early years of the Space Age when we were
fully capable of being supreme!

   Finally, after two Soviet Sputniks and two humiliating Navy
Vanguard failures, Eisenhower became exasperated and told the
Defense Department to get Von Braun into action.  Just six weeks
after he received the go-ahead, Von Braun's Army team launched
Explorer I.  He did exactly what he had said he could do two
years earlier--and the very first time he tried it; but the
special place in history he so richly deserved had been denied
him forever, just as it had been denied to the new homeland of
his choice, the United States of America.  The anti-German
argument that had been used on President Eisenhower was, of
course, a total fraud.

   When Sputnik I was launched a short dozen years after World
War II, the Soviet rocket program was even more dependent on the
efforts of captured German scientists than was true in the United
States.  Thus only one thing was really accomplished by delaying
the Army satellite effort under Wernher Von Braun: A tremendous
propaganda coup for the Soviet Union and a setback to American
prestige and self-confidence that persisted for years.  It is a
grim fact that accolades go to the spoilers and traitors among
us, but no acclaim to our true heroes and men dedicated to
American principles.

   Under the enthusiastic leadership of Wernher Von Braun the
United States was able to come from behind to win the race to the
Moon, but soon the world press will have relegated him to the
footnotes of modern history.  Like General Douglas MacArthur,
Wernher Von Braun will "just fade away."

Topic #2--When Secretary of Defense James Schlesinger was fired
by President Ford just over a year ago in November 1975, he said,
quote:

  "Some years from now someone will say, 'Why weren't we warned?'
and I wanted to be able to say: 'Indeed you were.'"

But most Americans when reminded of this parting statement by
Schlesinger tend to be surprised.  It is as if his words have
gone out into thin air, leaving no lasting impression at all. 
This is a perfect illustration of the way in which the American
public have been left comfortably asleep by the controlled major
media of our country, oblivious to the steadily mounting threat
of war.

   Around the world the alarms of impending nuclear disaster are
jangling louder and louder; but these alarms are muted, muffled,
and silenced by the time they reach you.  When isolated facts
about American or Soviet military developments are reported, it
is done in such a way that it has little lasting impact on most
people.  Thus, for example, you may hear a news item concerning
the debate over the new B-1 Bomber which the United States Air
Force is developing.  Taken in isolation you may well wonder what
all the shouting is about and, for that matter, why such a new
bomber is even being considered in this age of missiles.  Or you
may hear a brief news item mentioning that the Air Force wants to
buy some F-15 Fighters to augment our air defense system.

   Perhaps these things would make a little more sense to you if
you knew that the Soviet Backfire Bomber began to be deployed
operationally over three years ago!  The Backfire is a supersonic
long-range bomber capable of delivering nuclear weapons to
targets here in the United States--and that, my friends, is
precisely its purpose, not the so-called peripheral missions
mentioned by some.  Knowing this, perhaps it would have struck
you as a little strange that in 1974 after the Soviet Backfire
Bomber began being deployed, the United States virtually
dismantled its air defense system.  At the very time that a
renewed Soviet bomber threat was developing, our network of
interceptors was reduced to just six active Air Force Squadrons
plus six more in the Air National Guard!  The extensive network
of Nike Hercules Antiaircraft Missiles under Army command was
shut down completely.  But now, with war threatening to break
out, the Defense Department is reversing its position on air
defense without telling you why.

   The mounting controversy over the relative military strength
of the Soviet Union and the United States has taken many people
by surprise.  Almost 3-1/2 years ago the warning was sounded that
the Soviet Navy had become stronger than the United States Navy. 
That's what the world's foremost naval authority, Jane's Fighting
Ships, said in July 1973; but if you saw this reported at all by
the major media, did it make any impression?  Or consider the
matter of long-range ballistic missiles.  Over four years ago on
November 27, 1972, the Soviet Union successfully test-fired a
submarine-launched ballistic missile with a range of 4,500 miles! 
By comparison, the most advanced American sub-launched missiles
have a range of less than 3,000 miles.  In addition, the
development of a whole new series of Soviet missiles was
underway.

   Early this month the Soviet Union began a 20-day period of
tests of the new submarine-launched SSNX-18 Ballistic Missile,
firing them into a circular zone 100 miles in radius in the North
Pacific southeast of the Aleutian Islands.  The SSNX-18 now has a
multiple warhead capability; and these tests, which are
full-operational tests, extend over the full range of the missile
which is now more than 5,000 miles!  Particular attention is
being given to warhead performance in these test-proving flights. 
If all goes as planned, the SSNX-18 will be committed to full
production and operational status within a year's time.  The
SSNX-18 will give the Soviet Union a commanding lead over the
United States in the realm of submarine-launched ballistic
missiles.  But what have you learned from network news reports or
other major media about this missile?  Practically nothing.

   But the most tortured reasoning I have seen yet appeared on
December 6, 1976, in the New York Times.  An editorial on that
date entitled: MOSCOW'S SUBMARINE MIRV begins with the incredible
words, and I quote:

  "The Soviet Union's first successful test of a
submarine-launched ballistic missile armed with MIRV multiple
nuclear warheads is good news paradoxically for the United States
and the world."

The editorial then argues, in effect, that since this will
eliminate the one remaining missile advantage held by the United
States, it opens the door for the Soviet Union to make
concessions in SALT negotiations that could prevent either side
from acquiring a first-strike capability.

   Such Alice-in-Wonderland reasoning may still serve the purpose
of lulling millions of Americans back to sleep, but it would not
sit well these days with most NATO Defense Ministers.  For the
first time many officials of NATO are generally alarmed by the
continuing relentless build-up of Soviet power in Europe where
the best Soviet troops are concentrated.

   For example, consider Denmark which sits astride the channels
which lead from the Baltic Sea to the North Sea.  Soviet activity
in the Baltic has grown more and more ominous of late.  Early in
September a Soviet task force suddenly materialized off the
southeast coast of Denmark, then left, then reappeared.  All
kinds of Soviet naval war games are now being carried out
practically on Denmark's doorsteps so close that they could
suddenly turn into attack that would give practically no warning. 
Danish Foreign Minister K. B. Andersen said recently,

  "I'm astonished at what is going on.  This is completely
contrary to the expectations created by the Helsinki agreement."

And yet our kept press would have you believe that the new Soviet
SSNX-18 missile I just told you about is unimportant or even good
news, because of possible agreements the Soviet Union might make
about it.

   At the NATO Defense Ministers' meeting in Brussels earlier
this month, Admiral Sir Peter Hill-Norton of Britain warned that
the trend of the military balance between East and West is
continuing to move in favor of the Soviet bloc.  He declared that
more money and better planning are needed if NATO is to match
what he called the "relentless determination" of the Warsaw Pact
countries to achieve military superiority.  He warned that NATO
can no longer rely indefinitely upon the superiority of Western
technology because massive Soviet spending on research and
development have resulted in vast improvements in Soviet weapons.

   As Dutch Defense Minister Vredeling said on December 8, the
day after Sir Peter's speech, quote:

  "The situation as far as the balance of forces world-wide is
more serious than many people think."

And there are many other examples of genuine alarm at the
vulnerability of Western Europe to a devastating surprise attack.

   What did Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, who was and is
a CIA operative, have to say to the NATO ministers?  He gave a
brief nod to the wide-spread concern over the Soviet build-up,
but what you heard reported in the news emphasized the following,
and I quote:

  "I think the alliance is healthy.  I leave my post as Secretary
of Defense next month with a good deal of optimism about the
Atlantic alliance--the fact that it survived some 26 years; the
fact that it's working, I think reasonably smoothly at the
present time; frankly reassured by the fact that there is an
Atlantic alliance, that it's on watch and doing its job."

And so, my friends, we can all go back to sleep, comfortably
reassured.

Topic #3--One week from today will be Christmas 1976.  On that
day most Americans will be celebrating the birth of our Lord
Jesus Christ by giving gifts to one another.  The joy of giving
is something most everyone understands to a greater or lesser
extent.  When presents are opened on Christmas Day, for example,
parents of small children usually get their greatest fun out of
watching their children open presents, not from opening their own
gifts.

   In the same vein, people usually feel good about it when they
give a portion of what they have to help others or to support a
worthy cause.  This is the foundation of what is known as
charity--but unfortunately there are always a very few among us
who are motivated not by a spirit of sharing but by runaway
greed.  Their only pleasure in life comes from amassing more and
more of this world's wealth for their own coffers and extending
their power to control the wealth of others as well.  Ultimately
those who are motivated this way reach the point where they have
so much wealth and so much power that it is no longer enough just
to add to it just still further.  The only thing left in life for
those who have acquired wealth and power through greed is to use
that power and that wealth to play with the lives and destinies
of people.  In short, they try to play 'God'.

   You may ask: Why would the Soviet Union go to war?  Would the
super-wealthy of America want to create a dictatorship here with
themselves in control?  You might as well ask: Why does the
mountain climber want to climb the highest mountain?  Common
answer is: Because it's there--just like the United States, the
richest country in the world, is there.  What a prize.

   Early in this century a systematic long-range program was
begun by a small group of immensely powerful people.  The goal of
this program was to acquire ever greater control over American
society.  This was to lead ultimately to America's merging into a
One-World Government with themselves and their heirs in control.

   The method by which this would be accomplished was the
dismantling of the basic structure of American society and its
reconstruction in the image desired by those who had decided to
play 'God'.  And to carry out this long-range program, powerful
tax-free Foundations were established and given the halo of
philanthropy.  They were explained to the public as simply a
special means the wealthy had devised for giving to the public at
large.  Each Foundation was thus given the image of an
institutional Santa Claus.

   Instead of questioning what they did, the American people were
led to accept their activities in the confident belief that they
were just showering wonderful gifts on our society day in and day
out.  This is the picture that is still accepted as the truth by
most Americans.  They believe it just as fervently as millions of
small children believe in Santa Claus.  The raw truth about this
network of Foundations may therefore sound unbelievable--just as
it sounds unbelievable to a small child if he is told there is no
Santa Claus.

   For months now I've been referring to the role that has been
played by these Foundations in undermining American society and
placing us in the extreme peril we now face.  Now I have been
given permission to reveal one of my primary sources of
information about these Foundations, and to repeat for you his
own words about them.  He is my friend Mr. Norman Dodd.  Mr. Dodd
was Director of Research of the special committee of the United
States House of Representatives to investigate tax-exempt
Foundations in 1953 and 1954.  The late Congressman Carroll Reece
of Tennessee was chairman of this very important committee.

   Recently Mr. Dodd gave a rare speech here in Washington, D.C.,
and he has given permission to repeat it here for you.  I will
now be quoting him.

                       -------------------

   "This is not going to be a speech.  This is a sharing of ideas
born of experience, and I'd like to begin by qualifying myself in
your minds.

   I am a product of a strange type of education and schooling. 
The education of which I am a product featured the importance of
the question 'WHY?' and then went on to try to instill in us the
importance of the question plus our responsibility as individuals
to find the answers.  I happen to have taken this education and
schooling seriously and I have lived accordingly.

   In this schooling to which I was subjected, great stress was
laid upon the history of this country to illustrate the feature I
have just mentioned.  As a result I participated in and was
witness to something in the nature of a discovery--which was that
in the 200 years of our history many more truths made themselves
self-evident than motivated our Founding Fathers.  One of these
truths bears heavily upon the experiences that I shall recite to
you.

   The truth, were it to be put in words, would read something
like this.  I'll repeat it slowly because it is quite significant
and deserving of considerable thought:

   The condition or state of the members of any nation at any
given time reflects the use to which the wealth they have
produced is being put by others than the ones who played a part
in its production.

That brings me to two experiences which I will describe to you.

   The first was my response to an invitation from the president
of the FORD FOUNDATION in his offices in New York.  His name:
Rowan Gaither.  Upon arriving there I was greeted with the
following:

  'Mr. Dodd, we invited you to come because we thought that
perhaps, off the record, you would be kind enough to tell us why
the Congress is interested in the operations of Foundations such
as ourselves.'

Before I could think how best to reply, he volunteered this:

  'Mr. Dodd, we operate here under directives which emanate from
the White House.  Would you like to know what the substance of
these directives is?'

My answer was:  'Yes, Mr. Gaither, I would like very much to
know.'  Whereupon he said:

  'The substance of the directives under which we operate is that
we shall use our grant-making power so to alter life in the
United States that we can be comfortably merged with the Soviet
Union.'

Needless to say, I nearly fell off the chair.  As soon as I could
recover myself to reply, I said:

  'Mr. Gaither, legally you are entitled to use your grant-making
power for this purpose, but I don't think you are entitled to
withhold this information from the American people to whom you
are beholden for your tax exemption.  So why do you not tell the
American people what you have just told me?'

His answer was:

  'Mr. Dodd, we would not think of doing that.'

That was one experience that was very informative.  It was
incredible; nevertheless, it is the truth.

   The next experience involved the acceptance of an invitation
from the CARNEGIE ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE.  This
invitation came in response to a letter which I had written the
Endowment asking a few pertinent questions.  By 'pertinent' I
mean that they related to the effort of the Congress to determine
if Foundations were engaged in what the Congress said could be
'un-American activities', without defining 'un-American.'  I
arrived at the office of Dr. Joseph Johnson, who was then
president of the Endowment.  He was the successor to Alger Hiss. 
Present were two vice-presidents, relatively new men, and counsel
(a partner in the law firm of Sullivan and Cromwell).  After
amenities, Dr. Johnson opened the conversation this way:

  'Mr. Dodd, we have received your letter.  We can answer the
questions but it will be a great deal of trouble.  The reason for
its being a great deal of trouble is that with the ratification
by the Senate of the United Nations treaty, our task was done;
and so we bundled up everything in the way of records and sent
them to the warehouse, and adopted a policy of constructing a
building across the street from the United Nations which will
serve as a facility for the benefit of those many organizations
which from this point on will be bound to follow the activities
of the United Nations.  So we have a counter suggestion which is
as follows:

   If you can spare a member of your staff and send him to New
York for two weeks, we'll provide a room in our library and also
make available to him the Minute Books of this corporation from
its inception.'

My first reaction was that he had lost his mind.  I had some
suspicion of what these Minute Books might well contain; but here
was counsel and there seemed to be no disagreement on the part of
the vice-presidents--and all of them were relatively young, so my
guess was that none of them had ever read the Minutes themselves. 
As a result, I accepted the invitation and did send a member of
my staff to New York.  That member brought back to me on
dictaphone belts the following:

   We are now back to roughly 1908 when the Trustees raised the
question, asking themselves:

(1)  Is there any way known to man more effective than war,
assuming they wish to alter the life of an entire people?

They discussed this question academically and in a scholarly
fashion for almost a year, and came up with the conclusion that
WAR is the most effective means known to man, assuming that
objective.

   Then they raised question No. 2:

(2)  How to involve the United States in a war?

This was in 1909.  I doubt if there was any subject more removed
from the minds of the people in this country at that time than
the possibility of involvement in war.  There were intermittent
shows, you will remember, in the Balkans; and my guess is that
not many people in the country even knew where the Balkans were. 
They answered the question this way:

  'We must control the diplomatic machinery of the United
States.'

   That brings up question no. 3, which is:

(3)  How do we secure control of the diplomatic machinery of the
United States?

   and the answer comes up:

  'We must control the State Department.'

   That fits in with prior findings which we had uncovered;
namely, that the hand of the Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace inside the State Department was a fact.

   Finally, we are in a war.  These Trustees have the brashness
to congratulate themselves on the wisdom and validity of their
original decision because already the impact of our participation
in World War I has indicated its capacity to alter our national
life.  They even go so far as to word and dispatch a telegram to
President Wilson, pressuring him to see to it that the war does
not end too quickly!

   Finally, the war is over.  The Trustees then take up the
problem which they face: namely, of preventing, as they put it, a
reversion of life in the United States to what it was prior to
1914.  They came up with the conclusion that:

   To gain that end, we must control education in the United
States.

They realize this is a prodigious piece of work so they seek and
obtain the assistance of the ROCKEFELLER FOUNDATION.  They then
divide the task into parts, giving to the Rockefeller Foundation
the responsibility of altering education as it pertains to
domestic subjects.  They retain for themselves the task of
altering our education as it pertains to subjects bearing on our
international relationships.  Then they decide together that the
key to this is an alteration in the teaching of American history,
so they approach three of the then existing prominent historians
with the proposition that they alter the manner in which, up to
then, they had presented the subject.  They are all turned down
flat.

   They then decide that it is necessary for them to build their
own stable of historians.  They approach the GUGGENHEIM
FOUNDATION, which specializes in the awarding of fellowships, and
suggest: When we discover a likely young person who is studying
and looking forward to becoming a teacher of history, we will
take him to London to pursue his studies.  So they take 20 to
London, and these 20 are briefed in what is expected of them. 
These 20 return and eventually become the most active influence
in the American Historical Society.

   This coincides with the appearance which perhaps you will
remember of book after book the contents of which cast aspersion
on the Founders of this country, cast aspersion on the ideas
which prompted the founding of this country, and relegates them
to the realm of myth!

   Finally toward the end of the 1920's the Endowment grants the
American Historical Society $400,000 for the sole purpose of
rendering a report as to what the future of this country promises
to be and should be!  This appears in seven volumes.  The seventh
volume, of course, summarizes the contents of the other six, and
it ends on this note:

  'The future belongs to collectivism administered with
characteristic American humanitarianism and efficiency.'

   Well, in essence this was the whole story written down; and
Mr. Reece who was chairman of the investigation--the last
investigation of Foundations--hoped to be able to accomplish
this.  He was not able to do this owing to the disinterest on the
part of the committee's counsel and the violent activities of one
of its members.  I might mention that that member whose
activities barred the way was none other than Wayne Hays--who has
come to the end of his career, although this marked the start of
it."

                       -------------------

   Mr. Dodd concluded his talk with some additional comments
which I want to save for another discussion, since they go beyond
the subject of Foundations alone.  But you may want to replay
what I have just recited from his speech, noting carefully how
different the truth is from appearances.  And remember, the truth
has many enemies!

   And so it is that the 20th Century has been an unparalleled
era of increasingly destructive warfare, violence, and terror on
a world-wide scale.  By pursuing with relentless determination
the goal of merging the United States into ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT,
the Trustees of the key group of major Foundations have brought
us to the threshold of NUCLEAR WAR ONE--to be waged primarily on
American soil.

   As I first revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May
1976, some of the present-day Trustees of these Foundations have
been awakening to the threat of a Soviet double cross in the
grand plan for world domination--and last summer this double
cross got underway with the planting of short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles within the territorial waters
of the United States, as well as of many other countries.  But
the world-wide economic and political empire that is today
presided over by the Four Rockefeller Brothers is so huge that it
includes many individuals who still do not believe that any
Soviet double cross will take place, much less that it is already
underway.

                CHEMICAL WARFARE ALREADY UNDERWAY

   For example, last month I reported that 18 Soviet submarines
were deployed along our west coast preparing to inject plutonium
particles into the air on November 20, 1976.  And our own
EPA--the Environmental Protection Agency--was cooperating by
telling us that on that date a radioactive cloud from a Chinese
atomic test would begin passing over our west coast, when
actually the radioactive cloud from China had not yet left
China's own borders!  By interesting coincidence, Russell Trane,
the head of the EPA, arrived in a presumably safe location,
Moscow, on November 19--the day before the plutonium was to be
released by the Soviet subs.  With appropriate irony, he arrived
there as head of the United States delegation to the
"Soviet-American Commission for Cooperation in Environmental
Protection."  Can you imagine?

   The plutonium was released by the subs as scheduled on
November 20; but just as happened when this was done the first
time in early October, unusual weather conditions kept the United
States from being badly contaminated.  The plutonium cloud
drifted across the upper part of the United States and had little
effect at ground level.  But, my friends, the Soviets never give
up.

   Five days ago on December 13 I learned that Soviet submarines
were lining up along the northwest coast of the United States for
the third time for this purpose.  This time there are 21
submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our
atmosphere.  According to my latest Intelligence sources, 16 are
deployed along the coast from Seattle, Washington to Eugene,
Oregon, while five (5) more lie between Eugene and Eureka,
California.  All of these are within 20 miles of the shoreline.

   I've already explained in detail the connection between this
radioactive chemical warfare and the Swine Flu hoax being
perpetrated by the United States Government, particularly in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17.  Therefore it is significant that
the so-called Swine Flu inoculation program was halted with great
publicity two days ago owing to death and paralysis suffered by
many who have taken the vaccine.  This serves to focus the
nation's attention once again on the terrible threat Swine Flu is
said to be just at a time when the Soviet submarines are once
again prepared to inject a poison into our atmosphere that can
produce severe flu-like symptoms.  It may be that, as was done
the past two times, the Soviet submarines will wait for another
announcement from the United States Government that it will serve
as a cover story, such as a Chinese nuclear test, before
releasing the plutonium into our air.  But now they have acquired
some experience and it is possible that they will release the
plutonium at any time.

   Meanwhile the build-up for war continues.  While the mounting
Soviet threat to Europe is fraying the nerves of NATO Defense
Ministers, the most immediate threat to Europe is once again
emerging in the Middle East.  In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6
over a year ago I revealed the over-all plan that existed at that
time for war to begin in the Middle East.  I ask you now to
listen to that AUDIO LETTER No. 6 again.  All is nearly ready
once again for the long planned war in the Middle East to be
ignited.  The Rockefeller oil interests now have gotten most of
their money out of the Arab region.  Now the title to all the oil
fields have been sold to the Arabs themselves.

   The Middle East war will also leave the United States in an
even more defenseless position that we are now in if the Soviet
surprise attack on our country is allowed to take place.

CONTINUING THREAT OF SOVIET UNDERWATER MISSILES PLANTED WITHIN
AND NEAR UNITED STATES BORDERS

   Last month I explained in detail why the underwater missiles
that are being planted along our shores by the Soviet Union are
so crucial to them in their plan to defeat the United States in
NUCLEAR WAR ONE, but I also explained that they are no longer
being removed by the United States Navy.

   Since I recorded that tape, 57 more nuclear missiles have been
planted in our own territorial waters.  Added to the 36 I
mentioned last month, this brings the total to 93 Soviet missiles
in the waters of the United States including Alaska and Hawaii. 
In addition, four (4) missiles still threaten the Panama Canal,
and five (5) more missiles now threaten Canada.

   I declared last month that I would no longer reveal the
locations of these missiles unless and until responsible
arrangements are made to inform the public of the deadly threat
we are under.  Our Secret Rulers had been using my information
from October 1st onward only for their own benefit--and that is
not what it is for.

   I intend to continue to hold my silence until action is taken
for everyone's benefit.  Nevertheless I am going to make one
exception at this time--it involves Hawaii.  World War II began
with a devastating surprise attack on Pearl Harbor, and now no
less than nine (9) Soviet underwater missiles now threaten Pearl
Harbor and the Island of Oahu with the same fate a second time.

   I will now give the coordinates for these nine missiles only,
in hopes that this time action will be taken to protect the
United States Pacific Fleet from the attack that could come at
any moment.  These coordinates are:

Missile #1:
   21 degrees/13 minutes/47 seconds North
   157 degrees/46 minutes/28 seconds West

Missile #2:
   21-18-37 North, 157-57-21 West

Missile #3:
   21-17-31 North, 158- 4-17 West

Missile #4:
   21-21-19 North, 158- 9- 7 West

Missile #5:
   21-36-12 North, 158-12-48 West

Missile #6:
   21-36-33 North, 158-11- 6 West

Missile #7:
   21-26-54 North, 157-47-17 West

Missile #8:
   21-19-27 North, 157-38-36 West

Missile #9: About 25 miles east of Oahu and 8 miles north of
Molokai at
   21-21-13 North, 157-15-26 West.

   I continue to hope, my friends, that a war can still be
prevented.  To find out what you can do in the event war does
come, I suggest you read issue 135 of McKeever's Multinational
Investment and Survival Letter, 1012 Russell St., Baltimore, MD 
21230, but my prayer is that you will never need that kind of
information.

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #18

Audio letter No. 18

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (Current 1982
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is November 20,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 18.

   As I speak with you today, we are drawing ever closer to being
swallowed up by the evils unleashed two generations ago by a
tight network of Foundation Trustees.  Operating under a false
cloak of philanthropy, supposedly for the benefit of others, they
actually launched long-range programs designed to grab everything
for themselves.

   Claiming to improve education in the cause of freedom, they
actually began replacing education with indoctrination in the
cause of collectivism.  And while painting themselves as
champions of peace, they have led the world into war after war on
the road to their version of "peace"--that is, an all-powerful
WORLD GOVERNMENT with themselves in control.

   Blinded by the insatiable greed for power, they could not see
that they were opening Pandora's box, setting forces in motion
that would ultimately prove impossible to control.  Only
recently, with disaster looming up fast, have the present-day
successors to those original Trustees begun awakening to this
fact, too late to regain control.  Now only the truth spread far
and wide can avert total catastrophe.

   Two years ago the United States of America plunged over the
brink of a devastating economic collapse as the result of
deliberate measures to create "stagflation", as I described in my
1973 book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR.  But the process was
arrested part way down because other aspects of the Master Plan
for world domination were slipping behind schedule.

   As I have related in detail in previous tapes, factors such as
the still concealed Fort Knox Gold and Plutonium Scandals,
reverses in the Middle East, Indira Gandhi's upset of the CIA in
India, and other things have caused our Unseen Rulers enormous
difficulties for over 18 months.  But time is running out, and it
is do-or-die for those who seek to enslave us.  So now the United
States has at last been pried loose from its temporary economic
foothold and we are falling slowly but helplessly like a dreamer
in a nightmare toward the dreaded economic depression far below.

   Politically, the phantom election plan I revealed last month
by which Nelson Rockefeller still plans to become America's chief
executive is proceeding so far exactly as planned.  Sixty-eight
per cent of the voting precincts nation-wide had voting machines
on November 2, 1976, and where they jammed all across the country
there was no provision for paper ballots!  Thousands of ballots
were lost in certain areas, the legality of thousands of others
is being challenged, and re-counts are under way in some places. 
The net result, exactly as planned, was an extremely close
popular vote and no landslide for anyone.  President Gerald Ford
thought he had the election "in the bag", having been promised by
Nelson Rockefeller that he would carry New York State, but the
pained expression on Ford's face as his wife delivered his
concession statement on November 3 was nothing compared to the
shock that awaits Jimmy Carter if the plan now under way
succeeds.  Meanwhile, as the stage is being set for economic and
political shocks in America, we drift ever closer to war and a
"Declaration of National Emergency" that could spell the end of
our freedoms, and the dangerous Intelligence gap created by Henry
Kissinger continues.

   When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17 on October 26,
last month, I mentioned that the Soviet Union already knew where
our lost Phoenix Missile was in the North Sea but had not
retrieved it.  I had just learned of the missile's location and
revealed it in that tape.  On October 27, the following day, as
soon as the tape was released, I also relayed it to Military
Intelligence.  That same day Navy spokesmen told the press that
they still had not located the Phoenix; but using the information
I relayed to them, the Navy found and retrieved the Phoenix
Missile on October 31.  The United States Government would have
you believe it is mere coincidence that they suddenly found the
Phoenix after I revealed its location, even though the Navy had
spent six weeks in a fruitless search prior to that!

   There are also those who would have you believe that General
George S. Brown, the top military officer in the United States,
met with me for more than an hour on September 16, 1976 in his
Pentagon office out of idle curiosity.  And especially there are
many who want you to believe there will be no reason for the
Soviet Union to do as I have charged, planting
underwater-launched nuclear missiles within our own territorial
waters; but nothing, my friends, could be further from the truth. 
What the Soviet Union has done and is doing is completely logical
and to be expected if we look at it from their point of view.  As
Mrs. Margaret Thatcher, leader of the Conservative Party in
England, recently said, and I quote:

  "The danger is our Western tendency to assume that other people
will apply our own standards and values.  When considering
international matters, the important thing is not to look at
other nations as if we were standing in their shoes but as if
they were standing in their shoes."

If you depend, as most Americans do, on the controlled major
media for your understanding of the world, you will never learn
to think this way nor can you hope to grasp the real issues that
govern military survival; yet such understanding is essential if
we are to see how to correct our dangerous situation.

   One organization which in my opinion does do an excellent job
of clarifying matters of defense and national security is the
American Security Council located at Boston, Virginia.  Their zip
is 22713.  I recommend the Council as an excellent source of
information for every concerned American.

   To help in understanding the threat we now face and how we got
into such a position, I will discuss the following three topics
today:

Topic #1--THE MUSHROOMING DEBATE OVER SOVIET MILITARY POWER

Topic #2--WHY THE SOVIET UNION WANTS NUCLEAR WAR

Topic #3--HOW GOVERNMENTAL AND PRESS SECRECY ARE DESTROYING OUR
CHANCES FOR PEACE.

Topic #1--Secretary of State Henry Kissinger has said over and
over again for nearly a decade, quote:

  "Detente, or nuclear holocaust; there is no third way."

With this in mind, public discussion of American-Soviet relations
has focused for years on the alleged happy fruits of detente--the
growing thaw between East and West, etc.--but lately there has
been an ominous change.  President Ford dropped the word
"detente" from his active vocabulary, and mounting of concern
over the ragged condition of NATO forces has been expressed
increasingly by European and American leaders.

   Just last week two so-called prestigious groups burst upon the
public scene to churn up controversy over the issues of mounting
Soviet military power.  First, on November 11 came the "Committee
for the Present Danger" urging presumed President-elect Carter to
increase military spending, instead of decreasing it as promised
during the election campaign.  Then three days later a study
group financed by the Rockefeller Foundation proposed the
opposite--that we undertake joint military reductions with the
Soviet Union, perhaps initiating the process with selected
unilateral reductions of our own.  And the warnings continue!

   Just three days ago a representative of Boeing Aerospace
Company testified before Congress that in case of nuclear war,
98% of the Soviet population would survive because of the
elaborate Civil Defense precautions being taken there.  By
contrast, of course, the United States has no Civil Defense
program worthy of the name.  Obviously detente is fading from the
official scene rapidly.  According to the Kissinger formula, that
means nuclear holocaust is on its way.  But where did he get that
formula?

   The word "detente" is just another word for what was termed
"peaceful coexistence" in the early 60's, and the Kissinger
formula first emerged in October 1959 in the form, quote:

  "Peaceful coexistence or nuclear holocaust--there is no third
way."

But the speaker then was not Henry Kissinger; it was Nikita
Khrushchev.

   The peaceful coexistence idea which later became so-called
"detente" began 20 years ago when Khrushchev announced a major
new Soviet policy line--namely, that war with the West was not
inevitable after all, contrary to the teachings of Lenin. 
Instead, the nuclear age had made peaceful coexistence necessary. 
To most Westerners, this sounded like "live and yet live"; but to
the Soviet Union it meant only the avoidance of a war which could
destroy the Soviet Union.  It was all right to continue to break
off chunks of the free world by intrigue, subversion, and
so-called "wars of national liberation", such as those which have
occurred in Vietnam, Angola, and elsewhere.  The Soviet Union
concentrated on selling the idea of peaceful coexistence for five
years from 1956 to 1961, ably assisted by their allies here in
the United States.

   Then in 1961 a major new phase began as John F. Kennedy became
president of the United States.  For decades the State
Socialists, who run the Soviet Union, had been in alliance with
and supported by the Corporate Socialists whose control over the
United States was drawing ever more complete.  Now at long last
the time was ripe to launch their well-orchestrated joint program
that was to lead to complete dictatorial control of the United
States by the Corporate Socialists, Soviet conquest of vast areas
of the world, piecemeal, with Corporate Socialist assistance, and
finally joint domination of the entire world by the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

   The basic idea of the program was for the strength and resolve
of the United States to be undermined and sapped while the Soviet
Union would be enabled to forge ahead into unprecedented world
power.  Communism would be made to appear to be the wave of the
future, while American morale and faith in our free system of
government would be steadily eroded.  Finally according to plan,
the United States would be in the process of increasing
encirclement and vulnerability, more and more countries becoming
Soviet satellites with the unseen help of American Corporate
Socialists who would share in the spoils.  Economic disaster,
military vulnerability, and the collapse of our own
self-confidence would, according to plan, open the door for
dictatorship here in America.

   The single, most critical step in this long-range plan began
to be taken in 1961--the progressive shut-off of critical
research and development programs for future military technology.

   If research uncovers a basic new concept at a given point in
time, it will ordinarily be 5 to 15 years before it can be
translated into a new operational technology.  In between there
must be development, experimentation, evaluation, and full-scale
production programs.  By the same token, if research and
development are cut off, at some point 5 to 15 years later you
will not have the new technology available that would otherwise
have come into being.

   Early justifications for the dwindling R&D program were based
on fond new hopes for disarmament in connection with the new
Soviet stance in favor of peaceful coexistence.  Later, as the
conflict in Vietnam grew into a major war, it became easier to
leave important R&D items out of the already swollen Defense
budget.

   Another key ingredient in the overall plan was to be the use
of Cuban troops as proxies in Soviet so-called "wars of national
liberation" in Latin America and elsewhere.  The Bay of Pigs
invasion in 1961, a few short months after Kennedy took office,
could have produced a serious setback for the Rockefeller-Soviet
plans for overthrow of numerous governments, so Kennedy's
advisers carefully steered him away from making the invasion a
success.

   Meanwhile the Soviet Union constructed long-range plans to
take advantage of the American disadvantage in military
technology that was being arranged to occur in the mid-1970's. 
While our R&D began to decline, theirs accelerated.  By knowing
exactly what to expect, the Soviet Union was able to target its
military development toward achievement of a dominant position 15
years later; and that time has now arrived.

   In 1962, however, a gamble by Nikita Khrushchev almost caused
the whole plan to come apart.  For more than a year a prominent
United States Senator, Kenneth Keating, had been sounding
warnings that offensive nuclear missiles were being placed in
Cuba by the Soviet Union; but his charges were denied by the
Administration, just as my charges about Soviet underwater
missiles are being plausibly denied now.  But President Kennedy
finally decided to look into it himself personally, instead of
accepting blind assurances that there was nothing to it from his
advisers.  He found out that the charges were true and the Cuban
Missile Crisis was upon us.

   The Cuban Missile Crisis led to the elimination from the scene
of both Kennedy and Khrushchev.  First, as I revealed in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975, President Kennedy was
murdered because he was becoming increasingly dangerous to the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.  He had come into office lacking any
real grasp of the realities of international politics--but he was
learning, and learning fast.  It was clearly only a matter of
time before he would get around to reversing the cutoff of our
critical R&D programs.  Already he was initiating steps intended
to turn off our involvement in Vietnam.  Khrushchev, for his
part, took longer to oust since his power had to be chipped away
carefully by his enemies in the Kremlin; but finally he was
removed for jeopardizing the long-range plan of conquest with a
dangerous gamble that failed.

   Looking ahead toward the increasing opportunities that would
present themselves for the Soviet Union to benefit at America's
expense, the "Institute of the United States of America" was
founded early in the 1960's in Moscow.  This Institute, whose
purpose is to study the vulnerabilities of the United States, was
founded with the help of financing from the Rockefeller
Foundation.

   Once the Oval Office was inhabited by Lyndon Johnson, the
grand plan proceeded onward without further difficulty! 
Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara played an especially
important role in several ways.  The period during which he
served, from 1961 to 1968, was one in which research and
development carried out prior to the R&D cutoff would potentially
be continuing to bear fruit; but McNamara, doing the bidding of
those who had placed him in that position, succeeded in causing
the cancellation of important advanced weapons programs,
decommissioning of many Defense installations, physical scrapping
of huge quantities of Defense materiel, and costly concentration
of effort on ill-fated programs, such as the F-111 multipurpose
Air Force Navy fighter.  He also championed the
impressive-sounding theory of warfare called "Measured Response"
which guaranteed the escalation of Vietnam into a major war by
preventing clear-cut, decisive wins in battle.  As his reward for
such 'valuable' service, McNamara was made president of the World
Bank.  Can you imagine?

   With the inauguration of President Richard M. Nixon of January
20, 1969, the Kissinger era of foreign policy emerged in full
bloom.  Kissinger had been an influential voice in Government
since the early 60's, thanks to his association with Nelson
Rockefeller that began in 1955.  Now he became one of the most
important Rockefeller-Soviet agents in the United States
Government!  Following the outlines of the long-range plan, he
became known as the architect of so-called detente, repeating
Khrushchev's old formula--"peaceful coexistence or nuclear
holocaust"--almost verbatim.

   In 1972 detente entered a new phase.  The SALT I Agreement was
signed in Moscow by President Nixon in May of that year. 
Meanwhile, the same year, the Soviet Union launched the massive
drive in Civil Defense that has lately started attracting
attention.  The Soviet Union could see that the long awaited
opportunity to pull ahead of the United States was fast
approaching.  That same year, 1972, saw the expansion of
so-called detente to Red China.  Kissinger also played a central
role in this development; but far from promoting real peace,
Kissinger was undoing a golden opportunity for freedom for a
quarter of the world's people--and possibly peace for the entire
world.

   What I am about to tell you is top secret, and I am revealing
it for the very first time.

   Some years ago an international entrepreneur (whom I will call
"Smith") was in the act of selling a large European bank when he
was approached by a Chinese on a business venture involving a
retired Chinese general (whom I will call "Lee").  Lee had known
both Chiang Kai-shek and Mao Tse-tung very well during earlier
revolutionary days, and was still closely associated with six
regional military chieftains in Red China who were all genuinely
anti-Soviet in every way.  Moreover, after the turmoil that took
place in Red China in 1957 and later, these Chinese military
chieftains became completely disenchanted and disgusted with
Mao's program of using young hoodlums to terrorize and murder all
suspected opposition to his dictatorial and oppressive programs. 
Mao's euphemistic term, cultural revolution, for these cutthroat
methods of bending the people to his will, did not impress them. 
They contacted Lee and queried him as to the possibility of
getting American support in case they should decide to overthrow
Mao and establish a republic using the customary parliamentary
form of government.  Those who preferred the security of
Socialism would be allowed to live in communes, but the
government would foster a free-market system for the country as a
whole.

   General Lee arranged through the United States Department of
State to send envoys through the Bamboo Curtain to make the
necessary arrangements; but someone in the State Department
leaked the information to Red Chinese officials, and all of the
envoys were quickly apprehended and put to death.  Nevertheless
General Lee persisted.  He asked Mr. Smith if he could arrange
for broadcasting equipment to inform all of Red China what was
taking place, why the military deemed it necessary to overturn
Mao, and what form of government would be established.  Smith
agreed to contact certain top officials in the United States
Government close to the President, however General Lee emphasized
that he must circumvent Henry Kissinger and get the ear of Mr.
Nixon only, since Lee did not trust Kissinger nor anyone else in
the State Department.  The contacts were made, but unfortunately
a member of another agency heard of the plan and briefed
President Nixon about it in front of Kissinger.  Almost
immediately arrangements were made for Kissinger to visit China
to meet secretly with Mao.

   This meeting took place, and at the meeting Kissinger informed
Mao that he would be overthrown by a military coup unless Mao's
regime chose to cooperate with those who held the real power in
the United States.  To sweeten the deal for Mao, certain secret
agreements were made concerning the future course of American
relationships with the Republic of China on Taiwan.  The
outgrowth of the meeting was ping-pong diplomacy--the Nixon
summit trip to Peking in February 1972, and so-called detente
between Red China and the United States.  In return, Mao
Tse-tung's ironhanded dictatorship over Red China was rendered
secure once again.  Red China would thus continue to be a
controllable threat to the Soviet Union.  With any real threat to
the Soviet Union from the direction of Red China taken care of,
the Rockefeller-Soviet plan continued.

   Last year the Helsinki Accord gave the Soviet Union
essentially what she had wanted for 20 years--a ratification of
her conquests in Eastern Europe.  By thus signaling to the
imprisoned countries behind the Iron Curtain that we consider
them to be within the Soviet sphere, we reduce any tendency they
might have to revolt in case of war.  The Soviet western flank is
thus made far more secure than before.

   In the past several years, countries have been falling into
the Soviet orbit at a quickening pace with their domination
shared secretly by their Corporate Socialist allies here in
America.  At the same time, the declining military might of the
United States and the fast increasing threat from the Soviet
Union has finally become too obvious to hide any longer.  This
stage, too, was foreseen and planned.

   All of the economic, political, and military factors are
intended to lead to a "Declaration of National Emergency" here in
America, dictatorship, and war!

   But, as it turned out, there is a terrible joker in the deck
that has been dealt by the Rockefeller empire in its hidden
collaboration with the Soviet Union.  The war to come, NUCLEAR
WAR ONE waged primarily on American soil, was supposed to be
neatly limited and controlled with a "Nuclear Safe Zone" set
aside for the Soviet allies here in America, as I revealed in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last May; but the Soviet Union has
for months been maneuvering to carry out a double cross at this
critical stage in America's increasing vulnerability.  They want
to seize all the marbles for themselves.

Topic #2--For many years American strategic defense strategy has
been based on a concept called "Mutual Assured Destruction", or
MAD.  The idea here is that should either the Soviet Union or the
United States launch a nuclear attack on the other, the victim of
the attack would be able to destroy the attacker in return.  In
this concept, furthermore, the targets are cities, not military
targets such as enemy missile installations.  An ICBM attack
under these conditions would have only one basic purpose--to kill
tens of millions of innocent civilians.  This is the so-called
"balance of terror" we often hear about.

   In World War II, Hitler used V-1 buzz bombs and V-2 missiles
in exactly this way against the civilian population of England
instead of against military targets, thinking to terrorize
England into submission.  But as we all know, it didn't work. 
The British learned to dig into bomb shelters, absorb the
civilian deaths and damage, and meanwhile redoubled their efforts
at military installations to strike back at Hitler in more
important ways.

   The MAD mutual terror defense strategy is nothing more than a
nuclear age version of the very technique that was proven to be
useless over 30 years ago.  We've all heard countless times,
quote: "The last thing the Soviet Union would ever want is a
nuclear exchange with the United States."  This comforting
statement tends to make one accept the foolish MAD defense
doctrine, if it is to be believed; but it is wrong.  The
announcement by Nikita Khrushchev in 1956 that all-out war was
not inevitable with the West after all, appeared to be a
renunciation of a basic Leninist principle, but it was not.  It
was simply the beginning of an elaborate 20-year ploy to make us
lower our guard so that when the inevitable all-out conflict did
come, the Soviet Union would be in a position to win.

   History is repeating itself.  In the late 1930's many people
made the mistake of believing that Hitler did not actually want
war but was willing to risk it in order to obtain concessions, so
the concessions were made with the idea that this would prevent
war.  Only too late was it realized that Hitler was determined to
have a war one way or another.

   In the past, the Soviet Union has been notably cautious when
skirting the fringes of a possible nuclear war, but that was
while she was still at a disadvantage militarily.  Now for the
first time the Soviets are emerging into a totally new situation
in which their military power is second to none.  With the rapid
collapse of free governments now occurring around the globe, the
over-all correlation of forces, as they call it, is shifting
rapidly in favor of the Soviet Union.  The Soviet Union is now
No. 1 in military power, while the United States is No. 2--a
situation that has never existed before.

   The time is now ripe for the Soviets to press their advantage
in an effort to seize control of the world.  The standing threat
from Red China is often mentioned hopefully as a major factor
tending to offset any Soviet ideas of waging major war against
us; but this, too, is in error.  The Soviet fear of Red China,
far from acting as a brake, is spurring them on.  Right now Red
China is leaning on the United States; but should the United
States be knocked out of action by a Soviet hammer blow before
China could take advantage of the situation, China would then be
isolated.  Red China would then have no choice but to patch
things up with the Soviet Union and cooperate, at least on
pragmatic matters.  Of course with the United States defeated,
and the two Communist superpowers joining forces once again, the
fate of the rest of the world would no longer be in question. 
Thus, as I stated in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15, if we fall, the
world falls; and that is the basis of Soviet strategy.

   Thus the Soviet Union does want nuclear war with the United
States provided the Soviet Union is prepared to survive with
losses limited to acceptable levels, and provided the United
States can be destroyed as a military rival in the process.  The
Soviet rulers emphatically do not think of nuclear war as
something that could only happen as the unwanted result of a
confrontation, even though this is how we tend to think of it. 
To them war, including nuclear war, is a tool of conquest to be
used whenever it is advantageous to do so.

   People have asked the question: Why would the Soviet Union
plant underwater missiles in our waters when they already have
ICBMs, missile-launching submarines, and so forth?  Even some
officials who know about the Soviet missiles raise this question
in various forms as a smoke screen to create doubt.  For once you
understand the basic Soviet viewpoint I have described, the
reasons for the planting of underwater missiles become far easier
to grasp.

   To begin with, the underwater missiles constitute a
first-strike capability for the Soviet Union--that is, they are
concentrated on military targets.  Specifically, they are
intended to wipe out our naval bases, major ports, and a good
fraction of our naval fleet in one sudden, surprise blow without
advance warning.  This type of first strike is quite different
from those usually discussed, but would be extremely effective. 
Consider the choice faced by an American president immediately
after such a sudden strike by the Soviet Union by means of its
underwater missiles followed by a Soviet ultimatum to surrender! 
True, the American naval forces at sea around the world at the
time of the attack would be unaffected and our missile subs could
give the Soviet Union an unpleasant pasting.  Even our ICBMs
might still be available to fire, but what then?

   First, the damage we could now inflict on the Soviet Union
would be minimized by the mammoth Civil Defense preparations that
have been under way in the Soviet Union for five years and more. 
If the president did choose to counterattack, several million
Soviet citizens would possibly die and a small portion of the
military and industrial facilities of the Soviet Union not
underground would be destroyed.  But the vast majority of the
Soviet population would survive our counterattack as would a
large part of their military-industrial complex.  Now it would be
their turn again.

   The price we would pay for disobeying the Soviet ultimatum
would be awesome.  A salvo of ICBMs, not the whole Soviet ICBM
force, perhaps but a few hundred nonetheless, would rain down on
the United States, hitting both military targets and big cities. 
Thanks to the well named MAD defense strategy we have followed,
we have no Civil Defense and the carnage would be beyond
imagination, especially since Soviet nuclear warheads are many
times more powerful than ours.

   As for our naval forces, attacks by Soviet antiship cruise
missiles would rapidly take their toll; and the inability of
returning to port for fuel and more weapons would cause our navy
to wither away as a fighting force.  It would only be a matter of
time until our vital sea lanes of commerce were totally
destroyed.  The process might continue perhaps for some time, but
the outcome would not be in doubt.  The Soviet Union would be
able to outlast us and outblast us once the initial crucial
strike against our navy was made with the underwater missiles.

   The secret of success of the Soviet plan is their use of a
weapon system that would enable the first strike against our navy
to be a complete surprise with extremely reliable results.  The
greatest possible surprise, of course, would have been achieved
if our navy had never even known the missiles were there off our
shores until the moment they were fired.  That was the surprise
element that my monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 were
intended to remove last summer.

   Another element of surprise has to do with the warning time if
a missile is actually launched.  With ICBMs, satellite
surveillance can provide a warning time of 20 minutes or
so--plenty of time to launch our own missiles in retaliation if
the decision is made to do so.  Submarine-launched ballistic
missiles may cut the warning time to a few minutes.  But in the
case of the short-range underwater-launch missiles, there is
virtually no warning at all since they must travel only a short
distance and the time of flight is brief.  By the time they are
detected and our defenses alerted, they will be exploding over
their targets.

   There is only one other kind of warning, which is probably the
most important of all--advance warning of impending attack
through Intelligence channels and through reading the meaning of
political tensions.  Up to now, for example, NATO defense
planning has assumed that any attack on Western Europe by the
Soviet Union would be preceded by a warning of at least three
weeks.  And 35 years ago there were several advance warnings
before the attack on Pearl Harbor beginning a week or so ahead of
time, but at that time these warnings were deliberately blocked
at high levels of the United States Government because certain
individuals wanted to insure that the attack did occur!  And now
the chance of obtaining advance warning of impending attack is
once again reduced, thanks to the Intelligence gap created by
Secretary of State Henry Kissinger!

   When the Soviet Union decides the time is ripe to attack, they
do not intend to telegraph their intentions in advance.  In this
regard, the underwater missiles lurking along our shores can be
invaluable to them.  Their ICBMs have too long a warning time and
insufficient accuracy and reliability for the Soviet rulers to
employ them with full confidence in a world-wide naval Pearl
Harbor attack, such as I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
15.  And if they chose to use their missile-launching submarines
for that purpose closing in to short range to produce short
flight times for their missiles, they would risk alerting our
navy that something was up because of the peculiar deployment of
their submarines.

   On top of that, a world-wide surprise attack of the kind
contemplated by the Soviets depends for its success on a
simultaneous strike everywhere.  Not an easy thing to achieve
with missiles launched by numerous submarines all over the world;
but the underwater missiles are made to order for a surprise
attack.  They lurk unseen for days, weeks, or months until they
are needed; then when they are to be fired, the preparations for
the attack can be made without any outward sign at all, deep
inside a Command Post in the Soviet Union.  To launch the attack
itself, a signal need only be flashed world-wide from the Command
Post, while the observable activities of the Soviet Union,
military and otherwise, proceed in normal patterns giving no hint
of the impending attack!

   When the surprise attack plan of the Soviet Union is known,
the question is no longer: Why would they plant those underwater
missiles?  The question becomes: Why wouldn't they do it?

   The Soviet Union is prepared to wage war with several times
our own nuclear firepower.  At the same time, they are prepared
to survive such a war as a viable society with population losses
of perhaps no more than 2%.  That's around five-million lives,
and it is indeed very hard for you and me to imagine deliberately
accepting such losses for a political purpose.  But remember, the
Soviet bosses think their way, not our way; and if they were to
suffer losses that large, our own losses could be 50- to
100-million!

   Provided they have the ability to disable the United States
Navy at the outset with the surprise attack they have planned,
the Soviets believe they have little to lose and everything to
gain now by their standards in a nuclear war; and that is why the
Soviet Union wants nuclear war now.

Topic #3--Since early July 1976 short-wave radio communications
world-wide have been disrupted by what one ham radio operator
describes as, quote: "A super-enormous strong signal that sounds
like a buzz saw."  Not only hams have been affected but maritime,
aeronautical, and telecommunications channels have been rendered
practically useless in some cases.  The signal is a rasping sound
that pulses 10 times per second, originating from Soviet
transmitters.

   The monitoring branch of the Federal Communications Commission
has received a flood of complaints and has written four
complaints to Moscow about it, without any reply whatsoever. 
According to Robert Kutz, chief of the FCC's International
Operations Division, this silence from the Soviet Union is very
unusual, quote: "Usually they have been very cooperative, unless
there's something particularly unique about this situation."

   Indeed there is something unique about these Soviet radio
signals, my friends.  They are transmissions between Moscow and
Soviet submarines world-wide by means of the Advanced
Communications System I mentioned in a recent monthly AUDIO
LETTER.  It is no accident that these signals first began early
in July 1976.  That was the month when I first revealed the
existence of underwater missiles in American and Canadian
territorial waters planted by the Soviets.  It is also no
accident that transmissions like this were first heard in 1962
during the Cuban Missile Crisis.

   The Government professes not to have any idea what these
signals are all about, but they know better.  These signals are
being used to maintain tight coordination of Soviet naval
activities, especially submarine movements, in preparation for
war.  But one lie leads to another; and just as you are not being
told about the Soviet underwater missiles that threaten your life
and your freedom, you are not being told the true meaning of the
Soviet buzz saw signals.

   There are at least 13 transmitters broadcasting these powerful
signals located mostly in Soviet or Soviet-occupied territory. 
Transmitters are operating at Archangel, Leningrad, Moscow, Kiev,
Odessa, Gdansk, the Bosporus Straits, Rostov, Minsk, Warsaw,
Prague, East Berlin, and of all places Loch Ness in Scotland. 
The Loch Ness transmitter is aboard a small submarine that
entered the northeast end of Loch Ness by means of the canal that
connects Loch Ness to Moray Firth.  If there wasn't one before,
there certainly is a Loch Ness monster now, compliments of the
Soviet Union.

   These Soviet transmissions make use of a technique known as
"pulse modulation."  Each of the 10 pulses per second sounds like
nothing more than a meaningless rasp to the ear, but in fact each
pulse contains a superimposed signal in code.  The possible codes
are endless, and a computer is required both to create the coded
pulses for transmissions and to decode them where they are
received.  Therefore unless and until Intelligence information
becomes available on the details of the exact code, it is
practically impossible to intercept and understand the Soviet
messages to their subs.

   But matters even more blatant than the Soviet mysterious
signals are being hidden from you.  For example: Do you know
about the joint Soviet and Cuban naval and aviation maneuvers
that took place from September 15 to September 23, 1976, in the
Caribbean and the Gulf of Mexico?  These war games utilized not
only the new Soviet submarine base at Cienfuegos Harbor not far
from the United States naval station at Guantanamo Bay but also
Marianao and Havana, right across from Florida!  These war
exercises carried a clear threat for the Panama Canal, Puerto
Rico, and our base at Guantanamo Bay; and, in addition, ranged
all along our Gulf coast as far west as Galveston, Texas.  Yet
our so-called Defense Department said not one word about it, and
our sleeping press, following the non-existent lead of our
controlled major media, said nothing about it either.

   Since "Red Friday", October 1, 1976, our Military from General
George S. Brown on down have been muzzled, ordered to flatly deny
charges about Soviet missiles in our waters, if pressed to
comment on them.  Meanwhile, top secret Civil Defense exercises
are now under way here in Washington, D.C. and other sensitive
areas for top Government officials only, while the rest of our
people are left in the dark not only without protection but
without even any official warning that war could be imminent!

   But the last straw came in just the past several days, my
friends.  Last month I reported that immediately after the "Red
Friday" capitulation by President Ford to the Soviet demands
advanced by Andrei Gromyko, Soviet submarines along our east and
west coasts performed a chemical warfare experiment.  Clouds of
radioactive plutonium were released into our atmosphere to drift
inward and contaminate the United States while the United States
Government cooperated by claiming that we were being plastered
with radioactive fallout from a Chinese nuclear test 10 days
earlier.  As I reported last month, we were spared major effects
from that experimental plutonium release due to weather
conditions that did not behave as predicted by the Soviets.  But
now they are poised to do it again!

   On Wednesday November 17 a large Chinese atmospheric hydrogen
bomb test was announced, and immediately we were inundated with
announcements that the radioactive cloud would reach our west
coast only three short days later--today, November 20, 1976. 
Last time they claimed that the Chinese cloud took 10 days to
cover the same distance, but that was because the Soviet subs
were not ready at that time to use the Chinese blast as a cover
for their chemical attack against us.  This time they can hardly
wait.

   As of noon yesterday, November 19, 18 Soviet submarines were
deployed at even intervals along our west coast within about 35
miles of our shore line.  They are not missile launchers but are
equipped specifically for the injection of plutonium into our air
today.  The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is telling us
not to fear the Chinese nuclear cloud alleged to be passing over
our country, but is cooperating completely with the Soviet Union
in providing a totally false cover for the Soviet radioactive
plutonium attack on our country!  In actual fact, the
radioactivity created by the Chinese test itself has not yet gone
beyond Red China's own borders.

   The media are reminding us how terrible Swine Flu might be,
and we are also being told of the disappointingly low number of
eligible Americans who are taking the free Government Swine Flu
shots.  We are told that Swine Flu, if it breaks out, could
spread like wildfire; and now certain persons in the United
States Government are cooperating with the Soviet Union in an
attack on our nation by means of radioactive plutonium, the
effects of which can be mistaken for severe "flu" if intended
dosages are achieved.

   My friends, the so-called mysterious signals from the Soviet
Union stopped temporarily on November 2, but then on November 10
they started up again because Soviet war preparations were
resuming.  Since I talked with you last, 36 new missiles have
been planted in our waters in addition to those I referred to
last month.

   I have not given the locations of these to anyone, and for now
I do not intend to do so.  Now let me tell you why.  On one hand
there are those factions within the shell of a Government left
here in Washington who are actively cooperating with the Soviet
Union.  Some of these are outright Soviet agents; others are part
of the Corporate Socialist network that cooperates with the
Soviets for mutual advantage at the expense of the rest of us. 
Some in this second group still do not believe that a Soviet
double cross has been under way for months in the form of the
underwater missiles in our waters.  On the other hand, there are
many who are honestly trying to counter the Soviet underwater
missile threat acting within constraints imposed on them.

   Prior to October 1, missiles were being removed as they were
planted by the Soviet Union, acting on information I was
providing to General George S. Brown and to Military
Intelligence.  In this capacity, I have been acting as an
information channel to go around the Intelligence gap created by
Henry Kissinger.

   But where is all this leading?  What will happen if traitors
in our midst continue to cover up the truth about the Soviet
underwater missiles, and if patriots in our Government cannot
summon the courage to tell the truth, regardless of the
consequences?  What is going to happen if that situation
continues, my friends, is THERMONUCLEAR WAR and DICTATORSHIP here
in America!

   Even if the United States Navy were to continue removing
Soviet missiles as they are planted--which they have been ordered
NOT to do since October 1--this would not prevent disaster.  The
Soviet Union is able to plant missiles far faster than we can
remove them.  So the information I have been relaying is really
being used now for just one purpose--to enable our leaders to
keep abreast of the chances of attack, and to minimize those
chances until they are ready to run and hide in the 96
underground cities of the "Federal Relocation Arc" to ride out
the war--then war can come, scorching the land and consuming our
people.

   The top-secret information provided me by my sources, often at
the risk of their own lives, is not intended for the private use
of cold-blooded traitors and spineless leaders in the American
Government.  It is intended to bring about exposure of the truth
as the one and only thing that can prevent a war.

   If war comes, it will be a devastating surprise to most
Americans.  The perverse behavior of our public officials in
misusing my information threatens to condemn millions of us to a
nuclear holocaust.  Therefore it is only right that they condemn
themselves at the same time.  Without the missile locations I am
now withholding they, too, will be caught in the lightning
surprise attack by the Soviet Union that threatens to engulf the
rest of us.  Millions of our lives apparently mean nothing at all
to them compared to their service to the Soviet Union, and their
jobs, and their pensions.  But now their lives are at stake along
with the rest of us.  Only if the truth about the Soviet
underwater missiles is exposed will I turn over the new
information I have on which not only our lives but theirs, too,
now depend.

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #17

Audio letter No. 17

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1981 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is October 26,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 17.

   Four months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 I reported the
presence of a Soviet nuclear weapon at Seal Harbor, Maine, placed
where it could destroy the summer homes of David and Nelson
Rockefeller.  The rulers of the Soviet Union were embarking on an
all-out double-cross of their long time allies, the four
Rockefeller Brothers; and for the past four months we have been
in the grip of the "Soviet Missile Crisis of 1976"--a fact of
which most Americans are still unaware.  The month before this
crisis began, in May 1976, I had revealed the rapidly mounting
fears of certain Trustees of the key Rockefeller-controlled
foundations that such a Soviet double-cross was imminent.

   More than half a century ago a commitment was formed for the
creation of a One-World collectivist government to be ruled by a
mere handful of wealthy, immensely powerful individuals.  This
drive, which long ago crystallized into the Rockefeller-Soviet
alliance, had been aided and abetted by the Trustees of the
Rockefeller-controlled group of foundations; but they have opened
Pandora's box, unleashing forces they can no longer control. 
Certain of the Trustees realized this even before the actual
Soviet double-cross began.  But the Gang of Four, the four
Rockefeller Brothers, could not bring themselves to believe it
until the Seal Harbor H-bomb was found by the United States Navy.

   Now they know beyond any doubt that a Soviet double-cross has
been in progress against them--as well as against the rest of us. 
But still the Rockefeller Brothers have not learned their lesson. 
They still think that they can get back to business as usual with
their Soviet allies in their joint program for world domination. 
And for the moment, the Soviet Union is doing everything possible
to encourage this false impression strictly as a tactic.  The
Soviet Union was robbed of the element of surprise by my
disclosures in monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15, and they are
trying to lull the Rockefeller Brothers back to sleep so that
they can be successfully disposed of a little later on.

   Beyond that, the Soviets did not expect to be caught in their
program of planting underwater missiles for a surprise attack;
and because they were caught and their missiles were removed
during August and September, they are proceeding with extra
caution right now.  And so for the moment the alliance between
the four Rockefeller Brothers and the Soviet Union is
functioning, but it is now a false alliance.  The Soviet rulers
are just biding their time, watching and preparing for another
chance to eliminate the Rockefellers and seize the whole world
for themselves.

   Meanwhile you and I are again under attack jointly by the
Rockefellers and the Soviet Union.  In a vain attempt to save
their own lives, the Brothers are bargaining away millions of
ours.  At this moment the United States and Canada are once again
encircled by Soviet underwater missiles and prowling submarines;
but now, since Friday, October 1, 1976, the missiles are no
longer being removed!

   Here are my topics for today:

Topic #1--RED FRIDAY AND THE CAMPAIGN TO DESTROY GENERAL GEORGE
S. BROWN

Topic #2--THE SWINE FLU COVER-UP FOR CHEMICAL WARFARE NOW UNDER
WAY

Topic #3--THE PHANTOM ELECTION OF 1976.

Topic #1--Last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 16 I reviewed
for you the events that had taken place in the Soviet Underwater
Missile Crisis since recording AUDIO LETTER No. 15 in early
August.  As I pointed out, Air Force General George S. Brown,
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, had so far played a
crucial role in preventing a Soviet surprise attack on the United
States, thanks to the actions taken by American Armed Forces
under his command.  In August he had obtained the go-ahead from
President Ford, as Commander in Chief, to seek out and remove the
Soviet underwater missiles in our coastal waters.  A remarkable
achievement, because Ford had to overrule Rockefeller agent Henry
Kissinger in giving this order!

   Using the navigational coordinates I revealed in my August
tape, the United States Navy was able to remove all the Soviet
missiles in our territorial waters during the latter part of
August.  On September 1, 1976, with the threat presumed to be
over, General Brown wrote me a letter, which was widely
publicized, seemingly dismissing my charges, but actually opening
the door for communication between us.

   On September 7 I had information about a new round of missiles
that were being planted by the Soviets.  I wrote General Brown to
request a meeting, and on September 16, 1976, I met with him at
the Pentagon in his office for well over an hour.  During that
meeting I gave him the navigational coordinates for 48 new Soviet
missiles threatening the United States and Canada from locations
in our territorial waters--and again he ordered prompt action by
the United States Navy to start removing them.  But as I warned
last month, the Soviet Union is not giving up; and on top of
that, General Brown confronts terrible opposition WITHIN the
federal government!  So I asked you to express your support for
General Brown to strengthen his hand for our country's benefit.

   Now you can begin to see why.  On October 17, 1976, selected
excerpts from an interview with General Brown were leaked to the
press a week prior to publication.  These comments, taken out of
context, made it appear that General Brown was disparaging
certain of our allies; and instantly General Brown was at the
center of a storm of controversy.  General Brown is being
criticized now for remarks in a six-month-old interview which was
rejected for publication then, yet has magically surfaced now! 
Certain individuals have arranged for the story to be made public
at this time as an indirect means of attack that obscures the
facts.  The real reason for efforts to get rid of him is his
dedication to our country's defense.

   What is happening now to General Brown is standard practice in
Washington today.  The idea is to get something on someone,
anything, that can be made to look bad by the media, and put it
in his dossier for future use.  Thus a dark cloud is always handy
later on in case it is needed to blackmail, or destroy, or
intimidate someone.

   In General Brown's case, he was set up with this particular
cloud by none other than his boss, Secretary of Defense Donald
Rumsfeld, who was the CIA contact man in the White House and is
still a CIA operative now.

   Last spring a political writer and cartoonist drew a cartoon
of Rumsfeld, and Rumsfeld called him to ask if he could have the
original.  The political writer agreed, and it was also agreed
between them that Rumsfeld would get Brown to give the political
writer an interview.  The interview was not used at that time,
six months ago.  Even when General Brown was questioned
intensively by the Senate two months later when his confirmation
for a second two-year term as Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of
Staff was being decided upon, the interview still did not emerge. 
But now, after helping prevent thermonuclear war for over two
months, by doing his duty Brown is in hot water.

   The Rockefeller Brothers are making a desperate effort to put
things right back on track with the Soviet Union, and they have
decided that Brown must go as part of the price of reinstating
so-called detente.  The controversy now surrounding Brown is
intended to build up until he resigns, is dismissed, or loses his
influence and credibility.  This is totally unrelated to the
election, contrary to appearances.

   In this situation, it is more important than ever that you
show your support for General Brown.  His enemies are trying to
bring him down by means of a battle he must fight with both hands
tied behind his back.  If he were to publicly reveal one word
about the Soviet missile crisis and his role in combatting it--in
other words, the real reasons for his present troubles--General
Brown could be instantly dismissed, court-martialed, and
imprisoned!  And speaking out, he would be rewarded with personal
disaster; and the major media, under the thumb of the gang of the
Four Brothers, would then pull out all the stops in a campaign to
discredit whatever he said so that no one would believe it.  By
the same token, if Senate Bill No. 1 promoted by Attorney General
Levi had passed earlier this year, I, too, could be imprisoned
for telling you the truth about the Soviet missiles aimed at you
because, my friends, this information is classified "Top Secret",
not because the Government wants to keep anything from the
Soviets, they know all about their own offensive weapons planted
in our waters--it is YOU that the Government wants to keep in the
dark for their own protection, not yours!

   Even if you have already written to General Brown to express
your support, I urge you to do so again by letter, telegram, or
Mailgram.  My good friend Mr. Edward Durell, an industrialist who
lives in Berryville, Virginia, is urging his associates to write
their Congressmen showing their support for General Brown, and to
send a copy of each letter to:

  General George S. Brown
  Chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff
  Grant Avenue, Fort Myer
  Arlington, Virginia  22211.

I think this is an excellent suggestion, and I urge you to do the
same.  You may want to write to both of your Senators too, and
send copies to General Brown as well.  Just address your letter
to:

  Congressman (or Senator) so-and-so
  House (or Senate) Office Building
  Washington, D.C.  ...  The zip is:
    20515 for the House Office Bldg.
    20510 for the Senate Office Bldg.

   The controversy over General Brown, my friends, is only the
most visible part of a terrible reversal in our country's
fortunes that has occurred this month.  The turning point came on
October 1, 1976, a "RED Friday" for the United States of America. 
That was the day that President Gerald Ford caved in to pressure
from the Rockefeller-Soviet-Kissinger team.

   Two closely related events took place on October 1, 1976:

One was the appearance in the Washington Post of a story by
Woodward and Bernstein, no less, that the Watergate Special
Prosecutor's investigation of President Ford was (quote)
"serious."  The story, complete with big headlines, shook the
Stock Market where rumors circulated that Ford was about to step
down.  But, most importantly, Ford himself was given a clear
signal that swift political destruction awaited him if he did not
play ball with the Rockefellers.  Originally, Nelson Rockefeller
had arranged for the Watergate-related investigation of Ford as a
means of forcing Ford from office and in putting himself in
position as "Acting President" under the 25th Amendment to the
Constitution; but due to the Soviet Missile Crisis, that scenario
has been scrapped because the Watergate Prosecutor's
investigation was used instead to apply pressure for a different
purpose.

   That different purpose had to do with the second major event
that took place on Red Friday, October 1--the visit to the White
House by Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko!  It was reported
that Gromyko's reception at the White House was the coolest it
had ever been since Ford became President--and no wonder.  When
Gromyko told reporters afterward that he and Ford, quote: "spoke
of the most cardinal issues" he was deadly serious.  He was
referring not to SALT talks or the Middle East but to the threat
of war between the Soviet Union and the United States.

   When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 16 last month on
September 25, the second round of Soviet underwater missiles,
whose locations I had given to General Brown during our meeting
on September 16, had practically all been removed by our Navy. 
But the Soviets were already beginning to plant a third round of
these missiles, using the missile-laying mini-subs I described
last month, which are specially designed to elude detection by
our coastal sonar defenses.

   As of September 25, one of these Soviet mini-subs was resting
on the bottom of Chesapeake Bay near Norfolk, Virginia.  A mishap
had killed the crew, so the mini-sub was resting there like a
giant nuclear mine in American waters waiting for the Navy to
recover it.  Meanwhile over 142 Soviet submarines were deployed
in attack positions along the East, West, and Gulf coasts of the
United States.  During those last few days of September there
were growing indications that the Soviet missile crisis might
actually break out into the open for all to see, just as it must
do if the Soviet plans for nuclear attack world-wide are to be
stopped.

   For example, a speech which I mentioned last month delivered
on September 24 by Navy Secretary William Middendorf used the
word "emergency" three times to describe our present naval
plight, and concluded his speech in the words, and I quote:

  "Our concern today is the future.  The ominous words of Admiral
Gorshkov and the cold steel of his ships tell us that we are in
an emergency situation right now.  Something must be done.  The
threat is real, and the choice is ours.  We must make the right
decisions now while we have these few precious moments of freedom
left, or be willing to suffer the consequences."

   Then on September 27, 1976, the Norfolk, Virginia Ledger-Star
newspaper published an article by reporters Garland Bradshaw and
Jack Kestner who had flown to Washington on September 23 to
interview me about my charges of Soviet underwater missiles.  The
article did exactly what honest journalism is supposed to do.  It
exposed the readers of the Ledger-Star to the fact that I have
charged the Soviet Union with planting offensive nuclear weapons
in our territorial waters, and did so in a fair, objective way. 
They did not try to convince their readers either to believe or
disbelieve my charges, but included background information on
both sides as available from their own sources.  The important
thing is that the Ledger-Star reported fairly about my charges to
a readership that can be considered an expert audience about such
things, since the Norfolk area is the biggest naval concentration
in the United States.

   Yes, things were beginning to break into the open--but then
came Red Friday October 1.  President Ford and White House aide
William Hyland met with Gromyko, Henry Kissinger, and Kissinger's
State Department Counselor, Helmut Sonnenfeldt.  Gromyko demanded
that the Soviet Union be permitted to sneak into Chesapeake Bay
to recover their dead missile-laying mini-sub near Norfolk.  In
return for that, Gromyko said the Soviet submarines deployed at
battle stations along our coasts would disperse.  Kissinger and
Sonnenfeldt counseled Ford to agree to this offer by Gromyko as a
reasonable and sound compromise.  As always, Ford was confronted
with the standard Kissinger option: "Do you want peace?  Or war?" 
And on top of that, Ford knew that the Watergate-related
political time bomb was all set to go off if he resisted, and so
he caved in and agreed.  Blackmail and threats won the day for
the Soviet Union!

   The same day, Henry Kissinger pressed his advantage and also
induced Ford to issue a secret Presidential Order to the Military
from that day onward to flatly deny all my charges when asked
about them.  In other words, they are now under presidential
orders to lie in order to keep the truth about the Soviet
missiles from the public.  This blackout on the Soviet missile
story is not for the purpose of avoiding a confrontation with the
Soviets, because that has already occurred; and it is not for the
purpose of buying time while we get into a better military
posture.  Since Red Friday, October 1, the third round of Soviet
missiles, which have been newly planted around our country, are
still there!  The blackout, my friends, is only to keep YOU in
the dark.

   This situation here stands out even more boldly when compared
with the behavior of some of our allies who are now alerted to
Soviet plans.  Ironically October 1, 1976, the day President Ford
caved in to the Soviet Union, was the same day that the Irish
Navy successfully concluded a naval confrontation with the
Soviets on the high seas.  A huge Soviet fishing trawler, so
called, was caught operating illegally inside the Irish 12-mile
limit near Cork Harbor the previous day, and the Irish fishery
protection vessel, L. E. Grenay, went after the trawler to make
an arrest.  The trawler fled into international waters, but the
Irish vessel gave chase, brought the trawler to a halt by firing
warning shots across her bow, and sent a boarding party aboard. 
The Soviet Captain was totally uncooperative, but the Irish sent
reinforcements, and ultimately had more than 50 men aboard the
Soviet ship.  The Soviet trawler entered Cork Harbor under arrest
with the Irish boarding party still aboard and accompanied by two
Irish naval vessels.  It was correctly reported by the Cork
Examiner newspaper for Friday October 1, 1976, that, quote:

  "The confrontation was regarded as the biggest and potentially
most dangerous that the naval service has faced in its history of
fishery protection."

   The Irish were prepared to apply whatever force proved to be
necessary to arrest the intruding Soviet ship.  And why?  Because
Cork Harbor itself is one of the locations from which a Soviet
underwater nuclear weapon was removed by the Royal Navy in
August, using information in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15.  The
Irish now know quite simply that no intruding Soviet ship is to
be trusted.

   But here in the United States the Soviet Navy was allowed to
intrude into our waters Monday night, October 4, under the RED
FRIDAY AGREEMENT reached between Ford and Gromyko in the White
House.  At approximately 10:00 PM local time the Soviets
retrieved the dead mini-sub from its position on the bottom of
Chesapeake Bay outside Norfolk, operating under cover of
darkness.  The missile-laying mini-sub left the Norfolk area that
night in Soviet hands--and with it went what may have been our
only chance to learn the details of the technology of the
mini-subs and their sonar-defeating system so that we could begin
defending ourselves against them.  At the same time we lost a
golden opportunity to galvanize the whole world into standing
with us against an all-out common foe, the Soviet Union, by
announcing the capture of the mini-sub, displaying it on
television, and revealing what the Soviets had been doing with
these subs.

   If our country were run today by civilians of integrity,
honor, and courage who were trying to serve the people of the
United States of America instead of trying to merge our lives
with that of the Soviet Union, such a thing could have been done. 
Swift action could have been taken to do this after I first
notified the Pentagon of the presence of the mini-sub near
Norfolk on Monday, September 20; but NO, that's not the way it
works today.  All opportunities for the United States to act
sensibly for the good of its people must be suppressed,
sabotaged, thrown away.  Only in this way can we be ground down
to such a low level of life that the goal of the White House
Merge Directive can finally be achieved.  That Directive, in
existence for decades, is to the effect that our lives are to be
so altered that they can be comfortably merged with life in the
Soviet Union.

   By the following day, the Soviet submarines at battle stations
along our shores had dispersed, as agreed; but within a few more
days they were back again--and they are there now.  They are not
at this time deployed in the precise patterns that they were in a
month ago, which indicated readiness for an immediate attack, but
they are present in international waters just off our shores in
great numbers.  As of October 11, 1976, 164 Soviet submarines
were on station in the waters near Canada and the United States,
including Hawaii; and the situation has not changed significantly
since then.

   Since Red Friday, October 1, I have been cut off from contact
with General Brown, and none of the Soviet underwater missiles in
Canadian and American waters have been removed since that day. 
As of now, 50 Soviet nuclear missiles and bombs are planted in
American territorial waters plus the three (3) missiles in the
Gulf of Panama whose coordinates I gave last month.  ln addition,
seven (7) missiles are now planted in Canadian waters, whose
coordinates I have already given to Canadian Intelligence.

   My friends, there will be no effort by the United States Navy
to remove the nuclear missiles in our waters unless it is forced
by a new surge of public awareness and demand for action, because
Nelson Rockefeller's wife arrived in Moscow and on October 12
delivered a personal letter from Nelson Rockefeller to the
Kremlin.  In this hand-delivered letter Nelson Rockefeller made
the following pledges to the Kremlin on behalf of the "Gang of
Four", quote:

  "There will be no further harassment of your submarines, nor
will your underwater missiles and bombs be taken up.  The credit
squeeze by banking circles will be lifted.  You will not be
required to sell gold.  We will send gold for products delivered.
American know-how, grains, and food stuffs will continue to be
provided.  You must reinstate the 'NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE' agreement."

   The coordinates of all the Soviet weapons now in American
territorial waters have been transmitted to a number of reliable
men in the United States Intelligence Community, except for the
newest missile, which was planted three days ago in Delaware Bay
at:
   39 39' 35"  North   75 32' 20"  West.

Action will therefore be possible if the Military can once again
be free to do its job.

   At least Great Britain, which had 29 new Soviet nuclear
weapons in her waters as of October 11, 1976, is taking action
once again to get rid of them.  By October 22, four days ago, the
Royal Navy had removed all but 10 of them, and is still fast at
work.  As for Latin America, all the missiles I revealed last
month are still there with two exceptions--British Honduras and
Guatemala were targeted by one missile each, but these have now
been removed.

   Our controlled major media tell us nothing at all about the
Soviet missile threat that is ready to engulf us in thermonuclear
war, but instead divert our attention to the case of the Navy
F-14 fighter that plunged off a carrier deck into the North Sea
six weeks ago on September 14, 1976.  Great attention is being
given to the F-14, and we are being fed all sorts of lies that
the Soviet MiG-25 Foxbat flown to Japan by a defecting pilot is
hopelessly inferior to the F-14.  But the Soviet Navy hasn't even
bothered to try to retrieve the plane.  They already know all
about the F-14, and it doesn't worry them.

   As for the Phoenix Missile which separated from the F-14 when
it hit the water, the Soviets know where it is too, but have not
yet picked it up.  The Phoenix Missile is resting on an
underwater plateau far to the south-southeast of the point where
the F-14 was found.  The coordinates of the Phoenix Missile are:
   61 - 26 - 6 North, 1 - 23 - 16 West.

   And so, my friends, the great war game continues.  Our Armed
Services are allowed to participate in NATO and other training
exercises, but are forbidden by Rockefeller hired hands from
doing anything about the real life-and-death threat now lurking
within our own territorial waters.  We are being made sitting
ducks for attack; and, in fact, we have already been attacked by
the Soviet Navy because on October 3, two days after Red Friday,
the Soviet submarines along our East, West, and Gulf coast
performed an experiment in radioactive chemical warfare with all
of us as the guinea pigs.

Topic #2--On October 5, 1976, just as the so-called "SWINE FLU"
inoculation program was getting under way, news reports suddenly
told us that we were experiencing fallout from an alleged Chinese
atmospheric nuclear blast on September 26.  Oddly enough, the
initial reports about this came from the East Coast, especially
Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Connecticut; but certain
areas of the Pacific Northwest were soon mentioned as being
affected too.  We were told that radioactive iodine-131 was
showing up in milk at various locations; but we were also
assured, as we invariably are whenever any radioactive hazard
appears, that there was really no danger.

   In the days that followed we continued to hear about the
supposed Chinese fallout, but other things probably seemed even
more worrisome.  For example, elderly people began dying of heart
attacks shortly after taking swine flu shots, causing widespread
alarm at first.  But the Government quickly assured us that their
deaths didn't really matter at all, that they would have died
anyway; and the swine flu inoculation program went right back
into high gear.

   And then there were the strange outbreaks of an unknown
"mystery illness" at electronics plants in western Pennsylvania,
Ohio, and Oregon.  The employees, most of them women, experienced
headaches, nausea, stomach pains, difficulty in breathing, a
feeling of being intoxicated in some cases, and even fainting
spells.  This time the swine flu vaccine could not be the culprit
because the victims had not received it.  Instead, some were
worried that the swine flu itself had struck.  Others remembered,
with a shiver, the equally mysterious "Legionnaires Disease" that
had sickened nearly 200 people in Philadelphia and killed more
than two dozen of them two months earlier.

   My friends, there is actually no mystery at all behind these
developments and more like them that you can expect to see.  All
of these cases I have mentioned are man-made and deliberate, but
those who are responsible for them are neither telling you about
them nor leaving clues that will be found in normal medical
investigations of these episodes.  We in the United States are
now under attack in a campaign of experimental testing of
chemical warfare weapons so that they can be employed later on
with precision and devastating effect against us in full scale
war--that is, if we let it happen.

   For years all the major countries of the world have been in a
continuing race against time to discover ever more sophisticated
forms of bacterial and chemical weapons, some of them amounting
to doomsday weapons capable of destroying all life on this
planet.  Only mad men would even consider using such weapons, but
only mad men deliberately cause wars for their own greedy
purposes, too--and war is very near at hand right now.

   A few years ago a nerve gas called sarin was perfected in a
facility in Colorado.  A tiny amount escaped, and two shepherds
and their 7000 sheep were killed.  In response to the public
outcry that resulted, a statement was issued that the Chemical
Warfare Service had destroyed the sarin gas and was no longer
doing such research--but that was a lie.  Experimentation still
continues today on all kinds of such poisons, and at a furious
pace.

   As of right now, many hideous lethal ailments can be inflicted
on whole populations as operational weapons.  These include black
plague, smallpox, meningitis, dysentery, gangrene, yellow fever,
tetanus, botulism, typhus, hepatitis, Bang's disease, and Q
fever.  Thirty grams of Q fever is sufficient to infect over
150-million people, and it is considered especially convenient
since any individuals who are to be saved in such an attack can
first be immunized against it!  Such selective immunization could
easily be done, for example, under the cover of a mass
inoculation program like the swine flu program.

   Q fever, though, is mild by comparison to a nuclear gas called
AP-7 which is being manufactured in Uruguay and Argentina by
American and European subsidiaries of Rockefeller-controlled
conglomerate corporations.  Two thimblefuls properly distributed
could kill 180-million people; and one pound, all life on the
face of the earth.  Unless and until these hideous weapons are
unleashed on the earth, they remain in a condition in which they
can be destroyed and neutralized; and it is essential that they
be destroyed instead of just being handed around from one agency
to another, as Senator Frank Church permitted last year in his
shellfish toxin shell game.  But other types of chemical and
biological weapons are also of great interest to weapons
researchers which can be used in more selective ways or to
produce lower-order effects than the poisons I have just
described.

   The Soviet KGB, which works hand in hand with the
Rockefeller-controlled CIA, now has access to whole families of
such chemical weapons which can be adjusted in exact dosage and
formula to produce a variety of effects on victims.  These were
and are intended for use as part of the program to eliminate
effective opposition by the people of the United States to the
planned Rockefeller dictatorship here in America and our
conversion into the most valuable of all slave nations for the
Soviet Union.

   Before these new weapons can be used with confidence though,
they must be tested, and that testing is going on now.  As a
cover for the periodic episodes of strange illnesses that will
occur here and there around the United States while this testing
is going on, the trumped-up swine flu threat was developed.

   On March 24, 1976, President Ford announced his proposal for
the unprecedented nation-wide inoculation program supposedly to
fend off the strange swine flu virus.  To this very day not a
single case of swine flu has been confirmed anywhere in the
United States since President Ford's announcement.

   Last February in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9 I revealed that
the Government had panicked because of my disclosure that the
Fort Knox Bullion Depository contained leaking canisters of
deadly plutonium superpoison, and in January 1976 dumped part of
the poison into underground streams beneath Fort Knox.  Later
when the swine flu charade was announced, I was able to tell you
of the Government's plan to use this device to cover up the real
cause when and if the poison from Fort Knox began surfacing at
various points in the southeastern United States and causing
sickness and death.  But it wasn't until July of this year 1976
that I received information about the rest of the swine flu
story, and at that time the far more imminent threat of the
Soviet missile crisis involving a Soviet double-cross of the four
Rockefeller Brothers had to take precedence.

   The reason that the Government concluded last January 1976
that they could get away with dumping the plutonium poison from
Fort Knox into underground streams, which would surely carry the
poison elsewhere, was that the swine flu campaign had already
been planned for another purpose.  That purpose was to serve as a
cover to explain the effects that would be caused when chemical
warfare experimentation began, as planned, in July 1976 in our
country.  So when I revealed the presence of the leaking
plutonium superpoison in the Central Core Vault of the Fort Knox
Bullion Depository, they concluded that they could just dump some
of it underground and cover up that, too, with the swine flu
swindle.

   In late July 1976 the joint KGB-CIA chemical warfare
experimentation program began in Philadelphia at the American
Legion Convention.  A convenient test group was assembled, and it
was exploited.  Data was desired for the effects of a formulation
of the new family of poisons on older men in particular, and the
American Legion Convention was chosen as the perfect target. 
Aerosol spray cans containing poisoned room freshener were used
to selectively saturate the atmosphere of the Legionnaires. 
Afterwards the special spray cans were taken from the hotel,
leaving the city by airplane from a small airport on the
northwest side of Philadelphia.  Two of the active ingredients in
the poison that produced the Legionnaires Disease were plutonium
and zirconium.

   The next experiment occurred late in August 1976 about a month
after the Legionnaire episode, and had quite a different purpose;
and so a different poison formula was used.  Plutonium was again
an ingredient, as it is in the entire line of chemical warfare
agents now being tested; but this time the formula was designed
for very rapid effect with the victims receiving a massive dose. 
On a day late in August two Air Force C-141 Starlifter transport
aircraft that were preparing to leave McGuire Air Force Base in
New Jersey on flights over the Atlantic were sabotaged by the
placement in their cockpits of concealed canisters of poison gas,
rigged so that the gas would be released in flights without being
detected.  The two planes left McGuire at nearly the same time,
and crashed within hours of one another when approaching separate
destinations in Greenland and England.  The very next day, with
the wreckage of the aircraft hardly cooled, a Pentagon spokesman
said, quote:

  "Sabotage does not appear to be a factor.  It's not even being
considered as a factor."

Officials also said there was no apparent connection between the
crashes.  Apparently leaving the same Air Base at practically the
same time and then crashing almost simultaneously without warning
is not supposed to suggest the possibility of anything but
coincidence.  No doubt it is also coincidence that McGuire Air
Force Base, the origin of these two strange fatal flights, is
right next door to Fort Dix where the whole swine flu cover-up
scare originated!

   The successful experimental sabotage of the two C-141s
provided valuable data to the Soviets, since it gave them some
measure of the operational reliability of the formula used for
that purpose.  Now, when they are ready to wage war, they have
another weapon tested and proven--the placement of canisters of
poison gas in the cockpits of numerous Allied aircraft to make a
shambles of our air power just when we need it most.

   Next came the mystery disease in the electronics factories. 
This time more data on women was wanted, especially since the
Legionnaires Disease did not kill many women.  The ideal target
would be some assembly plants containing a high proportion of
female employees.  To avoid too strong a public uproar, sublethal
doses were used; but again a key active ingredient was plutonium,
and many of the classic symptoms of radiation sickness were
produced.

   Finally in early October, this month, the first chemical
warfare experiment was performed against the entire population of
the United States.  On October 3, while the huge fleet of Soviet
submarines I told you about last month were still deployed at
precise intervals very close to our shores, the submarines
released a very fine dispersion of plutonium into the atmosphere
along the Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf coasts of the United
States.  Unlike normal fallout produced by nuclear weapons, the
invisible clouds of plutonium from the Soviet submarines were
released at relatively low altitudes.  The theory was that the
plutonium clouds released in this way would diffuse inward over
land from all of our shorelines and ultimately settle mainly on
North America with very little of it reaching high enough
altitudes to be swept around the globe to the Soviet Union.  But,
my friends, this time they miscalculated and the nation-wide
plutonium cloud experiment backfired.

   Here is what happened: The early progress of the plutonium
cloud was just as planned.  The invisible clouds of plutonium
diffused inward onto the East Coast and onto the Gulf Coast, and
along the West Coast moved inland much more rapidly due to the
assistance of prevailing westerly winds.  By October 5 the
expanding plutonium cloud had penetrated a hundred miles or so
inland from the East and Gulf coasts and as far as the Rockies,
where it entered from the Pacific Northwest.  That was the day
that the cover story about Chinese nuclear fallout suddenly
appeared, pinpointing areas along the East coast and Pacific
Northwest as being most heavily affected so far.  Thus in case
the Soviet plutonium cloud turned out to have unexpectedly strong
effects, Red China had already been identified as the scapegoat. 
Over the next two days, the plutonium cloud gradually grew
together over the midwestern United States, forming finally a
continuous blanket over practically all of our land area.  At the
same time, the plutonium cloud had also been expanding outward as
well as inward from our coastlines, and by October 8 large areas
of Canada and Mexico were also affected.  Prevailing winds were
also tending to move the expanding plutonium cloud eastward out
over the Atlantic; and at this point things began departing from
Soviet calculations.

   In recent days there has been an extremely unusual shift in
the position of the high altitude jet stream to a position much
further south than normal.  The jet stream has a lot to do with
our weather; and in the case of the Soviet experimental plutonium
cloud, it did enough by causing the plutonium cloud released by
the Soviet subs to drift away from the United States sooner than
expected and to settle all over the Soviet Union
itself--definitely not according to plan.  As of now, it has
largely dissipated and does not continue to be a threat.  The
main problem that is left is that practically everyone in the
United States plus much of Mexico, Canada, the British Isles, and
Europe have suffered some exposure to this plutonium, though
fortunately it was at a relatively low experimental level this
time.

   The best protective measure against radioactivity is, of
course, to avoid it; and that is exactly what Nelson Rockefeller
did, forewarned about the plutonium cloud to be released by the
Soviet subs.  When the plutonium drifted inward from our shores,
Nelson and Happy Rockefeller just happened to be elsewhere, in
London.  After all, Nelson wants to stay as healthy as possible
so that he can relish his planned elevation to the position he
has craved for decades--President of the United States and of the
World.

                  THE PHANTOM ELECTION OF 1976

Topic #3--Nelson Rockefeller keeps saying, "I'm relaxed.  I
haven't got a worry", and seems from the generous media coverage
he is now receiving to be almost a wistful, nostalgic figure
fading from the public scene before our own eyes.  Meanwhile, he
is made to appear a refreshing point of interest against the
background of a presidential campaign that has turned off
millions of voters.  But what is not being reported in the
national press is the strenuous campaign Nelson Rockefeller is
carrying on right now all over the country, currying the favor of
members of Congress.  What is actually going on now is that
Nelson Rockefeller is down to his ninth and final scenario to
become President.  Barring some unforeseen development, he is now
counting on his final backup plan to make him Chief Executive of
the United States.  All of his previous scenarios have been
disrupted, one after another, and this is his last hurrah; and
yet when he says "I'm relaxed", he means it because this time he
is confident that he has it "in the bag."

   The Rockefeller-controlled major media have from the start
turned the presidential election 1976 into a media event,
disfranchising the American electorate in the process.  Now the
media are making both Carter and Ford look unappetizing to vast
numbers of voters, trying to insure both a low turn-out and a
very close election.  In addition, the Rockefellers have a
spoiler in the race, Eugene McCarthy, for the young voters. 
Everything possible is being done to make sure that the outcome
of the election on November 2 is very close and that no one gets
a mandate.  The plan is to create doubt as to the outcome,
possibly even triggering demands for recounts.  This situation
will be used to focus public attention on the electoral college.

   As you know, when you vote on Election Day you don't vote
directly for a presidential candidate but for his elector; but
unknown to the American people, certain key electors have already
been reached by Rockefeller agents.  On December 13, 1976, the
electors will do their voting.  The results will then be sent for
safekeeping to the president of the Senate, who just happens to
be Nelson Rockefeller, and they will remain in his possession for
over three weeks until January 6, 1977.  On that day, acting in
his official capacity, Rockefeller will open the envelopes
containing the votes of the electors, and the votes will be
tallied; and if all goes according to Nelson Rockefeller's plan,
he will announce that no candidate has received the required 270
electoral votes and therefore that no one has been elected. 
Therefore, under the Constitution, Congress will then be required
to select a President and Vice-President from among the leading
candidates in the election.  But things not being normal,
Congress may not be able within the short space of two weeks to
choose either a President or a Vice-President, so that as of
noon, January 20, 1977, the United States of America will no
longer have either a President or a Vice-President.

   This plan, my friends, is the real reason why the usual
elaborate preparation of inaugural facilities is not taking place
this year.  Instead, we are told folding chairs will be
used--folding chairs for a folding election.

   Nelson Rockefeller spent over 25-million dollars to get
himself confirmed almost two years ago as Vice-President, so he
still has a residue of good will in Congress.  In addition, he is
quietly courting Congressmen all over the country because he
plans to be the likely choice of Congress to become Acting
President with an open-ended term that carries no specific time
limit.  This will be according to Section 3 of the 20th Amendment
of the United States Constitution.  Once in that position, Nelson
Rockefeller will begin consolidating his power with all possible
speed.  His goal: The declaration of a "National Emergency"
invoking Executive Order 11921 signed very quietly by President
Ford on June 11, 1976.

   As I have explained in earlier tapes, our freedoms under the
Constitution will be suspended if this Executive Order is used,
and Nelson Rockefeller may well be on his way to making his
dictatorship permanent.  But should any candidate win by a
landslide on Election Day, Rockefeller's plan will be rendered
unworkable.

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source

DR. PETER DAVID BETER – AUDIO LETTERS SERIE #16

Audio letter No. 16

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1981 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, DC  20006)

   Hello my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is September 25,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 16.

   Last month I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 much earlier
than normal, on August 2, because of its extreme urgency.  In
that tape I revealed the locations of multiple warhead missiles
and hydrogen bombs which had been planted by the Soviet Union in
the coastal waters of 25 countries around the world--especially
the United States, Canada, the British Isles, and Western Europe. 
We were on the threshold of a world-wide Pearl Harbor-type
surprise nuclear attack, and yet no one in the federal government
had taken any official action whatsoever to respond to my
warnings about this terrible war threat.  It was obvious that
nothing would be done in time unless public opinion forced it to
be done, and so I appealed to YOU.

   I told you the truth about our desperate situation, and I
asked you to bring about the rescue of our beloved country by
applying the kind of pressure on the Government that only
aroused, informed citizens can bring to bear.  Your overwhelming
response was a major shock to the United States Government; and
as a direct result of your efforts, action has been and is being
taken.  Thanks to you, the missiles and bombs in American waters
which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 have been removed
by the United States Navy.  Likewise, those around the British
Isles and a number of other locations world-wide have also been
removed; but the grim fact is, my friends, that we are still in
very grave danger because the Soviet Union is not giving up. 
That means you and I must not give up either.

   The Soviet Navy is now struggling and maneuvering around the
clock trying to re-establish a commanding, strategic position for
attack, because an imminent nuclear attack on our country is
still planned by the Soviets.  If this attack is to be prevented,
two things must be done:

First, they must be prevented from achieving the decisive edge in
battlefield position which they are now trying very hard to
accomplish at sea by means of submarines; and

Second, the fact that the Soviet Union is preparing to plunge the
world into thermonuclear war must be completely exposed, not only
here in America but world-wide.  As I pointed out last month, in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15, the audacious world-wide naval
surprise attack which is almost ready to be triggered makes the
Soviet Union the all-out enemy of every other nation on earth. 
Once this becomes known, Russia's military posture will be very
awkward indeed.

   In order to bring you up to date on the events of recent
weeks, my three topics today are:

Topic #1--THE AUGUST MISSILE CRISIS OF 1976

Topic #2--THE UNITED STATES INTELLIGENCE GAP AND A NEW ROUND OF
SOVIET UNDERWATER MISSILES

Topic #3--THE UNDECLARED SUBMARINE WAR NOW UNDERWAY

Topic #1--An increasing number of public figures in our country
know about the Soviet underwater missiles ringing our country,
but so far only one has come close to warning you about it.

   At the Republican National Convention on August 19, 1976,
Ronald Reagan was invited to the speakers platform to say a few
words following the nomination acceptance speech by President
Ford.  After some opening words of a personal nature and brief
comments about the Party Platform he had helped to forge, he
turned to what was really on his mind.  He began, and I quote:

  "If I could just take a moment, I had an assignment the other
day.  Someone asked me to write a letter for a time capsule that
is going to be opened in Los Angeles a hundred years from now on
our Tricentennial.  It sounded like an easy assignment.  They
suggested I write something about the problems and issues of the
day, and I set out to do so riding down the coast in an
automobile looking at the blue Pacific on one side and the
mountains on the other; and I couldn't help but wonder if it was
going to be as beautiful a hundred years from now as it was on
that summer day."

With a few words about various challenges we face, he then
continued, quote:

  "We live in a world in which the great powers have poised and
aimed at each other horrible missiles of destruction--nuclear
weapons that can in a matter of minutes arrive in each other's
country and destroy virtually the civilized world we live in. 
And suddenly it dawned on me: Those who would read this letter a
hundred years from now will know whether those missiles were
fired.  They will know whether we met our challenge.  Whether
they have the freedom that we have known up to now will depend
upon what we do here.  Will they look back with appreciation and
say, 'Thank God for those people in 1976 who headed off that loss
of freedom, who kept us, now a hundred years later, free; who
kept our world from nuclear destruction'?  And if we failed, they
probably won't get to read the letter at all because it spoke of
individual freedom, and they won't be allowed to talk of that or
read of it.  This is our challenge."

   It is no coincidence that nuclear missiles came to Ronald
Reagan's mind as he looked at the waters off the California
coast.  We had been in telephone contact with one another since
August 11, and he knew all about the Soviet underwater missiles
when he said those words of warning I just quoted.  But most of
his audience never realized what he was driving at, thanks to the
total absence of any other clues about the Soviet threat from the
Government or the major media.  So the fate of our beloved
nation, and therefore of the whole world, rested during the month
of August 1976 in the hands of those who heard my charges and
acted on them.

   Here is what happened: During August the United States
Government came under steadily mounting pressure from people like
yourself all over the world who sent copies of my tapes, relayed
my charges, and demanded action.  The first sign that this was
beginning to take effect came on August 14, 1976.  On that date I
learned that a secret code name had been assigned to the Soviet
Underwater Missile program.  However, action to remove the
missiles still had not been approved, and was not going to be
approved unless such action was forced by public opinion. 
Meanwhile the first concrete action in the August Missile Crisis
of 1976 was taken--not by the United States, but by Canada.

   On August 17, 1976 the Canadian Navy had found the Crescent
Beach missile near Vancouver, B.C., but lacked the capability to
retrieve it.  Prime Minister Trudeau, receiving no cooperation
from the United States Government at that time, called Soviet
Charge d' Affaires Nikolai Makarov in Ottawa and demanded that
the Soviet Union itself come and remove the missile.  And remove
it they did.  On August 25 the Vancouver area was visited by
three Soviet ships--two destroyers, the Sposobny and the Gnevny;
and a tanker called the Ilim.  Rear Admiral Vladimir Varganov
arrived aboard one of the ships, using this 'good will' visit as
a cover.  By the following afternoon, Canadian divers confirmed
that the missile was gone.

   Meanwhile Great Britain had also begun taking serious action
in order to rid herself of the 12 underwater missiles and bombs
ringing the British Isles.  On August 18, 1976, Prime Minister
Callaghan called a special Cabinet meeting at 11:00 A.M. London
time.  Present were the First Lord of the Admiralty, the First
Sea Lord of the Admiralty, and several Fleet Commanders.  The
purpose of the meeting was to listen to my monthly AUDIO LETTERS
Nos. 14 and 15 which had gone to England by diplomatic pouch. 
They already knew that my information was accurate because of the
Soviet missile discovered the previous day in the waters near
Vancouver, so the Royal Navy wasted no time in taking action.  By
August 27, 1976, all but one of the missiles had been removed;
and that one, too, was retrieved shortly thereafter.

  By late August the United States was at last taking action too,
prodded into it by still-building public pressure.  For once
President Gerald Ford acted on his own, over-ruled Rockefeller
agent Henry Kissinger and gave the go-ahead for the Soviet bombs
and missiles surrounding the United States to be removed.

   Having been unleashed at last, the United States Navy worked
fast, acting on the information in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
15.  By the evening of August 26, 1976, seven of the Soviet
weapons in our waters--six missiles and one hydrogen bomb--had
been removed; and by August 31, 1976, the waters along the
American coastline had all been cleared.  At this point the
threat to the United States that I had spelled out last month had
been eliminated at last, using the very information I had made
public.  But the Government in general, and the Military in
particular, were still under heavy public pressure; and under the
assumption that the Soviet threat was now over and done with,
they chose a technique which has become standard practice in
Washington today.  It's called "plausible denial"--a particular
type of bureaucratic double talk.  The Joint Chiefs of Staff and
the United States Navy had just completed an operation to remove
the missiles around our country, a job potentially so hazardous
as to defy imagination.  In short, they had done their duty; and
the Navy especially deserves our thanks for accomplishing their
task without anyone being hurt.

   They should be acclaimed as heroes, and our whole nation
should be rallying behind them with justified pride.  But, my
friends, in the nightmare world of step-by-step surrender to the
Soviets called "Detente", it doesn't work that way.  Even our
Military leaders are so thoroughly hemmed in by the "One-World"
web that the only way that they can do their duty in the face of
such a Soviet threat is to hide the fact that they are doing it. 
And so, as soon as the missile removal operation had been
completed around our shores, "plausible denials" of my charges
began being issued by the United States Military.  This began on
August 31, 1976, when Vice Admiral B. R. Inman, Acting Director
of the Defense Intelligence Agency, answered an inquiry sent to
the Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld weeks before by Senator Harry
F. Byrd, Jr. of Virginia.  Admiral Inman's letter gives a number
of arguments as to why any prudent government, including the
U.S.S.R.,  would presumably refrain from planting such missiles
and bombs in our waters.  But the real crux of his plausible
denial letter is the following sentence, quote:

  "There is currently no evidence indicating the Soviets have
placed underwater nuclear devices, including missiles with
multiple warheads, within the territorial waters of the United
States."

Technically, Admiral Inman was telling the truth, because as of
August 31, 1976, when he wrote this letter, all of the
evidence--the missiles and bombs--had been removed from our
waters; but the impact of his letter, if read casually, would
seem to be that my charges never had been true!

   By the same token, General George S. Brown, Chairman of the
Joint Chiefs of Staff, wrote me the following day on September 1,
1976.  His letter has been photocopied and sent all over the
world by the Pentagon.  I will now read it in its entirety:

  "Dear Dr. Beter:

   Your recent tape report alleging that Soviet nuclear warheads
and hydrogen bombs have been planted in the coastal waters of the
United States has been brought to my attention.  I have
investigated these assertions and find not a shred of truth to
any of your statements in this regard.  Let me assure you of this
country's capability to detect any such aggressive actions by the
Soviet Union or any other world power.

   We stand ready to evaluate and comment in advance on any such
information you may acquire in the future which impinges upon the
vital issue of our national security.

                                            Sincerely,
                                            George S. Brown
                                            General, U.S.A.F."

The seeming impact of General Brown's letter, read casually, is
that my whole story about the missiles was a fake.  But the real
key, once again, is the word "find" (present tense). 
Furthermore, in the last sentence, General Brown actually
signaled me that the door would be open if I acquired more such
information; and by the time his letter reached me, I had more
such information because as I said before, the Soviet Union is
not giving up.

Topic #2--On the afternoon of September 7, 1976, I received
General Brown's letter of September 1, which I just read you. 
Ironically, I also learned on the same day, September 7, that
"round two" of the Soviet Underwater Missile Crisis was just
beginning.  Three underwater missiles were now threatening Los
Angeles, and San Diego was once again targeted by an underwater
missile close by.  Accordingly I answered General Brown's letter
as follows:

"Dear General Brown:

   Today I received your letter of September 1.  I fully
understand the position you are taking at this time; however
other governments have not taken your position.  They know the
truth, I know the truth, and so does President Ford; and the
truth is that during the month of August 1976 a surprise Soviet
nuclear attack of world-wide proportions has been partially
averted.

   Make no mistake, the huge build-up of Soviet nuclear missiles
on land and in the sea world-wide, continues to be a clear and
present signal for an imminent surprise attack of immense
proportions.  In 1962 we had a Soviet Missile Crisis in Cuba; in
1971 we had the Soviet Missile Crisis in Canadian and United
States territorial waters which was kept from the American
people; and now once again, in 1976, the world is experiencing
yet another Soviet missile crisis.  The world must know of the
courage of President Ford as Commander in Chief in moving aside
unbelievable obstacles in order to begin to meet the Soviet
challenge last month.

   In your letter you state that, quote:

  'We stand ready to evaluate and comment in advance on any such
information you may acquire in the future which impinges upon the
vital issue of our national security.'

   In view of this and the urgency of the situation, I
respectfully request to meet with you privately in your offices
within the next ten (10) days.  At that time I will present
evidence of the validity of all my charges, and under specific
conditions I will advise you of other strategic locations of
Soviet nuclear missiles planted in our coastal waters and
elsewhere of which you may not be aware and which constitute a
clear and present danger to our national security.

                                             Sincerely yours,
                                             Peter Beter"

   Shortly after my registered letter reached the Pentagon, Navy
Captain Sidney V. Wright, Jr. called on behalf of General Brown
to arrange a meeting with the General.  We agreed on meeting in
General Brown's offices at 3:00 P.M., Thursday September 16.  An
associate accompanied me to the meeting as a witness; and
promptly at 3:00 P.M. the meeting began with General Brown and
Captain Wright, who tape-recorded the meeting with my consent. 
In spite of the public posture which he has so far had to
maintain, General Brown told me that he had overruled his staff
in order to meet with me; and although he couched many of his
comments with considerable care, our discussion lasted for well
over an hour without interruptions, without telephone calls, and
without any cutoff because of time.

   I gave General Brown a special tape for his ears only,
revealing the locations of 48 new missiles threatening the United
States, and within two days the United States Navy was already at
work removing them.  In addition, General Brown made three
commitments to me, and I made one to him.

   To fulfill my own commitment, I sent the following registered
letter to him on September 17, 1976:

"Dear General Brown:

   Thank you for affording me the opportunity to meet with you in
your offices yesterday for over an hour.  During our conversation
I mentioned that the Soviet nuclear device which was removed from
Seal Harbor, Maine, had been taken to a location near Otis Air
Force Base on Cape Cod, Massachusetts, and that it was still
there as of the time of my meeting with you yesterday afternoon.
You requested that I provide you with details about its location.

   The facts are that the Seal Harbor nuclear device was in the
process of being retrieved by the United States Navy late
Saturday, 28 August 1976, and was on the beach at Seal Harbor
waiting transportation by the afternoon of 29 August.  That
evening it left Seal Harbor by truck, which took it to an airport
at Augusta, Maine.  On the afternoon of 30 August the nuclear
device was flown from Augusta, Maine, to Otis Air Force Base,
Cape Cod, where the airplane touched down at 17:13 EDT, 30 August
1976.  From Otis Air Force Base this nuclear device was
transported to a remote location on the west side of Buzzards
Bay.  For over two weeks the device stayed in that location,
which is between one and two miles east of the small town of
Marion, Massachusetts, on a small peninsula, the tip of which is
known as Butler's Point.  The coordinates are: 41 42' 0" North,
70 43' 30" West.

   The Seal Harbor weapon remained there until about 2200 EDT
last night, 16 September 1976; but then less than six (6) hours
after my meeting with you yesterday afternoon, it left this
location.  As of today, this weapon is in a new location about 24
miles west of New London, Connecticut, with the approximate
coordinates: 41 19' 0" North, 72 31' 0" West.

   If I had not known about this latest move, the result would
have been an echo of your letter to me of 1 September 1976, in
which you state that you, quote 'find' no evidence to support my
charges.  Your letter of 1 September 1976, of course, was written
43 days after I first made my charges and only hours after the
Soviet missiles had all been removed by the United States Navy.

                                             Sincerely,
                                             Peter Beter"

   My friends, General Brown is laboring under the handicap of an
Intelligence gap created by none other than Secretary of State
Henry Kissinger.  Allied Intelligence sources inform me that they
have become gun-shy in sharing some of the information they give
me with the official Intelligence community of the United States
because invariably Kissinger betrays it immediately into the
hands of the Soviet Union.  Large segments of the United States
Intelligence establishment are so independent that they do not
consider themselves accountable even to the President.  Instead
they work under the direction of Henry Kissinger, who owes his
power to the four Rockefeller Brothers and who also works in the
interest of the Soviet Union.

   Of course many of our Intelligence people are still patriotic
and loyal to our country and they are doing everything they
possibly can to protect our nation.  Through their efforts the
Joint Chiefs of Staff first learned about 90 days ago that
missiles and bombs had been planted in American waters by the
Soviet Union; but due to the Intelligence gap, they were unable
to obtain complete information about them.  Only when I publicly
revealed this information last month, did they obtain it; and
even then had I related to them privately instead of making it a
public issue, Kissinger would still have been able to block any
action to remove them.

   The signs of our growing Intelligence gap are all around us. 
A few years ago the United States was believed to be far, far
ahead in multiple warhead technology for missiles; yet as far
back as 1971, as I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14,
short-range Soviet missiles with multiple nuclear warheads were
found in our own waters.

   A few years ago no real threat in naval aviation was
anticipated from Russia, but two months ago, July 1976, the first
Soviet Aircraft Carrier Kiev entered the Mediterranean through
the Bosporus Straits boldly violating the 1936 Montreux
Convention as it did so; and instead of the stubby little
aircraft the Pentagon had expected, the Kiev carries sleek
advanced aircraft comparable to the American F-4 Phantom with the
additional capability of vertical take-off!  And the Soviets are
building at least four more carriers like the Kiev.  It is now in
the North Sea to bolster Soviet air power, which is a weak spot
in that area for them.

   The military philosophy of detente as expressed to me by a
very high military official is, and I quote: "We watch what
they're doing, and they watch what we're doing, and that's good. 
It prevents miscalculations."  But, my friends, this means we are
in a perpetual war game with all of our lives at stake; and
because of the Intelligence gap that now exists, a miscalculation
cannot be prevented.  Instead, it becomes inevitable; and with it
THERMONUCLEAR WAR.

Topic #3--Yesterday, September 24, 1976, Secretary of the Navy,
J. William Middendorf II, delivered a very important briefing at
the News Media luncheon of the American Security Council held at
the Army-Navy Club here in Washington.  He spoke of things that
every American should be alerted about, but the major news media
treated it as a non-event.  The Baltimore Sun and the Washington
Star carried stories which dealt with splinters from Secretary
Middendorf's speech but missed the basic thrust of his comments. 
The Washington Post and the New York Times and the rest of our
major media said nothing at all.  Here at home another attempt to
warn the American people has so far been muffled and silenced!

   But half a world away, Radio Australia did give Secretary
Middendorf's speech the attention it deserves--and they did not
miss the point.  Here is what Radio Australia had to say at 8:00
o'clock this morning EDT, quote:

  "A warning that the growing strength of the Soviet Navy has
created an emergency situation for the United States has been
sounded in Washington by the Secretary of the Navy, Mr. William
Middendorf.  He also said that the emphasis being placed by the
Soviet Union on Civil Defense has another ominous trend.

   Mr. Middendorf said the Soviet Union now has 345 submarines,
many of them nuclear-powered and armed with missiles capable of
hitting every city in the United States.  In contrast, the United
States has only 169 submarines.  Mr. Middendorf said that it is
evidence by the Soviet Union that the 40,000-ton Kiev-class
Aircraft Carriers, with four more believed to be under
construction, was another ominous change for the near future. 
Mr. Middendorf said that while the Soviet Union was producing
submarines and warships by leaps and bounds, the United States
Navy had been almost cut in half to 474 ships over the past six
years."

   Is the Secretary of the Navy crying "Wolf"?  I submit he is
not, knowing what we know.  In International Law, mining the
harbors of another country is an act of war.  The Soviet Union
has already invaded our territorial waters, not merely with mines
but with hydrogen bombs and multiple-warhead nuclear missiles. 
By contrast, we have placed no such weapons around the Soviet
Union--so the actions already taken by the Soviets are acts of
war and pure aggression.

   As I say these words, an undeclared submarine war is going on
between the Soviet Union and the United States in the waters
surrounding our country.  So far it is still at the stage of
maneuvering for attack on the part of the Soviets, who now have
nearly half of their submarine force surrounding the United
States.  The challenge before us now is to prevent this from
escalating into all-out war, as planned by the Soviet Union.  To
do this, we must all understand what we are up against.

   As I explained several months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
13, WAR DOES NOT JUST HAPPEN!  It is planned and triggered
deliberately by those whose lust for power is more important to
them than the lives of their fellow men.  Conspiracy and
double-cross are standard practice in such things.  The threat of
nuclear attack by the Soviet Union that hangs over us right now
is tied directly to a three-way power struggle involving the
Rockefellers on one side, the Soviet Union on the other, and in
the middle Henry Kissinger who serves both sides!

   The four Rockefeller Brothers, of course, have been
double-crossing and using the American people for
decades--economically, politically, and in wars for their own
enrichment and expansion of power.  These things I've revealed in
my previous tapes, but in particular they have been working hand
in hand with the Soviet Union.  Now, the Soviet Union is
double-crossing them, trying to use their immense military might,
which has been built up with Rockefeller aid, in order to seize
complete world domination in a flash.

   For 20 years Henry Kissinger has been a key Rockefeller agent
in the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, and in recent years has been
the exclusive--I repeat, the exclusive--negotiator with the
Soviets in many sensitive areas behind closed doors.  But
Kissinger sees the handwriting on the wall.  He knows Nelson
Rockefeller is trying to push President Gerald Ford aside to take
over.  Now if that happens, Rockefeller will be within reach of
the Dictatorship he has craved for so long, and Kissinger will
have outlived his usefulness to the Rockefeller Brothers,
becoming instead a dangerous liability because of what he knows.

   Kissinger has now tilted towards the Soviet Union, whom he
thinks will be the winner in this struggle.  Not only has he
created the Intelligence gap I told you about earlier, but he has
also used his unique position to withhold certain critical
information even from the four Rockefeller Brothers!  Not only
did he negotiate the agreements between the Rockefellers and the
Soviets concerning the "NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE" for the benefit of the
Rockefeller Brothers in the planned war to come; but it is he,
Henry Kissinger, who also conspired with the Kremlin for the
Soviet double-cross that is now under way!  The military threat
we now face is tied very closely to political maneuverings here
in the United States.  Nelson Rockefeller at this late date still
wants to get Ford out of the way as quickly as possible in the
hope that he can turn even this dangerous situation we now face
to his own benefit.

   The financial scandal against President Ford that Rockefeller
has had ready to spring for many months is now under way in the
form of the investigation of Ford by the Watergate Special
Prosecutor's office.  But the Soviet threat is real, the time is
short; and, therefore, as Nelson Rockefeller himself keeps
saying, "Anything can happen."

   Once he seizes the power of the presidency, Nelson Rockefeller
will have the option of declaring a "National Emergency" to help
meet this missile threat, thereby activating all of the
dictatorial controls that are provided for in Executive Order
11921, which I discussed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14.  This is
not affected by the bill signed by President Ford on September
14, 1976, which has been falsely represented in some quarters as
eliminating the emergency powers of the president.

   Meanwhile Soviet military forces are now being deployed in
offensive positions.  In Europe over 4000 Soviet tanks have now
been deployed along the borders next to West Germany and Austria. 
Soviet naval and amphibious forces are ready for action in the
area of the Baltic and North Seas, but most ominous of all is the
deployment of Soviet submarines around the shores of the United
States.  In recent days, Soviet submarines have been swarming
into position at battle stations along our East, West, and Gulf
Coasts.  As of today, September 25, 1976, there are at least 142
Soviet submarines in position, lined up at precise intervals up
and down the East and West Coasts of the United States and
concentrated especially in the Gulf of Mexico.  The number of
Soviet submarines now in position around us is almost equal to
the entire submarine force of the United States--which are
scattered world-wide.

   One major advantage the Soviet Union has in this situation is
the ability of the Soviet Naval Command to maintain continuous
contact with any or all of its submarines.  This is a capability
which the United States Navy has been trying to obtain for over a
decade by means of "PROJECT SEAFARER" which has been thwarted
time and time again.  But the Soviet system of communication with
its submarines is far more advanced even than our Project
Seafarer would be, and enables the Soviet submarine force to
operate in close coordination, reacting quickly to any changes in
plans.

   Most of the Soviet submarines now at battle stations around
the United States are in readiness for direct participation in
warfare.  However, certain subs are also still at work planting
underwater missiles along our shores.  For this purpose, the
Soviets have a special type of missile-laying sub that is small,
highly maneuverable, and able to operate in shallow waters and
relatively tight quarters.  The missiles themselves are also
relatively small due to their short range and their use of
satellite guidance.  And these special submarines are very
difficult for our Undersea Sonar Detection Nets to pick up
because the hull is treated in such a way that it absorbs sonar
signals instead of reflecting them.  By moving slowly, these
submarines also avoid making sound that might be picked up by
passive sonar sensors.  Thus they move in and out of our waters
at will, planting missiles and bombs wherever they choose. 
Thanks to the detailed information handed over by Henry
Kissinger, the Soviet Union has been able to turn our undersea
sonar nets into another Maginot line.

   Since I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last month,
additional missiles and bombs have been planted around the world
in certain locations besides the United States.  In particular,
the British Isles were ringed by 23 new underwater missiles as of
September 21, 1976.  On that date, I relayed complete information
to British Intelligence so that the Royal Navy can once again
take action to remove them.

   Elsewhere around the world the situation has not changed
drastically except in the case of Latin America.  As of last
month, the Soviet Union still had not planted underwater missiles
in positions to threaten Latin America; but now they, too, are
targeted.  Mexico has six missiles in its coastal waters. 
British Honduras, Honduras, and Guatemala have one each, while
three missiles now infest the waters off Costa Rica.

   The underwater missile which originally threatened the Panama
Canal from the north end has been removed by the United States
Navy, but now the Soviet Union has planted three new missiles to
the south of the Canal in the Gulf of Panama.

One is at
   Latitude 7 52' 20" North   Longitude 79-35-22 West

The second Panama missile is at
   18-19-24  North   78-58-12  West

and the third is at
   7-57-17  North   78-37-54  West.

   One missile lies off the coast of Surinam, two missiles lie
off Ecuador, and Peru is also targeted by two missiles.  Chile
has three missiles in the waters nearby.  Argentina and Brazil
are targeted by two missiles each.

   Last month I mentioned that the nuclear missiles in Guyana
which were formerly located around the huge Atkinson Airfield
near Georgetown had been moved south to a new location.  As of
now, they have been moved again, slightly north and west to the
new position:
   5-29-33 North   58-55-53 West.

In addition, there is now a Missile Resupply Base for Soviet subs
northwest of Georgetown, Guyana, at
   6-56-24 North   58-25-27 West.

   At present the Soviet submarines are also being resupplied
with nuclear missiles at stations in Cuba and Nicaragua where
Castro has been working very quietly.  In Cuba there is a Nuclear
Depot near the north coast northwest of Camaguey at:
   Latitude 22-7-37 North   Longitude 78-21-32 West.

Until recently, offensive missiles were also installed in
undersea concrete silos along the north and south coasts of Cuba,
ready to fire at the southern United States and the Panama Canal,
but these have now been taken up.

In Nicaragua the Nuclear Depot is on the east coast at:
   Latitude 12-49-42 North   Longitude 83-50-45 West.

These resupply depots are making it possible for the Soviet
submarine fleet to give the United States Navy a very difficult
time.

   On September 16 I gave General Brown a list of 48 new sites
around the United States where missiles and bombs have been
planted during the first two weeks of September.  Two days later
the United States Navy was fast at work picking them up, and by
now has removed practically all of them; but we pick up one and
the Soviets lay down another.

   Using their missile-laying submarines, the Soviets have
planted seven more missiles in new locations around the United
States since my meeting with General Brown.  As of yesterday
afternoon, the United States Navy had already found and removed
two of these new ones--one northeast of Vero Beach, Florida; the
other southeast of Jacksonville, Florida.

   As of today, four of the other five are still in place in the
following locations:

Near Miami, Florida at:
   25-19-0 North   80-12-50 West

In the southwest end of Pamlico Sound, North Carolina, at:
   35-4-20 North   76-30-20 West.

In the northeast end of Pamlico Sound about 20 miles south of
Kitty Hawk, North Carolina at:
   35-40-0 North   75-38-50 West.

And near Valdez, Alaska, at:
   60-51-50 North   147-5-0 West.

The other new missile was planted Sunday night, September 20,
1976, near Bloodsworth Island in Chesapeake Bay at: 38-12-25
North   76-11-55 West but is now being removed.

   The Bloodsworth Island missile is a special case, and I will
have more to say about it in a moment.  Before I do that though,
it is important to mention a diabolical new trick the Soviet
Union is now trying in an effort to confuse the United States
Navy long enough to replant enough missiles in our waters for an
attack.  Some sites which have been cleared by the United States
Navy are now being used to replant new underwater missiles very
close to the exact location used before.  The Soviets anticipate
that when these locations are given to the United States Navy
they will be entered on the Master Plot in use by our Navy, and
at that point it will of course be noticed that the new report
corresponds to a location where a missile has been removed.  The
natural assumption would be, therefore, that such a new report
was simply a repetition of an earlier report and was now
out-of-date.  If this happens, the new missile will be overlooked
and will not be removed.  Just to make sure, however, the Soviet
Union is placing the new missiles just far enough from the
previous location to prevent our Navy from discovering them by
anything less than a complete new search of the area.

   As of approximately noon yesterday, I can confirm two new
missiles which have been newly planted at old locations this way.

One is near Gulfport, Mississippi, at
   Latitude 30-17-20 North   Longitude 89-18-25 West.

The other is near Mobile, Alabama, at
   Latitude 30-38-40 North   Longitude 87-59-0 West.

Both of these sites are almost identical to the ones which I gave
to General Brown on September 16 and which had been cleared by
September 21.

   A moment ago I mentioned a new underwater missile that was
planted last Sunday night, September 20, in Chesapeake Bay near
Bloodsworth Island, which is about midway between Baltimore,
Maryland, and Norfolk, Virginia.  The small missile-laying
submarine installed the Bloodsworth Island missile at 10:30 PM
EDT, and then headed back south toward Norfolk, Virginia.  As of
10:00 AM the following morning, Monday September 21, this small
submarine with at least one more thermonuclear weapon on board,
was close to the mouth of Chesapeake Bay, but had stopped and was
playing possum on the bottom.  Its location was about 10 miles
northeast of Norfolk, Virginia, at:
   Latitude 37-6-20 North   Longitude 76-7-10 West.

Upon receiving this information, I immediately called General
Brown's office and relayed this information to Captain Sidney V.
Wright, Jr.

   Here was a chance for the United States Navy to catch one of
the Soviet missile-laying submarines red-handed.  By the time you
hear this, the Bloodsworth Island missile planted last Sunday
night by this submarine will be gone, thanks to the action now in
progress by the United States Navy; but as of now, the submarine
is still there.  This Soviet missile-laying submarine will stay
there complete with its cargo of mass destruction until our Navy
pulls it up and takes it away because, my friends, the small
Soviet submarine now resting on the bottom of the Chesapeake Bay
has become a tomb for its crew.  Something went wrong with its
power plant, and now the Soviet crew is dead. The sub itself,
still loaded with nuclear weapons, has now become a gigantic mine
in the waters near the biggest naval concentration in the United
States, and so it will remain unless and until it is removed by
the United States Navy.

   My friends, the threat of war from the Soviet Union has never
before been as great nor as imminent as it is now.  But I remain
firmly convinced that, even now, a shooting war can still be
prevented.  Our fate remains in YOUR hands; but now I believe
more than ever that the American people, when told the truth, are
equal to the task.  Congressmen and Senators write letters to
President Ford or Henry Kissinger and get no satisfactory
response; but YOU, you opened the door for communication between
General George S. Brown, who heads our country's military
establishment, and myself, and I thank you from the very bottom
of my heart.

   Now I ask you to get behind General Brown in the same way. 
This is more important than I can express because General Brown,
handicapped by the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger,
is confronted by many opposing forces within the federal
government who, unlike General Brown, are not loyal to the United
States.

   As soon as you finish listening to this tape, I ask you,
PLEASE, to send a letter, telegram, or Mailgram to General Brown
expressing your support.  It took great courage from the
standpoint of his own career for General Brown to see me at all,
yet he overruled his staff in insisting upon doing so.  And under
General Brown's command, with the approval of President Ford as
Commander in Chief, the United States Navy has acted and has  so
far been able to fend off the intended surprise nuclear attack by
the Soviet Navy.

   Send your letters and telegrams to:

General George S. Brown
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff
Washington, D.C.  20301.

Thank him for seeing me, thank him for taking action, and tell
him you are behind him.  By doing this, my friends, YOU can help
strengthen Gen. Brown's hand against those who would rather see
inaction or outright surrender to the Soviet Union.  Remember:
YOUR VOICE COUNTS.

   If God will grant us the time and the wisdom to do so, I
believe the war which is now so close can still be averted; but I
would not be honest if I did not urge you to take such
precautions as you can for your own protection in the event war
does come.  The Soviet Union has a massive Civil Defense program
to enable it to survive nuclear war.  No such preparations have
been made in the United States except for the so-called "Federal
Relocation Arc", a network of 96 virtually bomb-proof underground
cities in which many of the Government officials, who have
betrayed us into war, will be able to ride it out in safety and
comfort.  So the rest of us, who are considered expendable, are
left to fend for ourselves.

   Almost two years ago, looking ahead to this situation, I
recorded my first tape for AUDIO BOOKS. INC. entitled: "HOW TO
PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THE THIRD WORLD
WAR."  The exact timetable and some other details have changed
since then due to unexpected obstacles and failures which the
four Rockefeller Brothers have encountered, including now their
double-cross by the Soviet Union; but the measures I suggested
then are still the ones I would suggest now in order to protect
yourself and your family.  Highly informed individuals who know
from their own sources that my present warnings are correct, are
actively preparing their own bomb shelters right now just in case
the worst should happen.  But as I said in conclusion to that
first tape two years ago, what we could accomplish to protect
ourselves individually was one thing, and what we can accomplish
working together was quite another.  Now, as then, that is where
my real hopes lie; and now, my friends, we are working together
to save our beloved country.  If we will continue without losing
heart, and if we will all show our overwhelming support for
General Brown, then I have the feeling that we're going to do it. 
It may sound too good to be true--but then, so did the concept of
FREEDOM that became the United States of America 200 years ago!

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.

Source